GIFT   OF 


y 


THE 


SHIP  AND  GUN  DRILLS 


U.  S.  NAVY 


1922 


4^ 


I 


WASHINGTON 
GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 

1922 


,/f- 


!    - 


)\^ 


Gift 


Navy  Department, 

Washington,  D.  C. 

1.  The  Ship  and  Gun  Drills,  U.  S.  Navy,  is  approved  and  issued 
to  the  service,  and  supersedes  all  previous  editions. 

2.  The  instructions  contained  herein  shall  be  strictly  followed. 

E.  W.  Eberle, 
Acting  Secretary  of  the  Navy. 


ADDITIONAL  COPIES 

OF  THIS  PUBUCATION  MAY  BE  PROCURED  FROM 

THE  SUPERINTENDENT  OF  DOCUMENTS 

GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE 

WASHINGTON,   D.   C. 

SO 

m  CENTS  PER  COPY 

PURCHASER  AGREES  NOT  TO  RESELL   OR  DISTRIBUTE  THIS 
COPY  FOR  PROFIT.— PUB.   RES.  57,  APPROVED  MAY  11,  1922 


CONTENTS. 


Page. 

Index V 

Introduction xiii 

Part  I .  Organization 1 

II.  Battle  drills 9 

III,  Emergency  drills 21 

IV.  Gun  drills 37 

V.  Notes  on  Handling  Men 95 

VI.  Ship  manuals 103 

VII.  Physical  exercises 119 

VIII.  Boatswain's  calls 157 

IX.  Bugle  calls 173 

III 


531G1 1 


INDEX. 


Page.  Art. 

Abandon  ship 30 

Bill,  requirements  of 30  340 

Boats,  capacities 32  343 

return  of 33  345 

Calls 30  341 

Provisioning  for 33  344 

Stations  and  duties 31  342 

Bayonet  exercise 121 

Bayonet  fighting 128  613 

Assault  exercises 129<  ^-.^ 

Butt,  use  of 126  610 

Combinations 127  612 

Facings 123  607 

Guard 121  605 

Change 127  611 

Intervals,  take 121  604 

Parries 123  608 

Steps 122  606 

Thrusts 124  609 

Boatswain's  call 159 

Description  of  the  call 159  701 

Positions  of  the  hand 160  703 

Tuning  the  call 159  702 

Boatswain's  pipe  and  passing  the  word 163 

Pipes  and  their  uses 163  706 

Score,  explanation  of 163  704 

Voice,  use  of  in  passing  the  word 163  705 

Torpedo  Defense  Battery  Drills 54 

Service,  general 54  450 

5-inch/51     61  453 

4-inch/50     60  452 

3-inch/50  S-A.  A-A 54  451 

Bugle  calls  in  general 175 

Boat  calls  (list) 180  804 

Drill  signals  (explanation) 182  807 

General  remarks 175  801 

V 


VI  INDEX. 

Bugle  calls  in  general — Continued.  Page. 

Infantry  and  artillery  calls  (list) 181 

Marches  and  quicksteps  (list) 183 

Miscellaneous  calls  (list) 178 

Routine  calls  (list) 176 

Use  of  calls  on  shore,  remarks 181 

Bugle  calls  used  on  board  ship 183 

Boat  calls  (scores) 197 

Miscellaneous  calls  (scores) 193 

Routine  calls  (scores) 183 

Clear  ship 11 

Preparedness 11 

Thoroughness 11 

Two  stages  in 11 

Clear  ship  for  action 12 

Call  for 12 

General  duties 12 

Collision 25 

Anchor,  at 25 

Calls 25 

Duties,  general 26 

Detailed 26 

Escapes  in 27 

General  quarters,  at 27 

Officers,  station  at 26 

Complement 3 

Crew , 3 

Officers 3 

Subdivisions  of 3 

Departments  and  divisions 4 

Department 4 

Construction 5 

Engineering 5 

Gunnery 4 

Medical 6 

Navigation 5 

Supply 6 

Di  vision -s 4 

Auxiliaries 5 

Boilers 5 

Electrical 5 

Fire  control 4 

Gun 4 

Navigator's 5 

Numbering  of 6 

Main  engines 5 


INDEX.  VII 

Division-s — Continued.  Page.  Art. 

Supply fi  120 

Kepair. .  .■. 6  116 

Surgeon's 6  118 

Torpedo 5  107 

Emergency  (in  general ) 23 

Casualties  to  personnel,  in 24  313 

Communications  in 23  309 

Details 23  307 

Drills,  definition  of 23  301 

Hammocks,  clear 24  312 

Officer-s,  of  the  deck  in 23  303 

Arms 23  304 

Calling  at  night 23  308 

Pilot  ladders,  etc.,  in 24  314 

Retreat  from 24  311 

Secure  from 24  310 

Signal 23  302 

Silence  in 23  305 

Stations 23  306 

Fire 27 

Breathing  apparatus,  in 29  338 

Calls - ...  - 27  331 

Compartments,  care,  against 28  336 

Details,  special 28  333 

Duties,  general 28  334 

Officers 27  332 

Equipment,  testing 28  335 

Extinguishers 28  337 

General  quarters,  at 29  339 

Instructions,  general 27  330 

Fire  and  rescue 33 

Calls 33  347 

Employment 33  346 

Fire  detail 34  350 

Organization 33  348 

Relief  detail 35  351 

Rescue  detail 33  349 

Gas  defense 20  228 

General  muster 108 

Ceremony.... 108  513 

Formation 108  512 

General  quarters 18 

Call 19  225 

Definition 18  223 


YIII  INDEX. 

General  quarters — Continued.  Page.  Art. 

Exercise 19  227 

General  duties 18  224 

Reports , 19  226 

Guard  of  the  day,  the 108 

Details  and  tours 110  519 

Guard,  chief  petty  officer  of  the \  ^^2  523 

Commander  of  the Ill  522 

Officer  of  the 109  514 

Men  of  the 113  526 

Petty  officers  of  the 112  524 

General  duties 113  525 

Strength  of  the 109  517 

Uniform  and  arms  of  the 110  521 

Lower  deck  petty  officers 109  516 

Orders 114  527 

Posts  of  sentinels 110  520 

Rosters 110  518 

Guard  mounting 114  528 

Gun  drills,  general  notes 39 

Casualties,  material 42  409 

Personnel 43  410 

Commands,  manner  of  giving 39  404 

Used 39  405 

Division  officer's  responsibilty 42  408 

Exercise,  preparing  for 41  406 

Providing  for,  details 42  407 

Gun  stations,  assignment 39  402 

Muster,  falling  in  for 39  403 

Instructors 39  401 

Handling  men .  .  •. 97 

Infantry  and  artillery  calls 199 

Calls  used  mainly  on  shore  (scores) 199  812 

Drills  signals  (scores) 201  813 

Inspections 192 

Instruction 175 

Loading,  notes  on 47 

Accuracy 47  428 

Carelessness  in 48  432 

Drill,  amount  of 48  431 

Development  of 48  430 

General  rules 48  433 

Movement  required 47  429 

Rapidity 47  427 


INDEX.  IX 

Page.  Art. 

Marches  and  quicksteps 207 

Marches  (scores) 207  814 

Quicksteps  (scores) 209  815 

Misfires  and  hangfires 44 

Classification  of  guns,  for 44  419 

Hangfire,  charge,  causes 44  418 

Defiinition 44  416 

Misfire-s,  calling 47  425 

Charges,  causes 44  418 

Classification 44  415 

Definition 44  414 

Primer,  causes 44  417 

Priming  tools,  use  of 47  424 

Procedure 45  420 

B.  L.  R.  guns.  Table  1 45  421 

Combination  primer  cartridge  case  guns,  Table 

II.-. 46  422 

Percussion    primers    in    cartridge    case   guns. 

Table  III 46  423 

Wartime 47  426 

Physical  drill  with  arms 131 

'  Coming  to  ready 131  617 

Diagonal  lunges 134  622 

Down  and  forward 132  618 

Forward  and  up 132  619 

Forward  lunges 135  623 

Front  sweeps    135  624 

General  rules 131  616 

Overhead  twists 136  625 

Side  pushes 134  621 

Side  twists 137  626 

Up  and  shoulders 134  620 

Physical  acti\'ity  exercises 121  601 

Physical  drill  without  arms 138 

Exercises 138  629 

Quarter  bill 13 

Action,  and  standing  by  for 18  220 

Aid  to  wounded 16  218 

Armament  and  ammunition 14  213 

Battle,  organization 14  211 

Preparations  for 18  222 

Stations 13  210 

Training  at 18  219 

Communications 14  214 


X  INDEX. 

Quarter  bill — Continued.  Page. 

Fire  control 14 

Maintenance  and  routine 18 

Motive  machinery 15 

Repairs 15 

Ship  control 15 

Quarters  for  muster  and  inspection 105 

Band 105  503 

Calls 105  501 

Department  formation 106  505 

Division-s,  parades 105  502 

Small,  formation  of 108  509 

Succession  in  the 108  508 

To  form  the --  106  507 

Formation  after  secure 108  510 

Inspections 108  511 

Officers,  duties  of 105  504 

And  petty  officers,  posts  of 106  506 

Sight-setting  notes 43 

Accuracy,  necessity  for 43  411 

Sight-setter,  selection  of 43  412 

Training  of 43  413 

Singing,  mass 156 

Station  bills 6 

General  provisions  of 6  122 

Strip  ship 11 

Material  to  be  landed 11  205 

Protective  preparations 11  206 

Torpedoes 11  207 

WTien  done 11  204 

Turret  gun  drills 50 

Detailed  drill 50  434 

Loading-s,  exercises 48  433 

Position 52  439 

Preliminary  instruction 52  442 

Timing- . .  / 53  444 

Pointers,  selection  of 54  448 

Training  of 53  447 

Powder  passing , 53  446 

Priming 53  445 

Safety 54  449 

Turret,  control  of 50  435 

Drill  commands 52  438 

Gun-crew  titles,  standard 52  440 

Li\dng  in 51  437 

Stations 50  436 

Assignment  to 52  441 


INDEX.  XI 

Turret  gun  drills — Continued.  Page.  Art. 

12-inch,  45  caliber 71  454 

14-inch,  50  caliber  (3  gun) 74  455 

16-inch,  45  caliber  (2  gun) 82  456 

14-inch,  45  caliber  (2  gun) 89  457 

Watches,  setting  of 170  707 

Water-tight  integrity 24 

General  rule 24  315 

Organization  for 24  316 

Water-tight  doors,  call 24  317 

Closing 24  318 

Duties 25  319 

Remarks 25  322 

Responsibility 25  320 

Ventilators 25  321 


INTRODUCTION. 


In  the  revision  of  "Ship  and  Gun  Drills,  1914,"  it  has  been  con- 
Btantly  borne  in  mind  that  efficiency  in  battle  is  the  goal  of  all 
naval  training.  For  the  individual  ship  of  any  type  this  means 
that  its  facilities  of  offense  and  defense  be  developed  to  the  utmost. 
These  facilities,  for  convenience  grouped  under  the  heads  of  ship 
control,  fire  control,  and  conmiunications,  must  not  only  be  operated 
at  maximum  efficiency,  but  all  must  be  coordinated  to  produce  an 
entity — the  fighting  ship. 

With  this  ideal  in  mind  this  book  has  been  revised  in  view  of 
experience  prior,  during,  and  subsequent  to  the  World  War.  Espe- 
cial emphasis  is  laid  on  the  necessity  of  such  organization  and  train- 
ing as  will  insure  vessels  keeping  afloat,  maintaining  speed,  and 
delivering  an  accurate,  maximum  volume  of  fire.  The  dictum  that 
a  rapid  and  accurate  volume  of  fire  is  the  best  protection  from  the 
enemy's  gims  is  true;  but  a  well  organized  ship-control  party  trained 
to  circumvent  every  possible  personnel  or  material  injury  in  battle 
is  not  incompatible  with  this  truth,  but  complementary. 

It  has  been  impossible  in  a  publication  of  this  kind  to  provide  a 
standard  drill  for  every  ship  or  every  weapon.  Development  is  so 
rapid  and  consequent  variations  so  great  that  this  can  not  be  done. 
Certain  Uyes  have  been  selected  and  a  standard  method  laid  down. 
While  it  is  not  the  department's  policy  to  restrict  initiative,  these 
methods,  ha^dng  been  fully  tested  by  long  experience  should  not 
be  deviated  froni  unless  the  change  demonstrates  a  positive  improve- 
ment when  considered  in  all  its  aspects. 

The  chapter  on  "Explosives"  is  omitted  as  it  is  now  covered  in 
the  Ordnance  Manual,  1922,  issued  by  the  Bureau  of  Ordnance. 
No  attempt  has  been  made  to  include  drills  and  exercises  for  a 
landing  force,  as  they  are  set  forth  in  the  "Landing  Force  Manual, 
1920." 

XIII 


Part  I 
ORGANIZATION 


Page. 

Complement 3 

Departments  and  Divisions 4 

Station  Bills 6 

1 


ORGANIZATION. 


COMPLEMENT. 


101.  Officers. — (1)  The  number  of  officers  assigned  each  ship  is 
designated  by  the  Bureau  of  Navigation  in  two  classes — the  com- 
plement and  the  allowance. 

(a)  The  "Complement"  is  the  number  of  officers  of  each  rank 
(line  and  staff)  required  to  man  the  ship  under  all  war  conditions. 

(b)  The  "Allowance' '  is  the  number  of  officers  of  each  rank  (line 
and  staff)  required  to  man  the  ship  under  certain  peace-time  condi- 
tions. As  these  conditions  vary  from  time  to  time,  and,  as  the 
available  supply  of  commissioned  personnel  is  subject  to  constant 
change,  the  "allowance"  must  never  be  used  in  the  assignment  of 
officers  to  battle  stations. 

(2)  The  duties  and  responsibilities  of  the  indi\idual  officers  are 
clearly  set  forth  in  the  Navy  Regulations,  1920. 

102.  Crew. — ^The  foregoing  remarks  on  the  "Complement"  and 
the  "Allowance"  apply  also  to  the  crew.  The  "Complement" 
should  provide  for  sufficient  men,  in  the  proper  ratings,  to  fulfill 
the  requirements  of — 

(1)  The  latest  "Report  of  the  Fire  Control  Board." 

(2)  The  latest  "Report  of  the  Ship  Control  Board./' 

(3)  Standing  orders. 

(4)  Efficient  service  of  the  battery,  operation  of  machinery,  com- 
munications, manning  repair  stations  and  dressing  stations,  and 
the  special  ratings  required  to  mess  and  supply  officers  and  men 
under  service  conditions. 

103.  Subdivisions  of  the  complement. — The  complement  of 
officers  and  men  shall  be  organized  into  such  divisions  and  crews  as 
will  be  most  conducive  to  the  fighting  efficiency  of  the  ship,  and 
upon  this  organization  will  be  based  all  station  bills  for  routine  work. 
Fighting  units,  crews,  and  divisions  will  be  so  assigned  to  ship 's 
work  as  to  be  kept  together  and  as  near  as  possible  to  their  battle 
stations.  So  far  as  practicable,  the  divisions  and  crews  performing 
routine  work  will  be  commanded  and  directed  in  such  work  by  the 
officers  and  petty  officers  who  will  control  them  in  battle.  For  con- 
venience of  administration,  divisions  \vill  be  grouped  under  the 
appropriate   department  heads. 

7431°— 23 2  3 


4  SHIP   AND    GUN   DRILLS. 

PEPAHTMENTS  AND  DIVISIONS. 

104.  Gunnery   department. — 

I.  The  gun  divisions  (including  marine  di\T.sion,   and,  on   small 
ships,  when  desirable,  a  powder  di\dsion). 

II.  The  fire-control  division. 

III.  The  torpedo  division. 


105.  (1)  Gun  divisions. — 

(A)  Main  batterv  division. 

(B)  T.  p.  battery  di\dsion. 

(C)  Antiaircraft  division. 

(2)  Numbering  divisions. — The  crew  of  each  turret  'udll  constitute 
a  di\dsion,  and  these  divisions  will  be  numbered  from  forward  aft. 
Torpedo  defense  battery  di\T-sions  will  be  numbered  from  forward 
aft,  folio-wing  the  main  battery  di^dsions.  Antiaircraft  division 
Avill  follow  torpedo  defense  division. 

(3)  Numbering  turrets. — Turrets  will  be  numbered  from  fonvard 
aft. 

(4)  Numbering  guns. — Turret  guns  vdW  be  numbered  serially 
from  forward  aft;  right  guns  the  lowest  number  in  each  turret. 
The  right  gun  is  the  gun  on  the  right-hand  side  of  an  observer 
standing  in  the  turret  officer's  booth  and  facing  toward  the  muzzle 
of  the  gun.  Beginning  with  the  lowest  deck  on  which  there  are 
guns,  torpedo  defense  guns  ^^dll  be  numbered  serially  fi'om  forward 
aft,  starboard  guns  being  given  odd  numbers,  port  guns  even  num- 
bers. If  the  foremost  gun  on  the  lowest  deck  is  on  the  center  line, 
that  gun  ^^dll  be  numbered  "1 "  of  its  class.  These  guns  will  have 
separate  series  for  each  caliber.  For  antiaircraft  guns  it  is  consid- 
ered that  these  guns  should  be  numbered  serially  from  forward  aft, 
starboard  guns  ha\dng  odd  numbers,  port  guns  even  numbers.  No 
difference  in  numbers  should  be  made  for  difference  in  height  of 
these  guns. 

Antiaircraft  guns  will  be  numbered  according  to  the  same  rules  as 
torpedo  defense   battery. 

II. 

106.  Fire-control  division. — The  fire-control  division  shall  com- 
prise those  officers  and  men  detailed  to  fire-control  stations.  Men 
of  other  divisions,  assigned  for  battle  stations  only,  shall  for  routine 
administration  duties  be  included  in  and  muster  with  their  respective 
divisions.  The  organization  must  pro\ide  for  the  station  of  selected, 
trained  lookouts. 


PART    I ORGANIZATION.  5 

III. 

107.  Torpedo  division. — The  torpedo  division  comprise  s: 

(1)  The  torpedo  creius  and  men  stationed  to  direct  and  control 
the  torpedo  fire. 

(2)  The  gunner^s  crew,  in  charge  of  the  gunner,  comprising  such 
men  as  may  be  detailed  by  the  captain  for  the  care,  upkeep,  and 
repair  of  ordnance  material.  The  gunner  performs  these  duties 
under  the  direct  supervision  of  the  gunnery  officer. 

(3)  Torpedo  tubes  shall  be  numbered  serially  from  forward  aft, 
starboard  tubes  odd  numbers,  port  tubes  even  numbers. 

108.  Navigation  department — 

IV.  The  navigator's  di\ision. 

IV. 

109.  Navigator's  division. — 

(1)  The  ship  control  crew. 

(2)  Communication  control. 

(a)  The  signal  crew. 

(b)  The  radio  crew. 

110.  Engineering  department. — 

V.  The  main  engines  division. 

VI.  The  boilers  division. 

VII.  The  auxiliaries  division. 

VIII.  Electrical  division. 

V. 

111.  Main  engines  division. — Comprises  those  men  having 
to  do  with  the  operation  and  maintenance  of  the  main  engines. 

VI. 

112.  Boilers  division. — Comprises  those  men  having  to  do 
with  the  operation  and  maintenance  of  the  boilers. 

VII. 

113.  Auxiliaries  division. — Comprises  those  men  having  to  do 
with  the  operation  and  maintenance  of  the  auxiliaries. 

VIII. 

114.  Electrical  division. — Comprises  all  men  having  to  do 
with  the  maintenance  and  operation  of  electric  machinery  except 
the  main  drive  and  radio  equipment. 

115.  Construction  department. — 

IX.  The  repair  division. 


b  SHIP    AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

IX. 

116.  Repair  division. — 

(1)  The  boatswain''s  crew,  comprising  the  nucleus  of  the  deck 
repair  crew. 

(2)  The  carpenter's  crew,  comprising  the  hull  repair  crews. 

117.  Medical  Department. — 

X.  The  surgeon's  di\-ision. 

X. 

118.  Surgeon's  division. — The  Hospital  Corps  force.  Men  of 
other  divisions,  assigned  for  battle  stations  only,  shall  for  routine 
administration  duties  be  included  in  and  muster  AAith  their  re- 
spective divisions. 

119.  Supply  department. — 

XI.  The  supply  division. 

XI. 

120.  Supply  division. — 

(1)  Pay  and  G.  S.  K.  crew  comprises  those  men  detailed  for 
duty  therein. 

(2)  Commissary  crew  comprises  all  men  haAing  to  do  ^dth  the 
commissary  of  the  ship  and  including  officers'  messmen. 

121.  Numbering  divisions. — Divisions  shall  be  numbered  in 
the  follo^^'ing  order: 

I.  (A)  Main  battery  divisions. 

I.  (B)  Torpedo-defense  battery  divisions. 

I.  (C)  Antiaircraft  divisions. 

II.  Fire-control  division. 

III.  Torpedo  division  (powder  division). 

IV.  Navigator's  division. 

V.  Main  engines  division. 

VI.  Boilers  division. 

VII.  Auxiliaries  division. 

VIII.  Electrical  division. 

IX.  Repair  division. 

X.  Surgeon's  division. 

XI.  Supply  di^'ision. 

STATION  BILLS. 

122.  (1)  General  provisions. — Every  ship  shall  have  compre- 
hensive watch,  quarter,  and  station  bills  sho%ving  the  stations  and 
duties  of  officers  and  men  at  clear  ship,  standing  by  for  action  and 


PART    I ORGANIZATION.  7 

action  day  and  night,  under  different  conditions,  collision,  fire, 
boats,  landing  force,  cruising,  fueling,  cleaning  and  care  of  ship, 
and  liberty.  The  quarter  bill  is  the  basis  of  ship  organization  and 
all  other  bills  shall  be  derived  from  it.  In  its  scope  the  quarter 
bill  \n\\  embody  the  whole  ship,  and  in  its  detail  it  wdll  provide 
for  every  contingency  of  battle  that  can  reasonably  be  foreseen. 

(2)  Every  officer  and  man  on  reporting  on  board  ship  for  duty 
should  at  once  be  assigned  to  his  watch,  quarter,  and  station  billet. 
To  provide  for  the  security  of  the  ship  under  all  conditions  that 
might  arise,  each  department  and  division  should  be  equally 
divided  into  sections  or  quarter  watches;  and  each  officer  and  man 
should  be  regularly  assi^gned  to  one  of  these  sections  to  the  end 
that  all  stations,  at  all  times,  will  be  covered  under  all  conditions 
of  service. 

(3)  These  bills  shall  be  kept  up  to  date  and  be  in  the  possession 
of  all  officers.  The  di\dsion  bill  %vill  be  posted  upon  the  division 
bulletin  board.  In  smaller  vessels,  the  complete  ship  bill  shall  be 
posted  for  the  information  of  entire  crew. 


Part  II 
BATTLE   DRILLS 


Page. 
Clear  Ship 11 

Quarter  Bill 13 

General  Quarters 18 

Gas  Defense 20 


BATTLE   DRILLS. 


CLEAR    SHIP. 


GENERAL. 


201.  Preparedness. — It  is  the  duty  of  the  ship  to  take  the 
initiative  in  maintaining  a  full  allowance  of  fuel,  ammunition, 
stores,  and  spare  parts.  It  may  become  impossible  to  overcome 
defects  and  supply  deficiencies  when  hostilities  are  impending.  A 
ship,  on  leaving  port,  should  at  all  times  be  prepared  for  action  on 
short  notice.  Guns  should  be  kept  bore  sighted.  The  stripping  and 
clearing  of  the  ship  should  mean  only  the  accomplishment  of  details 
contributing  to  the  offensive  use  of  the  armament  and  to  the  protec- 
tion of  personnel  and  material. 

202.  Thoroughness. — Clear  ship  is  to  be  considered  as  an  evo- 
lution in  which  thoroughness  is  the  first  consideration. 

203.  Two  stages  of  clear  ship. — Ships  shall  be  cleared  for 
battle  as  far  as  material  is  concerned  in  two  stages  under  the  follo^^'ing 
designations: 

I.  Strip  ship. 
II.   Clear  ship  Jor  action. 

I.    STRIP    SHIP. 

204.  When  done. — This  shall  be  done  when  war  is  impending. 
206.  Material   to   be   landed. — (For  drill  and  inspection   the 

Jollowing  material  shall  he  tagged  ''Store.  "    Boats  nay  he  anchored  off): 

(1)  Boats;   except  those  designated  by  the  commander  in  chief. 

(2)  Generally  everything  inflammable  or  liable  to  cause  splinters 
that  can  be  dispensed  A\'ith. 

(3)  Stanchions  and  da\its  not  needed.  (Facilities  for  spreading 
certain  awnings  should  be  retained.) 

(4)  Unnecessary  canopy  frames. 

(5)  Unnecessary  clothing  of  officers  and  men. 

(6)  Substitute  \vindsails  for  ventilators  where  possible. 

206.  Protective  preparations. — {Need  not  he  done  for  drill  and 
inspection): 

(7)  Rig  wire  splinter  nets  under  engine  room  and  fire  room  gratings. 

(8)  Rig  splinter  screens  and  mantlets. 

207.  Torpedoes. — (Need  not  he  done  for  drill  and  inspection): 

(9)  Fit  war  heads. 


12  SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

II,    CLEAR    SHIP   FOR    ACTION. 

208.  The  call. — The  boatswain's  pipe  "All  hands  clear  ship  for 
action." 

209.  General  duties. — {For  drill  and  inspection  the  following 
details  need  not  he  completed,  hut  the  ship's  hill  shall  shoiv  in  detail  ivhat 
should  he  done): 

(1)  Prepare  for  full  power. 

(2)  Stow  in  torpedo  rooms  detonators  and  dry  primers  for  use  in 
torpedoes.  Others  shall  be  stowed  in  eafe  compartments  well  below 
the  water  line. 

^3)  Prepare  to  load  torpedoes. 

(4)  Release  prisoners. 

(5)  Throw  overboard  unnecessary  inflammable  oils,  paints,  and 
liquids. 

{For  drill  and  inspection  the  following  shall  he  done): 

(6)  Rig  light  life  lines  which,  if  carried  away,  ■v\'ill  not  foul  screws. 
Lay  down  and  secure  davits  and  stanchions.  (The  necessary  short 
stanchions  should  be  so  fitted  on  rails  and  bridges  that  they  can  be 
kept  shipped  and  not  interfere  with  gunfire.) 

(7)  Fill  recoil  cylinders. 

(8)  Prepare  dynamos,  air  compressors,  and  fire  and  bilge  pumps  for 
service,  and  start  those  necessary. 

(9)  Connect  up  and  test  out  all  fire-control  and  ship-control  com- 
munications and  instruments. 

(10)  Test  out  and  prepare  for  action  all  firing  circuits  and  air 
blasts. 

(11)  Connect  up  and  test  out  fire  hose.  (Secure  hose  so  as  to  be 
clear  of  blast  of  guns.) 

(12)  Rig  all  necessary  blast  screens.  Secm'e  searchlight  against 
blast. 

(13)  Throw  in  battle  circuits.  Thi-ow  out  all  circuits  not  required 
for  action. 

(14)  Prepare  auxiliary  lighting  arrangements. 

(15)  Rig  battle  signal  stations  (radio  and  flag). 

(16)  Rig  repair  station;  prepare  collision  mat. 

(17)  Rig  dressing  stations  and  prepare  transportation  for  wounded. 

(18)  Supply  first  aid  packages. 

(19)  Fill  gun  tubs. 

(20)  Supply  drinking  water. 

(21)  See  in  proper  places  necessary  spare  parts,  and  ordnance 
material. 

(22)  Prepare  auxiliary  steering  and  ship-handling  stations. 

(23)  Shut  steam  not  needed  off  all  unprotected  leads.  Prepare 
to  operate  boiler  stop  and  safety  valves  from  outside  boiler  com- 
partments. 


PART    II BATTLE    DRILLS.  13 

(24)  Wet  down  weather  decks  and  plug  scuppers.  Put  water  in 
boats  and  lash  canvas  about  them. 

(23)  See  auxiliary  gear  for  sustaining  combat  ready  for  use. 
Appliances  for  group  or  independent  control  of  guns  at  hand. 
Ammunition  supply  and  transportation  gear  rigged. 

(26)  Rig  torpedo-firing  director  and  test  torpedo-firing  circuit  and 
special  signals  and  lines  of  communication  to  torpedo  room. 

(27)  Provide  grapnels  for  clearing  the  screws. 

(28)  Secure  anchors,  unbend  chains,  and  pay  below.  (While  on 
soundings  keep  one  chain  bent.) 

(29)  Stow  life  preservers  in  convenient  but  protected  places. 

(30)  Close  the  water-tight  doors  and  hatches  designated  to  oe 
sealed  during  action.  Close  battle  ports.  At  night  screen  lights. 
(Attention  is  called  to  the  necessity  for  not  interrupting  the  means 
of  access  or  of  communication. to  the  various  parts  of  the  ship.) 

(31)  Unship  and  secure  the  ventilators  and  ladders  that  interfere 
with  the  battery. 

(32)  Stowage  shall  be  assigned  to  the  follo^ving,  which  will  leave 
free  passage  for  the  ship's  company  and  protection  from  gunfire: 

(a)  Na\dgational  instruments. 

(b)  Coaling  gear. 

(c)  Mess  and  galley  gear. 

(d)  Sick  bay  mattresses  not  needed,  bags,  hammocks,  ditty 
boxes,  and  cots. 

e)  Gunnery  training  gear, 
jy)  Diving  gear. 

g)  Field  guns. 

[h)  Wash  deck  gear. 

2")  All  other  loose  gear. 

(33)  Before  battle  men  shall  bathe  and  shift  into  clean  under- 
clothes. 

^34)  Supply  ammunition. 

?35)  Have  small  arms  and  ammunition  ready  for  serving  out. 

(36)  Masthead  the  battle  ensigns  and  make  all  final  preparations 
for  battle. 

(37)  Supply  gas  masks. 

(38)  Arrange  for  providing  .ood  and  water. 

QUARTER   BILL. 

210.  Battle  stations  and  reliefs. — 

(1)  Captain,  conning  tower;  relief,  executive. 

(2)  Executive,  secondary  ship  control  station;  in  direct  commu- 
nication with  the  captain. 

(3)  Gunnery  officer,  chief  fire  control  (Groups  I  and  II);  relief, 
assistant  fire-control  officer. 


14  SHIP   AND    GI'X    DRILLS. 

(4)  Navigating  officer,  primary  ship-control  station  (Group  III); 
relief,  designated  by  the  captain. 

(5)  Engineer  officer,  engine  rooms  (Group  IV;  relief,  next  in  rank 
in  the  engineering  department. 

(6)  First  lieutenant,  central  station  (Group  V);  relief,  designated 
by  the  captain. 

(7)  Medical  officer,  primary  dressing  station  (Group  VI);  relief, 
next  in  rank  in  the  medical  department. 

(8)  Supply  officer,  station  and  relief  to  be  designated  by  the 
captain. 

211.  Battle  organization. — The  quarter  bill  shall  show  the 
grouping  of  officers  and  men  with  their  stations  and  duties  in  the 
battle  organization  as  follows,  to  carry  out  fleet  doctrine  and  depart- 
ment's policy. 


212.  Fire  control.— 

(1)  Keeping  gun  range  during  the  "approach." 

(2)  Under  all  conditions  of  battle: 
(a)  Successive  stations. 

(6)  Direction  and  control  on  one  target. 

(c)  Division  and  control  on  two  targets  on  the  same  side. 

(d)  Di\dsion  and  control  on  two  targets  on  opposite  sides. 

(e)  Direction  and  control  of  torpedo  defense  battery  on  attack- 

ing destroyers  during  a  day  action. 
(/)  Independent  turret  control. 
(g)  On  attacking  destroyers  at  night. 
(h)  Antiaircraft  control. 

(3)  Casualties  and  procedure. 

(4)  Secondary  searchlight  locations, 

II. 

213.  Armament  and  ammunition. — 

(1)  Guns  and  torpedoes. 

(2)  Ammunition  supply. 

(3)  Gun  crews  in  reserve. 

(4)  Gun  and  torpedo  casualties. 

(5)  Ordnance  repair  crew. 

214.  Communications — 

(1)  Bridge  signals. 

(2)  Radio. 

(Details  to  be  provided  for  as  covered  in  department's  radio 
instructions.) 


PART   II BATTLE    DRILLS.  15 

III. 

215.  Ship  control — 

(1)  Successive  ship  control  stations. 

(2)  Successive  steering  stations,  methods  of  steering. 

(3)  Interior  communications. 

(4)  Lookouts. 

(Details  to  be  provided  for  as  covered  in  department's  report.) 

IV. 

216.  Motive  machinery  and  auxiliaries — 

(1)  Engines,  boilers,  and  auxiliaries. 

(2)  Casualties  and  procedure. 

(3)  Engineer  force  in  reserve. 

(4)  Engineer  repair  crew. 

V. 

217.  Repairs— 

(1)  Fire,  collision,  and  damage  from  torpedo  and  shell  fire  in. 
action. 

(2)  Water-tight  doors  closed  and  those  not  to  be  closed. 

(3)  Procedure  in  emergencies,  such  as  fouling  screws;  masts,  one 
or  both,  shot  away;  taking  disabled  ship  in  tow,  etc. 

(4)  In  case  of  damage  to  hull  from  collision,  torpedo,  or  shell  fire, 
the  first  lieutenant  shall  be  prepared  to  take  prompt  action  to  right 
list  and  trim  as  provided  in  "Instructions  for  Battle  Conditions' '  in 
Ships  General  Information  Book. 

(5)  To  be  in  readiness  to  act  in  case  of  damage  to  hull  from  collision, 
torpedo  or  shell  fire,  there  should  be  men  stationed  in  the  water- 
tight subdivisions  to  report  promptly  on  all  damage,  the  location 
and  nature;  cause  and  extent  of  same,  and  to  receive  further  instruc- 
tions. In  order  to  accomplish  this,  there  shall  be  drilled  and  organ- 
ized a  system  of  patrols. 

(6)  There  shall  be  provided  in  the  central  station  an  organization 
which  shall  cover  all  matters  pertaining  to  the  water-tight  integrity; 
it  shall  include  proper  diagrams,  charts,  or  models  which  can  be 
used  in  connection  with  the  recording  of  all  casualties  and  the  action 
taken  thereon.  The  training  and  drills  of  personnel  for  keeping 
ships  afloat  on  an  even  keel  and  for  handling  all  hull  casualties 
shall  include  a  study  of  a  water-tight  subdivision  model  of  the  ship, 
constructed  to  scale  and  available  for  use  and  study  by  all  officers 
and  men. 

(7)  The  repair  crews  will  be  available  for  fighting  fires,  operating 
valves,  shoring  bulkheads,  stopping  leaks,  clearing  ^vreckage, 
repairing  electric  leads,  etc.  Portables  and  tools  will  be  supplied  at 
the  repaii-  stations.  Tools  shall  include  ^^Tenches,  sledges,  clamps, 
crowbars,  tackles,  shores,  pipe  cutters,  gear  for  repairing  electric 


16  SHIP    AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

leads  and  apparatus,  etc.  Stowage  at  the  repair  stations  should  be 
provided  for  this  gear.  The  repair  crews  shall  include  the  rescue 
breathing  apparatus  details. 

VI. 

218.  Aid  to  wounded — 

(1)  Primary  and  secondary  dressing  stations. 

(2)  Stretchermen  details. 

(3)  General  instructions.^ 

(a)  First-aid  appliances  include  shell  wound  dressings  and  tourni- 
quets. Solutions  for  the  smoke-inflamed  eyes  of  the  men  at  the 
guns,  and  dressings  for  burns  and  scalds  in  engine  and  fire  rooms, 
plainly  labled,  should  be  accessible  to  those  stations. 

(b)  First-aid  instruction  comprises  the  following: 

(1)  Continuous  first-aid  service  to  the  wounded  during  battle  on 
the  part  of  the  personnel  at  large.  The  effectiveness  of  this  ser\ice 
will  depend  largely  upon  the  thoroughness  with  which  the  units  have 
been  previously  instructed  by  the  medical  and  division  officers,  as 
required  under  the  regulations;  and  how  well  they  have  become 
imbued  with  the  principle  that  first  aid,  calmly  administered  to 
themselves  or  by  their  comrades,  represents  the  maximum  ser\ice 
that  can  be  rendered  the  wounded  during  the  height  of  a  naval  action. 
The  ship 's  force  should  have  been  warned  that  elaborate  measures 
of  treatment  or  extensive  transportation  during  battle  are  both 
inadvisable  and  impracticable.  The  wounded  man,  after  the 
administration  of  first  aid,  should  be  placed  to  one  side,  where  his 
presence  will  be  least  felt  and  where  he  will  not  incommode  or 
disturb  the  fighting  force. 

(2)  In  a  suspension  or  lull  of  battle  when  prompt  treatment  of  the 
wounded  at  or  near  the  battle  stations  is  impossible,  the  stretchermen 
shall  be  required  to  seek  out  the  wounded,  to  afford  them  relief,  to 
transport  them  to  the  battle  dressing  stations  and  to  prepare  a  list  of 
the  killed.  It  should  be  the  first  duty  of  the  medical  officer  to  give 
attention  to  those  whose  services  can  be  restored.  These  men 
should  be  promptly  returned  to  their  stations.  It  must  be  borne  in 
mind  that  the  primary  purpose  of  first  aid  is  to  keep  as  many  effect- 
ives at  their  stations  as  possible.  A  graver  class  of  injuries  may 
require  deliberate  surgical  intervention,  but  extensive  procedures 
on  the  part  of  the  ship 's  force  are  only  legitimate  if  removal  of  the 
wounded  from  the  ship  is  delayed.  To  assure  the  wounded  early 
and  efficient  treatment,  effect  their  rapid  removal  from  the  fighting 
ship  and  insure  a  continuous  record  of  each  case  is  the  object  of 
the  organization. 

I  Prepared  in  the  Bureau  of  Medicine  and  Surgery. 


PART   IT BATTLP:    DRILLS.  17 

(c)  (I)  Routes  to  dressing  stations  should  be  indicated  by  an  arroAV 
and  a  red  cross.  There  should  be  at  least  two  dressing  stations,  a 
primary  station  and  a  secondary  station.  These  stations  should 
have  an  abundant  supply  of  drinking  water,  all  connections  being 
behind  armor.  Storage  tanks  for  drinking  water  should  be  provided, 
haWng  a  capacity  sufficient  to  furnish,  in  first-class  ships,  1  gallon 
of  water  per  man,  allo\\'ing  for  20  per  cent  of  wounded.  Dressing 
stations  should  also  be  well  ventilated,  well  lighted  and  as  cool  as 
the  surroundings  will  permit.  It  has  been  estimated  that  for  each 
36  square  feet  of  area,  one  cargo  light  of  approximately  200  candle- 
power  (six  lamps)  should  be  provided.  Lanterns  and  electric  bull 's- 
eyes  should  be  available  in  case  the  battle  circuits  suffer  interrup- 
tion. Electric  or  steam  connections  should  be  provided  for  the 
sterilizers.  Sterilizers  should  be  removed  from  the  surgical  oper- 
ating room,  and  set  up  in  the  primary  dressing  station  prior  to  action. 
There  should  be  some  provision  made  for  the  drainage  of  this  space. 
In  the  vicinity  of  the  dressing  station  or  adjoining  it,  there  should 
be  arranged  a  berthing  space  for  the  wounded,  sufficient  to  accom- 
modate about  10  per  cent  of  the  complement.  This  space  should 
be  easy  of  access  from  the  dressing  station,  and,  like  the  latter,  have 
an  abundant  air  supply.  In  addition  to  the  usual  equipment  trans- 
ferred from  the  sick  bay  and  operating  room  and  distributed  in  the 
dressing  stations,  the  follo^\'ing  articles' should  be  pro\dded:  Electric 
fans  %vith  proper  connections,  half  tubs,  water  buckets,  swabs  and 
brooms,  washing  stands,  tables  for  apparatus,  shelves,  supports  or 
hooks  for  irrigators,  etc.,  battle  dressing  lockers,  bedding  for  the 
berthing  space  of  the  wounded,  restoratives,  etc.  A  reserve  supply 
of  surgical  dressings  should  be  available  on  this  deck  in  a  secondary 
station  behind  armor  and  accessible  for  distribution  to  the  dressing 
stations. 

(2)  The  station  of  the  medical  officer  of  the  ship  during  battle 
shall  be,  as  a  rule,  at  the  primary  (operating)  dressing  station,  where 
he  shall  see  that  the  necessary  equipment  for  operations  and  dress- 
ings is  provided. 

\d)  Means  of  identification  of  the  killed  as  required  by  Article 
XVII  of  the  Tenth  Hague  Convention  should  be  provided  for  each 
officer  and  man. 

(e)  The  organization  of  the  medical  department,  showing  all  dis- 
positions under  battle  conditions,  shall  be  worked  out  for  the  ship 
on  going  into  commission.  Provision  shall  be  made  for  instruction 
of  officers  and  men  in  first  aid;  for  the  equipment  and  organization 
of  battle  dressing  stations  as  described  above;  and  for  a  definite 
organization  of  the  personnel  of  these  stations,  as  well  as  for  their 
progressive  instruction  in  the  methods  of  first  aid  and  transportation. 

(/)  The  galley  and  bakery  in  ships  of  old  type,  if  intact,  after  an 
engagement  should  be  placed  at  the  disposition  of  the  medical 


18  SHIP   AND    GUN   DRILLS. 

officer  for  preparing  additional  hot  water  and  dressings  and  for  ster- 
ilizing instruments. 

(g)  Apparatus  for  transporting  the  wounded  will  be  provided  by 
the  medical  department  of  the  ship.  Simple  measures  designed  to 
facilitate  transporting  the  wounded  by  stretcher  into  boats  or  di- 
rectly to  the  dressing  stations  by  the  most  convenient  hatch,  down 
which  they  %vill  be  lowered  or  passed  by  hand  to  the  deck  below, 
are  to  be  preferred  to  more  elaborate  means. 

(h)  A  fighting  ship  should  be  cleared  of  wounded  as  soon  as  pos- 
sible. 

219.  Training  at  battle  stations. — The  battle  exercises  are  not 
to  be  regarded  as  periods  of  training  so  much  as  tests  of  the  training. 
The  above  groups  shall  receive  their  battle  training  independently 
(see  Bugle  Calls,  Pt.  IX).  Provision  must  be  made  for  fully  man- 
ning secondary  battle  stations  for  ship  control  and  fire  control,  and 
for  exercising  control  from  those  stations. 

220.  Standing  by  for  action,  and  action. — The  quarter  bill 
must  give  the  watches  and  dispositions  covering  the  different  de- 
grees of  preparedness  required  by  existing  orders. 

221.  Maintenance  and  routine. — Ships  must  be  prepared  for 
immediate  action  night  or  day  for  a  long  period  during  a  war;  and 
watches,  details  of  duty,  and  dispositions  must  be  arranged  accord- 
ingly. 

222.  Final  preparations  for  battle. — These  shall  be  made 
when  battle  is  imminent,  or  when  standing  by  in  thick  weather,  or 
before  sunset.  In  dayhght,  the  call  to  general  quarters  is  the  signal 
for  final  preparations.  Circumstances  will  govern  in  the  case  of 
certain  final  preparations.  At  night  the  guns  must  be  kept  cleared 
and  manned  by  the  watch.  The  extent  to  which  men  off  watch 
may  turn  in  hammocks  will  depend  on  circumstances. 

GENERAL   QUARTERS. 

223.  Definition. — General  quarters  calls  the  ship's  company  to 
stations. 

224.  General  duties. — 

(1)  (a)  Man  battery  and  take  battle  stations. 
(h)  Load  torpedoes. 

(c)  Connect  fire  hose. 

{d)  Stand  by  manifolds  and  valves. 

(e)  Stand  by  cut-out  switches  and  switchboards. 

(/)  Test  out:  all  gear. 

(2)  All  those  preparations  and  dispositions  enumerated  under 
dear  ship  for  action  which  are  necessary  for  the  control  and  service 
of  the  battery  shall  be  carried  our  to  the  extent  necessary  to  use  the 
battery. 


PART   II BATTLE    DRILLS.  19 

(3)  Every  officer  and  man  must  occupy  his  battle  station  at  general 
quarters.  Fleet  working  parties,  and  ship's  work  and  boating  must 
give  wav  to  the  general  quarters  routine. 

225.  The  calls.— 

(1)  Day  action  signals: 
(a)  General  alarm. 

(h)  Genei'al  quarters  on  the  bugle  (call  No.  29). 

(c)  "General  quarters"  over  interior  communication  system. 

(2)  Secure  signals: 

(a)  Secure  on  the  bugle. 

(6)  "Secure"  over  the  interior  communication  svstem. 

226.  Reports.— 

(1)  ''Ready."'  (To  be  made  over  fire-control  and  interior  com- 
munication systems.) 

(a)  Gun  divisions,  fire-control  division,  and  torpedo  division 

report  to  chief  fire  control. 
(6)  Ship  control,  radio,  and  signal  crews  report  to  navigating 

officer, 
(c)  Engineering  department,  medical  department,  and  repair 

crews  report  to  central  station. 
{d)  Chief  fire  control,  navigating  officer,  and  central  station 

report  to  executive. 
{e)  Executive  report  to  captain. 

(2)  * 'Secure." 

(fl)  Heads  of  departments  report  to  executive. 
(6)  Executive  report  to  captain. 

227.  The  exercise. — (1)  Thorough  preparation  shall  be  made 
for  every  general  quarters  exercise,  and  a  definite  program  shall  be 
drawn  up  and  followed  at  this  drill,  during  which  casualties  shall 
be  simulated. 

(2)  The  training  of  units  of  the  battle  organization  and  gun  crews 
should  not  be  attempted  at  general  quarters  except  to  simulate 
casualties  to  personnel  and  material.  Gun  crews  and  other  units 
are  expected  to  be  expert  before  the  ship  goes  into  action,  and  they 
should  be  brought  to  thorough  proficiency  before  seriously  taking 
up  the  problems  of  general  quarters. 

(3)  The  action  taken  on  each  casualty  shall  be  investigated. 
Casualties  shall  be  given  in  such  manner  and  at  such  time  as  to 
closely  approximate  a  real  casualty.  The  patrol  and  commu- 
nication system  of  the  ship  must  be  used  in  all  lower  deck  casualty 
drills,  to  determine,  first,  that  there  is  a  casualty;  second,  to  insure 
a  prompt,  accurate  report  to  central;  and,  third,  that  the  proper 
action  is  taken  to  handle  the  casualty.  Great  thought  and  care 
must  be  exorcised  to  introduce  all  possible  conditions  which  exist 
with  each  casualty.  For  example,  a  shell  bursting  on  second  deck. 
All  the  probable  damages  due  to  the  burst  should  be  simulated. 

7431°— 23 3 


20  SHIP   AND   GUN   DRILLS. 

GAS  DEFENSE. 

228.  All  vessels  should  provide  in  organization  for  the  details  and 
necessary  action  to  be  taken  to  safeguard  personnel  from  explosive 
or  poisonous  gases.  A  standard  form  of  signal  for  gas  alarm  should 
be  installed  and  used  for  no  other  purpose.  At  this  alarm  all  per- 
sonnel should  put  on  gas  masks  in  accordance  with  instructions 
which  may  be  issued  from  time  to  time  by  the  department.  These 
masks  should  be  stowed  in  such  a  place  that  they  may  be  manned 
quickly  and  yet  be  free  from  the  destructive  effects  of  shell  burst. 

Necessary  measures  must  be  provided  for  to  prevent  the  inflow  of 
gases  to  the  Aitals  of  the  ship  through  the  ventilating  system.  Under 
present  conditions  all  compartments  below  must  receive  adequate 
notice  of  gas  and  immediately  use  gas  masks. 

At  least  once  a  month  there  should  be  periodical  instruction  given 
to  the  personnel  regarding  gas,  the  different  kinds  of  gas,  ho\A  de- 
tected, the  dangers  of  same,  and  the  best  thing  to  do  under  all  cir- 
cumstances. Inasmuch  as  there  are  possibilities  of  using  gas  bombs 
from  aerial  planes,  it  is  of  equal  importance  to  pro\T.de  for  the  gas 
protection  of  all  gunnery  personnel  stationed  in  the  tops,  conning 
tower,  or  upper  decks.  Inasmuch  as  such  personnel  can  best  observe 
the  enemy's  shell  bursts,  it  is  recommended  that  specially  trained 
lookouts  be  designated  to  observe  gas  shells  and  report  when  the  gas 
alarm  should  be  sounded.  As  it  is  well  known  in  the  World  War 
the  gas  alarm  in  the  trenches  had  to  be  obeyed  instantly ;  and  in  some 
cases  where  mustard  gas  was  used  at  the  beginning,  too  little  heed  was 
paid  to  protect  against  this  method  of  warfare.  Therefore  in  case  of 
doubt  it  is  best  to  sound  the  gas  alarm  and  all  hands  wear  gas  masks. 
The  work  of  the  personnel  in  peace-time  training  should  be  carried 
on  and  rehearsed  under  conditions  similating  a  gas  attack. 


Part  III 
EMERGENCY  DRILLS 


Emergencies  in  General 23 

Water-tight  Integrity 24 

Collision 25 

Fire 27 

Abandon  Ship 30 

Fire  and  Rescue 33 

21 


EMERGENCY  DRILLS. 


EMERGENCIES   IN   GENERAL. 

301.  Definitions. — Emergency  drills  include  collision  drill,  fire 
drill,  abandon  ship  drill,  and  rescue  drill. 

302.  Emergency  signal. — For  all  emergency  drills  the  general 
alarm  shall  be  sounded  before  the  distinguishing  call  for  the  drill. 
Emergency  signals  and  calls  shall  not  be  used  for  any  other  purpose 
than  those  specified.  If  emergency  signals  are  sounded  inadvert- 
ently, the  officer  of  the  deck  shall,  without  delay,  sound  the  "secure." 

303.  OflB.cer  of  the  deck. — In  all  emergencies  the  officer  of  the 
deck  shall  sound  the  proper  alarm  and  take  the  steps  necessary  to 
insure  the  safety  of  the  ship  and  of  the  personnel,  and  shall  inform 
the  captain  and  the  executive  of  the  situation. 

304.  Arms. — Officers  shall  wear  pistol  in  ser\TLce  belt  and  carry 
ammunition. 

305.  Silence. — On  all  occasions  of  emergency  silence  is  the  fii'st 
requisite  of  discipline.  Unnecessary  noise  of  any  kind  makes  for 
confusion.  Those  in  authority  are  the  only  ones  whose  voices  should 
be  heard. 

306.  Stations. — Every  officer  and  man  shall  go  to  his  station  at 
once.  Those  men  who  have  no  specific  duties  shall  fall  in  at  quarters 
and  keep  silence. 

307.  Details. — In  each  division  stations  and  duties  should  be 
assigned  on  the  basis  of  the  watch  bill,  by  squads  of  the  sections. 
The  organization  shall  provide  for  all  conditions  such  as  l>4ng  in  port 
with  one-half  or  more  officers  and  men  away  from  the  ship.  It  is 
specially  important  in  dry  dock  or  at  a  dock  to  be  thoroughly  pre- 
pared to  act  on  an  alarm  of  fire  either  aboard  ship,  ship's  boats,  or  in 
the  navy  yard.  The  squad  leaders  are  responsible  for  the  duty- 
assigned  to  the  squad,  and  shall  be  made  responsible  to  the  petty 
officer  in  charge  of  the  section .  Petty  officers  in  charge  of  sections  are 
responsible  to  the  petty  officer  in  charge  of  the  watch.  The  petty 
officers  in  charge  of  the  starboard  and  port  watches  are  responsible  to 
the  division  officer.  Squads  are  the  convenient  subdivisions  of  a 
section  as  designated  by  the  division  officer.  Assignment  of  duties 
must  pro\4de  for  the  most  serious  circumstances. 

308.  Calling  officers  at  night. — Provision  shall  be  made  for 
calling  officers  and  special  details  at  night. 

309.  Communications. — Central  should  always  be  informed  of 
the  location  or  character  of  an  injury  or  emergency,  or  of  the  purpose 

23 


24  SHIP   AND   GUN   DRILLS. 

of  the  exercise",  and  should  transmit  the  information  to  the  engine 
room  and  to  other  stations.  For  collision  and  fire  drills,  the  ship's 
interior  communication  system  shall  \}g  used  for  the  "ready' '  report 
which  report  shall  be  transmitted  also  by  messenger. 

310.  Secure. — Bugle  call  No.  10. — Mter  secure,  all  hands,  except 
those  on  watch,  shall  fall  in  and  remain  at  quarters  until  "retreat." 
The  report  "secure"  shall  be  made  in  person  by  the  senior  present 
of  each  division. 

311.  Retreat. — Bugle  call  No.  12. — Retreat  shall  not  be  sounded 
until  all  divisions  have  reported  secure. 

312.  Hammocks  clear  of  passages. — Those  men  whose  ham- 
mocks are  billeted  in  gangways  will  each  take  one  turn  of  the  lashing 
around  the  belly  of  his  hammock  and  sling  it  clear  of  the  passageway. 
The  billets,  which  come  under  this  category,  should  be  specially 
designated  by  the  division  officer,  and  so  marked. 

313.  Personnel  casualties. — Personnel  casualties  should  be 
prepared  for  and  simulated  at  all  emergency  drills.  The  members 
of  the  band  should  be  permanently  detailed  as  stretchermen.  At 
emergency  drills  they  shall  assemble,  under  the  command  of  the 
medical  officer,  to  answer  calls  to  transport  the  sick  or  injured.  The 
medical  officer  is  responsible  for  the  detailed  instruction  of  the 
stretchermen.     (See  call  No.  46.) 

314.  Pilot  ladders,  fenders,  and  boat  spars. — Every  ship 
should  provide  herself  with  fenders,  and  pilot  ladders  with  flat  tread 
ready  to  be  dropped  over  the  side  when  manning  boats.  Boat  spars 
should  be  stowed  and  fitted  so  that  they  can  be  struck  into  the  boats 
before  the  boats  are  lowered. 

WATER-TIGHT  INTEGRITY. 

315.  General  rule. — The  doors,  ha/tches,  and  manholes  giving 
access  to  all  compartments  must,  when  closed,  be  securely  dogged 
to  insure  water- tightness.     Double-bottom  manhole  covers  should 

'  be  kept  securely  dogged  at  all  times  except  as  necessary  for  access 
for  inspection,  cleaning,  painting;  they  should  never  be  left  open 
overnight  or  when  men  are  not  actually  engaged  in  work. 

316.  Organization  for. — The  organization  must  proA-ide  for 
closing  those  water-tight  doors,  hatches,  and  ventilator  openings 
which  are  designated  to  be  closed  during  maneuvers,  in  fog,  or  as 
a  matter  of  routine  at  night. 

317.  The  caUs.— 

(a)  "Water-tight  doors"  on  the  bugle  (call  No.  23). 
(6)  The  warning  howlers. 

318.  Closing  power-operated  doors. — Following  the  warning 
howlers,  the  power-operated  doors  must  invariably  be  closed  from 
the  bridge. 


PART   III EMERGENCY   DRILLS.  25 

319.  Duties. — The  doors,  hatches,  and  ventilator  openings 
which  are  designated  to  be  closed  by  the  divisions  or  department 
shall  be  reported  as  closed  to  the  officer  of  the  deck  by  the  senior 
petty  officers.  The  report  from  the  engineering  department  shall  be 
made  over  the  interior  communication  system  by  the  officer  or 
petty  officer  of  the  watch. 

320.  Responsibility.^ — Division  officers  are  responsible  for  the 
water-tight  integrity  of  their  parts  of  the  ship.  The  officer  of  the 
deck  when  all  reports  have  been  received  shall  report  "All  closed  " 
to  the  executive  officer. 

321.  Closing'  ventilator  opening's. — In  each  compartment 
the  water-tight  covers  to  ventilator  openings  and  the  valves  at 
bulkheads  are  to  be  closed  and  the  fact  that  they  are  closed  shall  be 
included  in  the  reports  made  by  di\dsion  officers. 

(a)  Reports.— B,eported  closed  by  dixdsion  officer  and  the  report 
from  engineering  department  by  engineer  officer  of  the  watch. 

(b)  Responsibility. — The  first  lieutenant  and  division  officers  are 
responsible  for  the  water-tight  integi'ity  of  their  parts  of  the  ships. 
The  officer  of  the  deck,  when  all  reports  have  been  received,  shall 
report  ''All  closed"  to  the  executive  officer.  Frequent  inspections 
shall  be  made  to  check  water-tight  integrity  system.  The  first 
lieutenant  and  executive  vdW  be  held  responsible  to  the  captain  for 
its  efficiency.  The  department  desires  to  emphasize  the  extreme 
importance  of  these  duties. 

322.  Remarks. — Doors  and  hatches  when  closed  for  drill  or  in 
emergency  are  not  to  be  opened  without  permission  of  the  officer  of 
the  deck.  Doors  and  hatches  shall  be  opened  only  when  the  word 
is  passed  '  'Open  doors  and  hatches  "  and  by  call  on  bugle. 

COLLISION. 

323.  At  anchor. — The  officer  of  the  deck  shall  be  prepared  to 
veer,  to  rig  in  the  booms,  and  to  clear  the  side  as  far  as  practicable. 

324.  ThecaUs— 

(1)  Emergency  signals: 
(a)  General  alarm. 

(h)  One  long  blast  of  the  siren. 

(c)  The  warning  howlers. 

la)  Word  passed  by  boatswain's  mate  as  to  location  of  the 

injury, 
(e)  The  assembly  on  the  bugle.     (Call  No.  8.) 

(2)  Secure  signals: 
(a)  Three  blasts  on  the  siren. 

b)  Secure  on  the  bugle. 

c)  "Secure"  by  boatswain's  mate. 
Secure"  over  interior  communications  system. 


la 


26  SHIP    AXD    GUN    DRILLS. 

325.  OflSLcers'  stations  and  duties — 

(1)  Executive  in  general  charge. 

t  2)  Gunnery  officer  shall  take  immediate  charge  of  the  placing  of 
the  collision  mat,  and  exercise  supervision  over  the  divers. 

(3)  Na\igating  officer  shall  inform  himself  of  the  course  and 
distance  to  the  "nearest  shore,  be  prepared  to  serve  out  charts  of 
na\igating  outfits,  and  relieve  the  deck. 

('4)  Engineer  officer  shall  see  that  the  pumps  are  started  and  are 
put  on  flooded  compartments  or  on  the  drainage  system ;  and  shall 
keep  the  executive  imormed  as  to  the  condition  of  all  compartments 
^rithin  the  limits  of  his  department. 

(5)  First  lieutenant  shall  aid  the  executive,  assist  in  localizing  the 
damage  and  assure  himself  that  the  valves  and  arrangements  outside 
the  engineer  s  department  permit  the  pumping  of  damaged  com- 
partments. 

i  6)  Medical  officer,  at  the  sick  bay,  shall  make  preliminary  pro- 
^^.3ion  for  removal  of  sick;  and  shall  be  prepared  to  receive  injured 
or  to  dispatch  a  first-aid  party. 

(7)  Supply  officer  shall  be  prepared  to  supply  storeroom  keys, 
and  shall  make  preliminai"  provision  for  saving  public  money  and 
records. 

326.  General  duties. — 

(1)  Close  water-tight  doors  and  fall  in  at  quarters. 

(2)  Prepare  the  collision  mat;  get  it  over  if  ordered. 

(3)  Pimip  out  all  flooded  compartments, 

(4)  Localize  the  flooding  as  much  as  possible  by  closing  valves 
and  shoring  bulkheads. 

(5j  Rig  and  man  diving  outfit,  and  prepare  to  get  diver  over  the 
side. 

i6)  Man  lifeboats.  Prepare  to  lower  all  other  boats.  Be  pre- 
pared to  rescue  or  render  assistance. 

i^T)  Release  prisoners. 

(8)  Prepare  to  remove  sick. 

(9)  If  at  anchor,  prepare  to  get  under  way. 

(10)  At  night  man  searchlights. 

(11)  Prepare  leak  stoppers  for  use. 

(12)  Be  ready  to  take  measures  to  keep  ship  on  even  keel,  such 
as  shifting  oil,  stores,  or  flooding  compartments  if  necessar>-. 

( 13 )  Man  necessan,-  valves  to  pump  out  compartments  with  air- 
water  ejection  system. 

327.  Detailed  duties. — Doors,  hatches,  and  valves  should  be 
grouped,  and  groups  assigned  to  squads.  At  drill  it  is  Important 
to  require  every  "'dog""  to  be  secured,  and  defects  which  prevent 
the  efficient  closing  of  doors,  hatches,  or  valves  to  be  reported  to  the 
di\ision  officer  at  once.  These  defects  shall  be  immediately  reme- 
died 


PART   III EMERGENCY    DRILLS.  27 

328.  Escapes, — The  collision  bill  shall  indicate  the  escapes  to 
the  upper  deck.  Care  shall  be  exercised  that  no  man  is  sealed  up 
in  a  compartment. 

329.  Collision,  or  underwater  damage,  at  general  quar- 
ters.— No  emergency  signal  shall  be  made.  The  senior  present  in 
the  endangered  locality,  using  men  available  and  the  assisting  repair 
crew,  will  localize  the  damage. 

FIRE. 

330.  General  instructions, — Any  person  discovering  fire 
aboard  ship  will  endeavor  to  extinguish  it,  or  prevent  the  spread 
of  flames.  Use  will  be  made  of  fire  extinguishers  and  other  special 
appliances  immediately  available.  Word  shall  be  sent  at  once  to 
the  officer  of  the  deck. 

331.  The  calls.— 

(1)  Emergency  signals: 
(a)  General  alarm. 

(6)  Ship's  bell  rung  rapidly,  followed  by  designating  number  of 
strokes  to  indicate  location. 

((')  Fire  quarters  on  the  bugle  (call  Xo.  31  j  followed  by  the  same 
number  of  blasts  to  indicate  location. 

((/)  Word  passed  by  boatswain's  mate  as  to  location  of  the  fire. 

(2)  Secure  signals: 

(a)  Secure  on  the  bugle. 

(6)  "Secure"  by  boatswain's  mate. 

((•)  "Secure"  over  interior  communication  system. 

332.  Officers'  stations  and  duties.— 

(1)  Executive  at  scene  of  fire  in  charge. 

(2)  Gunnery  officer  shall  have  men  stationed  at  flood  cocks  and 
sprinkler  valves;  be  prepared  to  flood  threatened  magazines  or  shell 
rooms;  have  dry  primers  and  detonators  removed  from  vicinity  of 
fire. 

(3)  Navigating  officer  shall  relieve  the  deck. 

(4)  Engineer  officer,  engine  room.  He  shall  have  an  officer  sta- 
tioned at  the  steam  fire  extinguishing  manifold;  and  at  the  chemical 
extinguishing  valve,  if  the  fire  is  in  a  compartment  so  piped. 

(5)  First  lieutenant  shall  aid  the  executive. 

(6)  Medical  officer  at  the  sick  bay  shall  make  preliminary  provi- 
sion for  removal  of  sick;  and  shall  be  prepared  to  receive  injured 
or  to  dispatch  a  first-aid  party. 

(7)  Supply  officer  shall  assure  himself  that  storeroom  keys  are 
supplied;  and  make  preliminary  provision  for  saving  public  money 
and  records. 


28  SHIP   AND   GUN   DRILLS, 

333.  Special  details. — The  following  special  details  shall  assem- 
ble well  clear,  but  near  the  scene  of  the  fire,  under  the  command  of 
the  carpenter: 

(1)  Repair  crew,  with  tools. 

(2)  Fire-extinguisher  details. 

(3)  Rescue  breathing-apparatus  details. 

334.  General  duties. — 

(1)  Connect  up  and  lead  out  hose  to  all  fire  plugs  in  vicinity  of 
fire.  Divisions  that  are  remote  from  the  fire  will  use  their  hose  to 
extend  other  lines. 

(2)  Put  pumps  on  fire  main. 

(3)  Serve  out  flood  cock,  magazine,  and  storeroom  keys. 

(4)  Flood  magazines  and  shell  rooms,  if  necessary. 

(5)  Remove  explosives,  gasoline,  oils,  and  other  inflammable 
material  from  vicinity  of  fire. 

(6)  Close  ah'  ports,  doors,  and  hatches  where  necessary.  Care 
should  be  taken  not  to  cut  off  or  close  unnecessarily  the  passages 
and  hatches  used  for  access  and  for  communication. 

(7)  Men  ha%dng  charge  of  storerooms  will  stand  by  them  with  keys. 

(8)  Stop  blowers  or  close  valves  in  air  ducts  where  they  supply 
air  to  the  fire. 

(9)  Be  prepared  to  light  up  vicinity  of  fire  with  portables,-  lan- 
terns, or  electric  "bull's-eyes." 

(10)  If  alongside  a  dock  or  other  vessel,  prepare  to  cast  off. 

(11)  If  at  anchor,  prepare  to  weigh  or  slip. 

(12)  Remove  sick  and  prisoners  to  place  of  safety. 

335.  Testing  equipment. — ^All  fire-extinguishing  apparatus  and 
equipment  shall  be  tested  at  routine  times  to  insure  its  efficiency. 

336.  Care  of  particular  compartments. — Attention  is  called 
to  the  Bureau  of  Engineering  Manual  as  to  the  care  to  be  obser^^ed 
with  coal,  fuel  oils,  gasoline,  and  kerosene  on  board  ship.  Coal 
bunkers,  paint  lockers,  storerooms,  and  compartments  where  fires 
are  most  apt  to  occur  should  be  kept  under  careful  surveillance. 

337.  Fire  extinguishers. — (1)  Each  vessel  (except  subma- 
rines) is  furnished  with  two  2  ^-gallon  acid-soda  nonslop  type  extin- 
guishers for  use  of  the  fire  and  rescue  party.  In  general,  carbon 
tetrachloride  extinguishers  are  also  furnished  for  the  protection  of 
important  electrical  apparatus.  Two  should  be  located  in  dynamo 
rooms  or  machineiy  compartments  where  dynamos  are  installed, 
radio  rooms,  distribution  rooms,  central  stations,  interior  communi- 
cation rooms,  and  battery  charging  rooms  on  ships  in  general,  and 
the  main  machinery  rooms  of  electric  driven  ships.  Also  for  pro- 
tection against  leaking  fuel  oil.  Two  in  each  oil-burning  fireroom, 
two  immediately  outside  the  paint  and  oil  rooms,  galleys,  and 
bakeries  using  oil-burning  ranges  or  bake  ovens. 


PART   III EMERGENCY   DRILLS.  29 

(2)  Oil-burning  and  fuel-oil  carrying  ships  are  furnished  with 
special  fire  extinguishers,  for  fighting  fuel-oil  fires,  as  follows: 

(a)  COo  apparatus,  permanently  installed,  piped  to  compartments 
in  which  fuel-oil  leaks  might  occur  and  to  paint-mixing  rooms. 

(6)  Foam  type  apparatus,  permanently  installed  in  the  firerooms 
of  oil-burning  vessels. 

(3)  Each  submarime  is  furnished  vdih  not  less  than  six  portable 
carbon  tetrachloride  type  extinguishers. 

(4)  Each  gasoline  motor  boat  is  furnished  with — 
(a)  Bucket  or  box  of  dry  sand. 

(6)  Two  carbon  tetrachloride  type  extinguishers  located  in  the 
engine  compartment. 

(c)  Two  acid-soda  nonslop  type  extinguishers  located  outside  of 
engine  compartment  (to  be  used  only  in  case  the  small  carbon  tetra- 
chloride extinguishers  fail  to  cope  with  the  fire. 

(5)  Instructions  for  testing  and  the  use  of  extinguishers  are  fur- 
nished with  each. 

(6)  The  CO2  apparatus  acts  by  smothering  the  fire  with  CO2  gas, 
and  is  operated  from  a  manifold  at  a  distance  from  the  fire. 

(7)  The  foam  Unpe  extinguishers  act  by  releasing  a  heavy  foam 
which  smothers  an  oil,  gasoline,  or  other  fire  by  spreading  over  the 
surface  and  excluding  the  air.  It  is  operated  by  a  valve  and  hose 
in  the  fireroom  in  which  it  is  installed. 

(8)  The  carbon  tetrachloride  type  is  of  particular  value  on  a  fire 
of  electric  origin,  because  the  liquid  thrown  on  the  fire  is  a  non- 
conductor.    This  type  is  usually  fitted  with  a  hand  pump. 

338.  Rescue  breathing  apparatus. — The  saving  of  life  may 
depend  on  the  ability  to  send  men  into  compartments  filled  with 
irrespirable  gas  The  possibility  also  exists  that  the  safety  of  the 
vessel  may  likewise  so  depend.  For  this  contingency  rescue  breath- 
ing apparatus  is  supplied  to  vessels.  Intelligent  men  should  be 
drilled  in  the  care  and  operation  of  this  apparatus  and  should  be 
able  to  find  their  way  into  any  compartment  to  locate  the  flood  cocks 
and  to  work  despite  the  presence  of  noxious  gases.  These  details 
should  be  composed  of  members  of  the  repair  party  who  would 
always  be  available  in  action. 

339.  Fire  at  general  quarters. — Will  be  fought  by  the  officer 
and  men  at  the  scene  of  the  fire.  As  far  as  practicable,  the  fire  of 
engaged  guns  must  not  be  interrupted.  Effort  must  be  directed  to 
prevent  the  spread  of  flames,  to  remove  spare  ammunition  to  a  safe 
distance,  to  divert  chains  of  ammunition  passers  passing  too  close  to 
the  fire,  and  to  isolate  endangered  magazines,  flooding  them  if 
necessary. 


30  SHIP   AND    GUN   DRILI^. 

ABANDON   SHIP. 

340.  General  requirements  of  the  bill. — The  hill  shall  provide 

for: 

I. 

Getting  boats  out  and  manning  them  as  quickly  as  possible,  pro- 
viding nothing  but  a  life  jacket  for  each  man;  as,  when  in  company, 
other  ships  may  be  depended  on  for  assistance. 

II. 

Provisioning,  equipping,  and  manning  boats;  as  when  acting 
singly. 

III. 

An  alternative  method  to  be  used  when  it  is  found  impracticable 
to  get  out  boats  and  rafts,  due  to  list  of  ship,  lack  of  time,  or  other 
compelling  reasons. 

IV. 

The  organization  should  provide  for: 

(1)  Making  two  or  more  trips  with  the  boats. 

(2)  Varying  the  capacity  of  each  type  of  boat  below  maximum 
allowed,  regulated  by  the  sea  condition. 

(3)  Reduced  number  of  boats  available  due  to  accident  or  other 
conditions. 

(4)  Periodical  inspection  of  life  belts. 

341.  The  calls.— 

(1)  Emergency  signals: 

FOR  I. 

(a)  General  alarm. 

(6)  Abandon  ship  on  the  bugle  (Call  No.  30),  followed  by  double 
time  on  the  bugle  (Call  No.  71). 

(c)  The  boatswain's  pipe  "All  hands  abandon  ship." 

FOR  11. 

(a)  General  alarm. 

(b)  Provisions  on  the  bugle  (Call  No.  18),  followed  by  abandon  ship 
on  the  bugle  (Call  No.  30). 

(c)  The  boatswain's  pipe  "All  hands  provide  and  equip  for 
abandon  ship." 

(2)  Secure  signals : 


PART   III EMERGENCY   DRILLS.  31 

(a)  Secure  on  the  bugle. 

(6)  "Secure"  by  boatswain's  mate. 

(f)  "Secure"'  over  interior  communication  system. 

342.  Stations  and  duties. — 

(I)  Executive  in  general  charge. 

(2^  Gunnery  officer  and  (5)  first  lieutenant  shall  take  immediate 
charge  of  embarkation,  each  on  one  side  of  the  ship. 

(3)  Navigating  officer  shall  relieve  the  deck,  prepared  to  give  the 
course  and  distance  to  land. 

(4)  Engineer  officer  and  his  assistants  repair  to  their  stations  in 
engine  and  firerooms.  All  petty  officers  of  the  engineer  department 
take  steaming  stations,  relieving  as  many  of  the  nonrated  men  as 
possible. 

(5)  First  lieutenant  (see  (2)  ). 

(6)  ]\Iedical  officer  shall  supervise  the  transportation  of  the  sick 
and  injured  to  the  first  crews. 

(7)  Supply  officer  shall  save  the  public  money  and  accounts. 

(8)  The  ship's  company  shall  be  detailed  into  first  crews  and 
second  crews. 

(9)  Of  the  officers,  generally,  the  juniors  should  be  detailed  to  the 
first  crews;  the  seniors  should  be  detailed  to  the  second  crews.  Of 
the  men,  the  junior  ratings  should  generally  be  detailed  to  the  first 
crews.  Each  crew  should  have  sufficient  experienced  men  of  the 
seaman  branch  to  insure  proper  handling  of  the  boat. 

(10)  Provide  every  man  and  officer  wixh  a  life  jacket. 

(II)  Second  crews  shall  assemble  clear  of  the  boats  on  the  bridges 
and  the  superstructures. 

( 12)  First  crews  shall  assemble  adjacent  to  boats. 

(13)  The  deck  petty  officers  of  the  second  crews  snail  assist  in 
getting  out  of  the  boats  for  the  first  crews. 

(14)  The  prisoners  shall  be  released. 

(15)  At  the  proper  time,  notification  shall  be  sent  to  officers  and 
men  below,  who  then  secure  boilers  and  machinery  and  join  the 
second  crews. 

(16)  Reasonable  provision  shall  be  made  looking  to  saving  logs, 
records  and  muster  rolls.  Confidential  books  and  papers  mvbst  be 
saved  or  destroyed. 


32  SHIP   AND    GUN   DRILLS. 

343.  Boat  capacities  and  allowances. 


Boat  name. 


50-foot  steamer 

40-foot  steamer 

30-foot  steamer 

40-foot  motor  barge 

50-foot  motor  boat 

35-foot  motor  boat 

26-foot  motor  boat 

21-foot  motor  dory 

50-foot  motor  sailing  launch 
40-foot  motor  saiUng launch 
36-foot  motor  sailing  launch 
33- foot  motor  sailing  launch 
30-foot  motorsailinglaunch 
24-foot  motor  sailing  launch 

31-foot  racing  cutter 

28-foot  cutter 

26-foot  cutter 

24-foot  cutter 

30-foot  whaleboat 

28-foot  whaleboat 

24-foot  whaleboat 

20-foot  whaleboat 

20-foot  dinghy 

16-foot  dinghy 

17-foot  dory 

14-foot  wherry 

12-foot  wherry 


Canying 
capacity. 


Men. 

44 

29 

25 

37 
50 
27 
18 
10 
190 
90 
70 
50 
40 
19 
18 
33 

27 
19 
40 
32 
23 
16 
14 
10 
5 
5 
4 


Abandon 
ship 
water, 
battle- 
ships, 
battle 
cruisers, 

and 

armored 

cruisers 

(i  gallon 

per  man). 


Gallons. 

22 

15 

13 

16 
25 
14 
9 
5 
95 
45 
35 
25 
20 
10 
9 
17 

14 

10 

20 

16 

12 

8 
7 
5 


Abandon 
ship 
water, 

all 

other 

ships 

(1 J  gallons 

per  man). 


Gallons. 


75 
41 
27 
15 
285 
135 
105 
75 
60 
29 
27 
50 
41 
29 
60 
48 
35 

24 
21 
15 


Breakers 
belonging 
to  boat. 


r  2  S-gallon. 
l_  1  5-gallon. 

2  8-gallon . 
r  1  8-gallon. 
[  1  ")-gaUon. 

2  8-gaUon. 

4  8-gallon. 
2  S-gallon. 

2  .5-gallon. 
1 .5-gallon. 

12  8-gallon. 
6  8-gallon. 

5  8-gallon. 
4  8-gallon. 

3  8-gallon. 
2  5-gallon. 

1  8-gallon. 

2  8-gallon. 
r  1  8-gaUon. 
[  1  5-gallon. 

2  5-ga]lou . 
f  2  8-gaUon. 
[  1  5-gallon. 

2  8-ganon. 
r  1  8-gallon. 
[  1  5-gaUon . 

2  5-gallon. 

2  5-gallon . 

1  5-gallon. 

1  3-gallon. 

1  3-gaUon. 

1  3-gaUon. 


Note.— Extra  water  breakers  for  abandon  ship  not  required  for  battleships,  battle 
cruisers,  and  armored  crmsers. 

The  maximum  nuvjher  of  men  indicated  on  the  label  plate  of  a  boat  should  not  be  ex- 
ceeded under  any  circumstances  and  should  be  reduced  by  the  officer  in  charge  when  condi- 
tions are  such  (is  to  indicate  that  the  maximum  number  of  vten  can  not  be  carried  with 
safety. 


PART   III EMERGENCY   DRILLS.  33 

(c)  As  there  are  in  some  types  of  boats  different  designs  of  the 
same  boat  in  service,  and  as  new  designs  are  developed  from  time 
to  time,  the  capacity  shown  on  a  boat's  label  plate  should  be  taken 
as  authoritative  where  it  differs  from  the  capacity  given  in  the  fore- 
going table. 

344.  Additional  for  provisioning  and  equipping. — 

(1)  Officers  provide  binoculars  and  the  Beck  and  Boat  Book. 

(2)  The  assistant  navigator  take  chart  and  navigation  gear. 
^3)  The  signal  officer  take  rockets,  pistol  and  signal  stars. 

(4)  The  first  crews  shall  be  provided  with  provisions  and  equip- 
ment as  per  "The  Boat  Book  of  the  United  States  Navy  1920," 
and,  in  addition,  four  buckets  for  bailing. 

345.  Return  of  boats. — The  boats  will  be  brought  back  by 
details  from  the  first  crews  to  take  off  the  second  crews,  and  make 
other  trips  as  required. 

FIRE    AND   RESCUE. 

346.  Employment. — The  fire  and  rescue  party  may  be  called 
to  assist  a  vessel  on  fire;  to  prevent  the  spread  of  flames  to  shipping; 
to  render  assistance  on  shore  or  to  rescue  people  from  a  vessel  in 
distress.  As  the  particular  emergency  can  not  be  foretold,  the 
entire  equipment  specified  should  always  be  provided.  Boats 
should  be  commanded  by  the  regular  boat  officers. 

347.  The  calls.— 

(1)  Emergency  signals: 

(a)  General  alarm. 

(b)  Assembly  on  the  bugle  (Call  No.  8). 

(c)  The  boatswain 's  pipe  '  'Away  fire  and  rescue  party. " 

(2)  Secure  signals: 

(a)  Secure  on  the  bugle. 

(6)  "Secure"  by  boatswain's  mate. 

(c)  "  Secure"  over  interior  communication  system. 

348.  Organization. — 
I.    The  rescue  detail. 

II.    The  fire  detail. 
III.   The  relief  detail. 

I. 

349.  The  rescue  detail. — 

(1)  Boats  and  organization. — To  be  taken  from  the  division  or 
divisions  that  man  the  specified  boats;  each  of  those  divisions  to 
have  a  complete  organization  in  each  watch.     A  medical  officer, 


34  SHIP   ANI>   GUN   DRILLS. 

with  outfit,  to  stand  by  to  go  with  this  detail.     In  addition  to  the 
regular  equipment  each  boat  will  take: 

(a)  One  life  jackei:  for  each  officer  and  man  in  the  boat. 

(b)  One  ring  life  buoy  fitted  with  hauling  line. 

(c)  One  hand  grapnel  on  a  line. 

In  port  a  steamer  or  power  boat  should  be  used  if  immediately 
available. 

II. 

350.  The  fire  detail.— 

(1)  Boats  and  organization. — The  boats  designated  should  be 
those  which  are  quickly  hoisted  out,  adequate,  and  have  motive 
power.  Each  watch  of  the  divisions  from  which  the  fire  details 
are  drawn  should  contain  a  complete  fire  detail,  so  that  with  men 
on  liberty,  the  organization  can  handle  the  emergency.  The 
necessary  artificers  should  be  similarly  detailed. 

(2)  Equipment. — Each  boat  should  carry  its  regular  equipment 
excepting  spars.  The  special  equipment  should  be  provided  by  an 
adjacent  division,  leaving  the  fire  detail  free  to  man  their  boats. 

(A)  The, first  boat  to  go  out  should  carry: 

(a)  Boat  officer  and  crew. 

(b)  Artificer  with  unshackling  kit. 

(c)  Rescue  breathing  apparatus  detail. 

(d)  One  life  jacket  for  each  officer  and  man  in  the  boat. 

(e)  One  ring  life  buoy  fitted  with  hauling  line. 
(/)  Two  hand  lanterns. 

(q)  Two  foam  type  extinguishers. 

(h)  Six  buckets. 

(i)  Fire  party  chest,  containing: 

(1)  Two  axes. 

(2)  One  crowbar. 

(3)  Two  grapnels  fitted  with  chain  and  rope  lanyards. 

(4)  Two  heaving  lines. 

(5)  Six  bucket  lanyards. 

(6)  Two  cold  chisels. 

(7)  Two  baU  and  peen  hammers. 

(8)  One  maul. 

(9)  One  Stillson  wrench. 

(B)  The  second  boat  to  go  out  should  carry: 
(a)  Boat  officer  and  crew. 

(6)  Carpenter  or  mate. 

(c)  Handy-billy  pump  crew. 

(d)  One  life  jacket  for  each  officer  and  man  in  the  boat 

(e)  One  ring  life  buoy  fitted  with  hauling  line. 
(/)  Two  hand  lanterns. 


PART   III EMERGENCY    DRILLS.  35 

(g)  One  handy-billy  pump. 

(h)  Two  lengths  of  suction  hose  with  strainer. 

(i)  Three  lengths  of  fire  hose. 

(/)  One  nozzle. 

(k)  One  spanner, 

(I)  One  reducer. 

(m)  One  jigger  and  two  straps. 

(n)  One  5-inch  line. 

III. 

351.  The  relief  detail— 

(1)  Employment — 

(a)  To  relieve  or  to  augment  the  fire  and  rescue  details. 

(b)  To  be  armed  for  shore  duty  to  assist  the  local  authorities  in 
preserving  order  and  protecting  property. 

(c)  To  respond  to  the  local  fire  regulations  at  a  navy  yard. 

(d)  To  man  additional  boats  for  rescue  duty. 

(2)  Organization. — It  should  be  organized  for  each  watch  from  a 
division  or  divisions  not  furnishing  the  rescue  or  fire  details. 

7431°— 23 4 


Part  IV 
GUN   DRILLS 


Page. 

General  Notes 39 

Notes  on  Sight  Setting 43 

Misfires  and  Hangfires 44 

Notes  on  Loading 47 

Turret  Gun  Drills 50 

Broadside  Gun  Drills 54 

37 


GUN  DRILLS. 


GENERAL  NOTES. 

401.  Instructors. — The  duty  of  a  drill  officer  or  an  instructor 
is  to  impart  to  the  crew  a  sound  knowledge  of  the  gun,  mount,  and 
drill.  Practical  results  are  sought.  The  first  requisite  is  to  get  the 
framework  of  the  instruction  into  the  crew's  minds,  then  the  details 
can  gradually  be  built  up.  The  crew  should  always  understand 
why  each  detail  of  the  drill  is  necessary.  A  rapid  and  accurate  fire 
is  required;  this  being  thoroughly  understood  by  the  green  crew, 
special  drills  to  develop  the  fine  points  of  loading,  sight  setting,  and 
pointing  are  in  order.  All  explanations  and  instructions  should  be 
made  as  clear,  concise,  and  emphatic  as  possible.  When  practicable, 
%vritten  drill  instructions  should  be  posted  at  each  gun  or  in  each 
tmret.  When  the  crew  is  drilling  as  a  unit  the  instructor  should 
command  "Silence"  when  he  corrects  a  mistake,  in  order  that  the 
whole  crew  may  have  their  attention  drawn  to  it. 

402.  Assignment  of  stations. — The  members  of  the  gun  crew 
are  assigned  to  stations.  The  titles  of  the  stations  are,  in  a  general 
way,  explicative  of  the  duties  to  be  performed. 

403.  Falling  in  for  muster. — Crews  of  broadside  guns,  when 
falling  in  for  muster  abreast  the  guns,  should  fall  in,  in  single  rank, 
facing  inboard,  by  size,  gun  captain  on  the  right. 

404.  Manner  of  giving  commands.— Officers  and  instructors 
must  be  careful  to  give  commands  in  a  clear  and  distinct  manner, 

405.  Commands  used. — The  follo^^'ing  commands  are  used: 

(1)  Stations! 

(2)  Load! 

(3)  Commence  Firing  I 
k)  Silence! 

(5)  Carry  on! 

(6)  Cease  Firing ! 

(7)  Unload! 

(8)  Secure! 

(1)  Stations! — At  this  command,  which  may  be  given  at  any 
time  or  in  any  formation,  the  crew  go  at  once  to  their  gun,  take 
their  respective  stations,  and  await  further  commands.  The  gun  is 
supposed  to  be  ready  for  the  exercise  required  when  this  command 
is  given. 

39 


40  SHIP    AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

(2)  Load! — The  crew,  being  at  their  stations,  go  through  the 
operation  of  loading  the  gun. 

(3)  Commence  Firing! — This  command  may  be  given  either  before 
or  after  the  gun  is  loaded.  If  given  before,  the  gun  wdll  be  loaded  at 
once.  The  target  having  been  designated,  the  firing  and  service  of 
the  gun  are  started,  the  pointer  firing  when  the  firing  signal  is  given 
or  when  on  the  target,  depending  upon  the  nature  of  the  practice 
being  held.  The  gun  mil  be  loaded  as  soon  as  fired,  and  firing  \\i\\ 
continue  until  the  ammunition  is  exhausted  or  until  the  conmiand 
"Cease  Firing.'" 

(4)  Silence! — This  command  is  given  when,  for  any  reason,  it  is 
necessary  to  temporarily  stop  the  service  of  the  gun.  It  may  be 
given  by  the  dixdsion  officer  or  by  any  member  of  the  crew  noticing 
something  requiring  immediate  attention.  When  it  is  given,  e^■ery 
member  of  the  crew  ceases  all  operations  and  stands  in  his  tracks 
and  awaits  instructions.  If  a  member  of  the  crew  calls  "Silence !" 
he  will  point  out  to  the  division  officer  or  gun  captain,  what  he  has 
observed. 

(5)  Carry  on! — After  the  command  "Silence!"  the  defect  having 
been  remedied,  this  command  is  given,  at  which  the  crew  resume 
the  operation  in  which  they  were  engaged  when  the  command 
"Silence!"  was  given. 

(6)  Cea^e  Firing! — The  service  of  the  gun  is  stopped  and  steps  are 
taken  so  that  the  gun  can  not  be  fired.  The  procedure  \\'ill  depend 
upon  the  type  of  gun,  and  for  this  purpose  guns  may  be  divided  into 
two  classes: 

(a)  Bag  guns  (guns  using  powder  in  bags  and  separate  primers  in 
locks) .  Break  firing  circuit  at  contact  lug  and  remove  primer  from 
lock. 

(6)  Case  guns  (guns  using  powder  in  brass  case  containing  the 
primer) : 

I.  If  charge  and  projectile  are  separate,  remove  the  case  and 
close  breech. 

II.  If  the  charge  and  projectile  are  in  same  case,  remove  case, 
i.  e.,  unload. 

(7)  Unload! — (a)  If  the  gun  ^vill  permit,  the  primer  must  be 
removed  before  the  plug  is  opened.  If  this  is  done,  the  powder  may 
be  removed  without  fear  of  accident.  With  case  guns  the  plug 
should  be  opened  cautiously. 

{h)  When  it  is  apparent  that  the  service  of  the  gun  will  not  be 
resumed  within  a  reasonable  tirne,  the  powder  which  has  been 
unloaded  must  be  dumped  into  distilled  water,  except  as  provided 
for  in  United  States  Navy  Regulations. 

(8)  Secure! — (a)  At  this  command  the  ammunition  %vill  be 
returned  to  the  magazine;  spare  parts  returned  to  their  places; 
unnecessary  gear  stowed  away  and  guns  and  turrets  secured. 


PART    IV GUN    DRILLS.  41 

(6)  If  the  gun  has  been  fired,  as  soon  as  possible  after  the  firing 
has  ceased,  the  gun  should  be  thoroughly  washed  out,  dried  and 
oiled.     If  practicable,  this  should  be  done  while  the  gun  is  still  hot. 

406.  Preparing  the  battery  for  exercise — 

(1)  At  "Clear  Ship  for  Action"  the  guns  are  prepared  without 
further  command  and  many  preparations  made  which,  at  general 
quarters  for  exercise,  are  omitted.  (See  Clear  Ship  for  Action _Pt. 
II.)  The  follo^ving  list  of  preparations,  when  clearing  for  action, 
is  not  complete,  but  is  given  as  a  guide: 

(a)  Open  hood  shutters  and  provide  material  for  wiping  off  sight 


(6)  Examine  training  and  elevating  gear,  including  motors,  to 
be  sure  they  are  in  good  working  order. 

(c)  Test  all  the  fire-control  apparatus. 

(d)  Test  fire  extinguishing  system. 

(e)  Take  out  tompions. 

(/)  Cast  loose  and  see  that  all  ventilators,  stanchions,  and  hatches 
clear  for  training  turrets. 

(g)  Provide  sponges,  buckets,  gun  tubs,  and  powder  drowning 
tanks  and  fill  with  water. 

(h)  Supply  spare  parts  and  accessories. 

(i)  Provide  tools  that  might  be  necessary  in  case  of  breakdown. 

(j)  Connect  up  firing  circuit  and  test  if  for  grounds  and  faulty 
connections.  Fire  primers  with  both  battery  and  motor  generator. 
Try  percussion  firing. 

(J:)  Examine  breech  and  firing  mechanism  parts. 

(1)  Have  spare  gas  check  pad  ready. 
(m)  Inspect  and  test  gas  ejector  system. 

(n)  Examine  powder  bags  and  shell,  if  time  permits, 
(o)  Provide  loading  tray  and  hand  rammer. 
(p)  Provide  first-aid  outfit. 

(2)  When  the  ship  is  not  cleared  for  action,  at  the  call  to  general 
quarters,  the  crew  will  immediately  go  to  their  stations  and  prepare 
for  the  exercise  of  the  gun  crew.  For  example,  as  the  crew  should 
be  exercised  at  'fire  in  action,"  the  fire  hose  should  be  led  out;  as 
the  guns  must  be  trained,  all  ship  gear  that  interferes  therewith 
must  be  removed.  Duties  which  are  performed  at  "Clear  ship  for 
action"  and  which  do  not  affect  the  drill  of  the  crew  will  not  be  per- 
formed when  at  general  quarters  for  exercise. 

(a)  Spare  parts,  kept  in  the  storeroom,  will  not  be  provided,  but 
will  be  gotten  up  from  the  storeroom  when  needed  during  the  drill. 

(5)  Telescope  sights,  if  not  on  the  gun,  should  be  kept  in  boxes 
close  to  the  gun  and  should  be  shipped  at  general  quarters. 

(c)  When  at  general  quarters  for  exercise,  guns  will  not  be  pro- 
vided with  service  ammunition  In  order  to  test  the  ammunition 
hoists  of  broadside  guns  the  following  dummy  charges  should  be 
prepared : 


42  SHIP   AND   GUN    DRILLS. 

For  each  broadside  gun  of  5-inch  cahber  or  above,  two  charges. 

For  each  gun  below  5-inch  caUber,  one  box. 

These  should  be  sent  to  the  guns  at  general  quarters  for  exercise. 

(d)  Gun  swabs,  bristle-bore  and  marine  sponges,  gun  tubs  and 
buckets,  as  allowed  by  the  Bureau  of  Ordnance,  should  be  provided 
at  the  guns  at  general  quarters. 

(e)  Firing  circuits  need  not  be  put  on  the  guns  unless  drill  primers 
are  to  be  fired. 

(/)  Tampions  must  be  removed. 

407.  Details  for  providing. — The  detailing  of  the  members  of 
thecrewfor  the  performance  of  the  individual  duties  in  getting  the 
battery  ready  is  left  to  the  discretion  of  the  di\asion  officer  whose 
duty  it  is  to  see  that  his  battery  is  ready,  in  all  respects,  as  expedi- 
tiously as  possible  for  the  drill  or  exercise  that  is  to  be  carried  out. 

408.  Division  officers  responsible. — Division  officers,  being 
responsible,  must  assure  themselves  either  by  personal  inspection 
or  through  reports  from  their  gun  captains,  that  their  battery  is,  in 
all  respects,  ready  for  the  exercise  required  before  reporting  ready 
to  the  fire  control  officer.     '  'Check-off  lists"  should  be  used. 

409.  Casualties  to  material. — (1)  Casualty  drills. — The  atten- 
tion of  all  officers  is  called  to  the  absolute  necsssity  of  drilling  the 
gun  crews  at  casualty  drills — i,  e.,  casualties  to  both  men  and  mate- 
rial. No  matter  how  efficient  the  crew  may  be  at  loading,  sooner  or 
later  a  breakdown  or  interruption  may  occur.  Then  it  is  of  vital 
importance  that  the  crew  be  prepared  to  remedy  the  defect  in  the 
shortest  possible  time,  in  order  that  the  services  of  the  gun  may  not 
be  lost  to  the  ship.  To  this  end  officers  must  not  only  explain  to 
the  crews  what  to  do  in  case  of  any  probable  casualty,  but  musi 
actually  drill  them  in  doing  it.     To  neglect  this  is  fatal. 

(2)  lAst  of  casualties. — Study  reports  of  target  practice  and  see 
what  has  happened  to  others;  make  notes  of  what  happens  during 
drill.  Any  of  these  things  may  hap])en  during  practice.  The  fol- 
lowing is  a  brief  list  of  the  most  frequent  casualties,  but  does  not, 
by  any  means,  include  all  that  may  occur: 

(a)  Broken  rammer. 

(b)  Broken  powder  bag. 

(c)  Burning  fragments  on  mush  room  or  in  powder  chamber. 
{d)  Circuit  breaker  blows. 

(e)  Fire  in  turret  or  in  vicinity  of  broadside  gun. 

(/)  Firing  circuit  cut  or  jarred  loose. 

(g)  Gas  ejector  fails. 

(h)  Hoist  cable  carries  away. 

(i)  Lights  out. 

(j)  Misfires. 

{k)  Plug  will  not  open  or  will  not  close. 

(I)  Powder  bag  comes  wrong  end  toward  gun. 

^^m)  Shell  does  not  seat. 


PART    l^• GUN    DRILLS.  43 

(n)  Signal  system  (if  used)  fails. 
(o)  Vent  becomes  choked. 

(p)  Primer  blow  back  fusing  the  metal  of  primer  case  or  the  firing 
pin, 

410.  Casualties  to  personnel. — (1)  Casualty  drills. — In  case  of 
injury  to  any  member  or  members  of  the  crew,  the  gun  crew  must  be 
drilled  so  that  those  remaining  will  continue  the  service  of  the  gun. 
It  is  to  be  expected  that,  in  this  case,  the  service  will  not  be  as 
efficient  as  before  the  casualty;  but  it  must  be  distinctly  understood 
that  no  gun  is  to  be  abandoned,  even  by  the  last  remaining  man,  as 
long  as  it  can  be  loaded  and  fired.  For  the  above  reason  every  man 
in  a  well-trained  gun  crew  should  be  familiar  with  the  duties  of 
every  other  station,  and  should  be  prepared  to  perform  them  without 
hesitation. 

(2)  Removal  of  personnel  casualties. — The  removal  of  casualties  is 
a  matter  to  be  specially  provided  for  in  each  ship.  It  is  the  duty 
of  the  gun  crew  to  continue  the  service  of  the  gun  and  to  overcome 
every  obstacle  which  interferes  therewith  The  gun  crew  will  there- 
fore not  cease  their  operations  of  loading,  but  two  men  nearest  to 
the  wounded  man  should,  mthout  orders,  place  him  in  any  con- 
venient position  clear  of  the  working  of  the  gun,  whence  he  will  be 
given  first-aid  treatment,  then  removed,  as  elsewhere  specified. 
The  operations  of  loading  or  firing  will  never  be  discontinued  for 
the  purpose  of  remo^dng  personnel  casualties,  except  in  cases  of 
absolute  necessity. 

NOTES   ON   SIGHT    SETTING. 

411.  Necessity  for  accuracy. — The  proper  setting  of  the  sights 
of  a  gun  is  absolutely  essential  to  accuracy  of  fire.  No  matter  how 
efficient  the  rest  of  the  crew  may  be,  the  accuracy  of  the  gun  can  be 
ruined  by  poor  sight  setting. 

412.  Selection  of  sight  setter. — The  sight  setter  should  be 
carefully  selected.  He  need  not  be  a  large  man  or  a  man  of  great 
strength,  but  he  must  be  steady,  attentive,  and  not  gun  shy.  He 
must  be  a  man  that  can  hear  over  a  telephone  and  voice  tube;  not 
every  man  can, 

413.  Method  of  training. — After  the  sight  scales  have  been 
explained  to  the  sight  setter  and  he  has  been  shown  hov\^  to  manipu- 
late the  mechanism,  he  must  be  drilled  at  sight  setting.  He  should 
be  trained  to  approach  the  setting  slowly  and  not  pass  it  and  have  to 
come  back  to  it.  This  drill  should  be  carried  out  daily  for  10  or  15 
minutes  until  he  is  proficient,  and  then  often  enough  to  keep  him  so. 
The  orders  for  the  setting — i.  e.,  the  actual  ranges  and  deflections — 
should  come  over  the  regular  fire-control  system  to  accustom  the 
sight  setter  to  its  use.  This  may  not  always  be  practicable,  but 
should  be  done  if  possible.  The  setting  should  be  carefully  checked 
by  a  responsible  person,  preferably  the  di\ision  officer  himself,  or. 


44  SHTP    AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

if  this  is  not  possible,  the  gun  captain.  Each  sight  setter  should  be 
provided  with  a  notebook  or  blank  form  to  record  ranges  and 
deflections  received  and  set.  A  recorder  should  be  detailed  at  each 
drill  to  make  these  entries.  Accuracy  should  first  be  insisted  upon, 
and,  when  this  is  acquired,  speed  should  be  developed.  Many  shots 
miss  the  target  because  of  slow  or  inaccurate  sight  setting. 

MISFIRES  AND  HANGFIRES. 

414.  Definition  of  misfire. — A  misfire  occurs  when  an  attempt 
is  made  to  fire  the  gun  and  the  charge  fails  to  explode. 

415.  Classification. — Misfires  may  be  divided  into  two  classes: 

(1)  Primer  misfires,  when  the  primer  fails  to  explode. 

(2)  Charge  misfires,  when  the  primer  explodes,  but  the  charge 
fails  to  explode. 

416.  Definition  of  hangfire. — A  hang  fire  occurs  when  there  is 
an  appreciable  interval  between  the  attempt  to  fire  and  the  explosion 
of  the  charge.  It  is  evident  that  a  hangfire  can  occur  only  after  an 
apparent  charge  misfire. 

Whenever  an  attempt  has  been  made  to  fire  and  gun  fails  to  fire,  a 
hangfire  shall  be  regarded  as  probable  (Regulations  972  (39)  (6)). 

417. — Causes  of  primer  misfires. — The  most  frequent  causes 
of  primer  misfires  are : 

(1)  Electric: 

{a)  Failure  to  close  contact. 

(6)  Poor  or  broken  connections;  not  carefully  tested  before 

firing  or  j  arred  out,  or  cut  during  firing, 
(c)  Ground  on  the  circuit. 
{d)  Du't  or  grease  on  primer  or  contact  lugs. 
{e\  Insufficient  voltage — battery  run  down. 
(J)  Defective  primer — rare. 

(2)  Percussion: 

(a)  Broken  firing  pin. 

(6)  Weak  mains])ring. 

(c)  Dirt  under  firing-pin  shoulder. 

{a)  Fhing  pin  not  directly  over  cap  of  the  primer. 

(e)  Defective  primer — -rare. 

418.  Causes  of  charge  misfires  and  hangfires. — The  most 
frequent  causes  of  charge  misfires  and  hangfires  are: 

(1)  Powder  loaded  in  Avrong — ignition  end  of  charge  forward. 

(2)  Powder  shoved  in  too  far. 

(3)  Powder  wet. 

419.  Classification  of  guns  for  consideration  of  misfires 
and  hangfires. — Guns  may  be  divided  into  three  classes,  as  follows: 

(1)  Bag  guns  (guns  using  combination  primers  in  locks  that  permit 
of  removing  the  primer  without  opening  the  breech). 

(2)  Guns  using  combination  primers  in  a  brass  case. 

(3)  Guns  using  percussion  primers  in  a  brass  case. 


PART    IV GUN    DRILLS. 


45 


420.  Procedure. — (1)  The  following  tables  are  given  as  the 
simplest  means  of  showing  the  procedure  in  case  of  a  misfire,  always 
bearing  in  mind  that  a  charge  misfire  may,  at  any  time,  develop  into 
a  hangfire.  In  making  out  Tables  I  and  II  it  is  taken  for  granted 
that  electric  firing  is  the  primary  method,  and  that  where  both  a 
battery  and  a  motor  generator  circuit  are  fitted  both  will  be  tried 
before  the  pointer  calls  •'misfire." 

(2)  The  rules  of  procedure  are  drawn  up  on  the  following  general 
principles : 

(a)  That  every  effort  consistent  with  safety  shall  be  made  to  fire 
the  gun. 

(b)  That  none  of  the  means  taken  to  fire  it  shall  involve  any  risk 
of  an  accident  by  unlocking  the  breech  during  a  possible  hangfire. 

(3)  The  words  "Fires"  and  'Misfires"  in  the  tables  refer  to  the 
charge  and  not  to  the  primer. 

421.  Procedure  for  Bag  guns  (guns  using  combination 
primers  in  locks  that  permit  of  removing  the  primer  without 
opening  the  breech)  using  pointer  fire. — 


Table  I. 


Misfires  electri- 
cally (battery 
and  motor  gen- 
erator). 


Fires. 


o"5 


Fires 


Connections .    are      O.    K. 
Continue  electric  firing. 


Misfires 


^1 


■g    -c 


Misfires 


Fires 


Use 


thereafter. 


percussion 


firing 


Misfires 


Continue  electric  firing. 


Try  percussion.  If  primers 
are  found  to  have  ex- 
ploded, continue  to  fire 
primers  as  long  as  there 
is  a  reasonable  chance  of 
igniting  the  charge.  If 
the  primers  have  not  ex- 
exploded  (which  will 
rarely  be  the  case)  keep 
trying  new  ones  until  one 
explodes.  If  all  attempts 
fail  to  explode  the  charge 
but  you  'have  succeeded 
in  exploding  primers, 
WAIT  30  MINUTES 
before  opening  breech. 


46 


SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 


422.  Procedure  for   guns  using   combination  primers  in 
cartridge  cases  using  pointer  fire. — 


Table  II. 


Misfires      electri- 
cally    (battery  , 
and  motor  gen 
erator). 


Fires 


Fires     -f  Connections    O.    K.    Con- 


tinue electric  firing. 


Misfires/  ^'^7,^^^>'   percussion   there- 


Misfires 


Hres 


Trv  electric  next  shot. 


Misfires 


Try  several  time 5  both  by 
percussion  and  electricity. 

If  it  fails  to  fire,  WAIT  30 
MINUTES  before  open- 
ing breech. 


423.  Procedure  for  guns  using  percussion  (only)  primers 
in  cartridge  cases. — 

Table  III. 


Misfire: 


££3 


Fires 


Continue.    If  it  has  misfired  repeated!}'  a  new  main- 
spring should  be  j)ut  in. 


f  WAIT    30    MINUTES    FROM    LAST    TRIAL 
Misfires  4      BEFORE     OPENING     BREECH.    Examine 
[     firing  pin  and  mainspring. 


PART    IV GUN    DRILLS.  47 

424.  Use  of  priming  tools. — In  removing  and  inserting  primers 
in  turret  guns,  after  a  misfire,  the  tools  issued  for  the  purpose  should 
be  used.  In  case  the  misfire  should  develop  into  a  hangfire,  the 
recoil  of  the  gun  might  seriously  injure  anyone  attempting  to  prime 
without  the  use  of  the  tool. 

425.  Calling  misfire. — ^Too  much  emphasis  can  not  be  laid  upon 
the  ne;'essity  for  the  pointer  immediately  calling  "Misfire"  as  soon 
as  he  realizes  that  his  gun  has  not  fired  after  he  has  tried  both  electric 
circuits. 

426.  Procedure  in  time  of  war, — Where  the  possible  chances 
of  serious  danger  due  to  misfires  may  be  overbalanced  by  the  more 
important  considerations  of  battle,  the  commanding  officer  may,  at 
his  discretion,  decide  what  interval  shall  intervene  between  the 
occurrence  of  a  misfire  and  the  opening  of  the  breech. 

NOTES   ON    LOADING. 

427.  Rapidity  of  loading. — Rapidity  of  loading  depends  upon: 

(1)  The  rapidity  with,  which  each  member  of  the  gun  crew  per- 
forms his  duty. 

(2)  The  precision  ^nth  which  each  member  of  the  gun  crew  per- 
forms his  allotted  portion  of  the  drill. 

(3)  The  teamwork  of  the  crew  as  a  whole — that  is,  upon  each 
member  of  the  crew  peiformin^  his  duty  in  the  ser\dce  of  the  gun 
at  exactly  the  proper  time  and  in  exactly  the  proper  way  and  with- 
out interference  with  other  members  of  the  crew. 

428.  Accuracy. — Accuracy  and  thoroughness  in  every  detail, 
even  though  it  may  require  slightly  more  time,  is  an  absolute 
requisite  to  real  rapidity  of  loading.  Eagerness  for  excessive  rapidity 
may  result  in  serious  delays  caused  by  interference,  confusion,  and 
casualties  that  can  be  avoided  only  by  precision  in  every  movement. 
It  must  be  remembered  that  these  delays  may^  more  seriously  inter- 
fere with  the  rapidity  of  fire  than  the  deliberation  necessary  to  avoid 
them. 

429.  Movement  required  in  loading. — In  devising  a  drill  for 
a  gun  it  should  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  less  n^ovement  required  of 
the  members  of  the  crew,  the  less  liable  they  are  to  interfere  with 
each  other,  or  to  be  in  one  place  when  they  should  be  in  another. 
This  is  especially  true  of  broadside  guns  to  wliich  the  am.munition 
must  be  brought  by  hand.  For  this  reason  it  is  very  much  better 
to  have  one  man,  the  first  sheilman,  load  all  the  shells,  and  have  the 
other  shell  men  keep  him  supplied  therewith,  than  to  have  them 
alternate  in  loading  the  shells,  each  providing  shells  for  hiniself. 
The  same  is  true  of  the  powdermen.  The  less  movement  required, 
the  better. 


48  SHIP    AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

430.  Development  of  loading  drill. — The  aim  of  every  di^dsion 
officer  should  be  to  so  drill  his  gun  crews  that  they  A\-ill  work  M-ith 
the  precision  and  certainty  of  a  well-regulated  machine.  In  order 
that  this  may  be  accomplished  it  is  necessary  that  each  man 
thoroughly  understands  his  duties  and  the  best  way  of  performing 
them.  To  this  end  the  man  should  first  be  told  exactly  what  his 
duties  are  and  how  to  perform  them;  then  he  should  be  drilled  in 
their  performance.  The  drill  will  have  to  be  slow  at  first,  gradually 
developing  speed,  but  not  at  the  expense  of  accuracy.  1\lien  the 
division  officer  is  satisfied  that  the  crew  has  reached  a  satisfactory 
state  of  efficiency  only  enough  drill  is  necessary"  to  keep  it  from  going 
backward. 

431.  Amount  of  drill. — The  exact  amount  of  drill  necessary 
"will  depend  upon  the  type  of  gun  and  the  individual  men.  No 
definite  rules  can  be  laid  down.  In  order  to  stimulate  interest  and 
to  arouse  a  spirit  of  competition  among  the  crews  it  has  been  found 
advantageous  to  keep  the  times  of  a  certain  number  of  loads  for  each 
crew  and  at  the  end  of  the  drill  to  post  the  a\'erage  on  the  division 
bulletin  board.  It  is  surprising  how  rapidly  the  crews  \vi\\  develop 
when  a  spirit  of  friendly  rivalry  exists  among  them.  This  rivalry 
must  never  be  permitted  to  go  beyond  the  friendly  stage,  however. 

432.  Carelessness  in  loading. — Careless  loading  may  easily  put 
a  gun  out  of  action  for  a  considerable  time.  For  instance,  if  the 
s?rew  box  is  burred  badly,  the  plug  A\ill  not  close;  if  the  powder  bag 
is  loaded  in  wrong  end  first,  a  misfire  or  hangfire  may  result.  It  is 
therefore  necessary  that  the  crew  reach  a  high  state  of  efficiency  in 
respect  to  care  of  material. 

433.  General  rules  in  loading. — A  few  general  rules,  applicable 
to  nearly  all  guns,  are  here  given: 

(1)  Bore  clear. — ^Before  loading  a  bag  gun  fitted  with  a  gas-expelling 
device  and  using  powder  put  up  in  bags,  a  designated  member  of 
the  crew  will  look  through  the  bore  and  report  "Bore  clear."  The 
most  available  member  of  the  crew  \nll  be  designated  for  this  duty. 
This  is  to  guard  against  failure  to  remove  the  tompion  before  the 
first  shot  and  thereafter  to  insure  against  any  foreign  matter  or 
inflammable  gas  being  left  in  the  bore. 

(2)  Seating  shell. — Experiments  have  shown  that  a  failure  to  seat 
the  shell  causes  a  variation  in  the  range  of  the  gun.  This  is  caused 
by  the  escape  of  gases  past  the  shell  before  it  takes  in  the  rifling. 
It  is  absolutely  required  in  all  guns  using  separate  ammunition  that 
the  shell  be  rammed  home  with  a  rammer.  Great  care  should  be 
taken  by  the  rammerman  to  insure  that  the  shell  is  properly  seated. 

(3)  Ignition  charge. — In  loading  the  powder  bags  in  a  gun,  care 
must  be  taken  that  the  ignition  charge  is  always  to  the  rear;  other- 
"vvise  a  misfire  or  hangfire  may  result.     The  last  charge  to  be  loaded 

•in  should  be  just  clear  of  the  mushroom  head. 


PART    IV GUN    DRILLS.  49 

(4)  Priming. — The  primins;  of  bag  guns  while  the  breech  is  open  is 
not  permitted,  and  the  breech  plug  must  be  closed  and  locked  before 
the  primer  is  inserted  in  the  firing  lock,  except  in  those  guns  where 
the  wedge  block,  containing  the  firing  pin,  is  arranged  to  operate 
automatically  by  the  functioning  of  the  breech  mechanism  in  such 
manner  that  the  firing  pin  can  not  be  brought  opposite  the  primer 
until  the  plug  is  closed  and  locked.  In  the  latter  case  the  primer 
may  be  put  in  the  lock  while  the  breech  is  open.  With  locks  that 
are  operated  by  hand  the  plug  must  be  closed  and  locked  to  wdthin 
about  one-fourth  of  an  inch  of  contact  before  the  primer  is  inserted 
in  the  lock.  After  the  primer  is  inserted  the  plug  should  be  com- 
pletely locked.  If  it  is  desired  to  fire  by  percussion,  and  it  is 
necessary  to  cock  the  lock  and  then  fire  it  with  a  lanyard,  the  lanyard 
must  be  hooked  before  the  lock  is  cocked. 

(5)  Loading  tray. — Every  precaution  must  be  taken  against 
injury  to  the  screw  box  and  gas-check  seat.  To  this  end  a  loading 
tray  must  always  be  used  except  with  fixed  ammunition  and  with 
bag  guns,  in  which  it  has  been  demonstrated  that  the  gun  can  be 
loaded  without  appreciable  danger  without  a  tray. 

(6)  Ilandling  ammunition. — ^For  case  guns,  the  shellmen  should 
provide  themselves  with  knives  for  cutting  the  lashings  on  the 
boxes  and  with  waste  for  wiping  off  the  cartridge  cases.  Before 
target  practice  case  ammunition  should  be  gotten  up,  thoroughly 
cleaned  and  tried  in  the  gun,  but  if  at  any  time  the  ammunition 
to  be  used  has  not  been  cleaned  and  wiped  off,  the  above  precautions 
are  necessary.  Care  must  be  observed  that  no  waste  falls  in  the 
screw  box  or  gets  in  the  bore.  Sometimes  when  handling  case 
ammunition  the  projectile  starts  from  its  seat  in  the  case.  This 
should  be  looked  for  and  shell  reseated  before  attempting  to  load 
or  the  breech  will  not  close. 

(7)  Mushroom. — When  firing  bag  guns,  the  mushroom  head  must 
be  wiped  off  with  a  wet  sponge  after  each  shot. 

(8)  Firing  pin. — When  firing  case  guns,  while  the  plug  is  open 
the  plugman  should  pass  his  hand  o^-er  the  face  of  the  plug  to  insure 
himself  that  the  firing  pin  is  housed  properly  This  is  to  guard 
against  having  a  projecting  firing  pin  strike  the  primer  as  the  plug 
swings  shut,  thus  causing  a  premature  explosion  and  possible  disaster. 

(9)  Ammunition  supply. — The  prompt  and  regular  supply  of 
ammunition  is  essential  to  efficiency,  therefore  actual  exercise  in 
that  feature  is  as  necessary  as  is  exercise  at  the  gun.  Rapid  loading, 
without  a  corresponding  rapid  ammunition  supply,  is  without 
value,  and  this  supply  includes  every  operation  from  taking  the 
ammunition  from  the  magazine  and  unboxing  it  to  loading  it  in 
the  gun.  Especial  attention  should  be  given  to  providing  for  the 
disposition  of  cartridge  boxes  or  powder  tanks  in  such  a  manner  as 
least  to  interfere  with  rapidity  of  serving  the  gun. 


50  SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

(10)  Shell  slipping. — Watch  the  first  shell  shoved  home  in  a  clean 
gun.  If  the  gun  is  elevated  (as  by  ship  rolling),  the  shell  is  very 
apt  to  slip  back  and  not  be  home  when  the  gun  is  fired.  This  is 
caused  by  oil  on  the  compression  slope,  and  it  may  occur  after  the 
powder  charge  is  home  and  thus  not  be  seen.  Its  effect  is  to  reduce 
the  velocity.  If  the  shell  is  persistent  in  slipping  back,  tie  a  little 
grommet  of  small  twine  around  it  just  forward  of  the  band.  If  a 
shell  goes  home  properly  it  emits  a  nonmistakable,  clear,  ringing 
sound.     If  it  gives  a  dull  thud  it  is  not  home. 

(11)  Clearing  the  vent. — It  is  seldom  necessary  to  clear  the  vent. 
If  it  be  found  necessary,  the  priming  wire  should  be  used  from  the 
forward  end  of  the  plug,  care  being  taken  to  avoid  scoring  the  primer 
seat.  After  cleanng  the  vent  with  the  primer  wire,  take  care  to 
clean  thoroughly  the  primer  seat  with  the  vent  cleaner.  In  case  of 
a  blowback,  the  vent  and  primer  seat  should  be  examined  for  scoring 
and  thoroughly  cleaned.  The  vent  drill  will  not  be  used  except 
under  the  direct  supervision  of  an  officer. 

(12)  Fii^ed  primers. — Keep  primers  that  have  been  fired  out  of 
reach,  otherwise  somebody  may  try  to  use  them  again.  This  has 
not  infrequently  happened. 

NOTES  ON  GUN  DRILLS. 

434.  Detailed  drill. — Type  turret  and  broadside  gun  drills  are 
given  as  guide. 

These  drills  are  to  serve  as  guides  for  standard  practice,  but  are 
not  necessarily  to  be  adhered  to  when  the  design  of  turret  or  type 
of  vessel  does  not  permit,  or  when  it  is  clearly  evident  that  changes 
will  result  in  improvement  in  the  drills.  Turret  officers,  knowing 
the  peculiarities  of  their  own  turrets,  are  best  able  to  cope  with 
their  individual  difficulties  and  develop  their  ovm  drills.  As  a 
partial  guide  and  to  standardize  practice  the  following  general  rules 
are  given : 

435.  Control  of  turret. — When  both  guns  of  a  turret  are 
being  fired  the  turret  officer  must  still  retain  perfect  control  of 
his  turret.  The  junior  officers  of  the  turret  and  the'turret  captain 
are  his  assistants  for  this  purpose. 

436.  Turret  stations. — 

(1)  Turret  officer. — ^The  station  of  the  turret  officer  is  habitually 
in  the  turret  booth.  If  the  turret  is  not  fitted  with  a  booth,  he  must 
be  where  he  can  best  exercise  his  command  of  the  turret. 

(2)  Jimior  officers. — If  there  is  only  one  junior  officer,  his  station 
is  usually  in  charge  of  the  ammunition  crew.  If  there  are  two 
or  more,  one  of  them  should  be  in  the  turret  to  assist  the  turret  officer, 
.lunior  officers  should  be  thoroughly  familiar  with  the  operation  of 
the  turret,  as  they  may,  at  any  time,  be  called  upon  to  take  com- 
mand of  it. 


PART   IV GUN    DRILLS.  51 

(3)  Tiaret  captain. — The  turret  captain  is  stationed  at  the  dis- 
cretion of  the  turret  officer.  It  is  considered  best  to  put  him  in 
direct  command  of  one  gun,  and  a  junior  officer  (if  available)  in 
direct  command  of  the  other,  the  turret  officer  supervising  both. 

(4)  Gunner's  mates. — Every  turret  has  permanently  assigned 
to  it  one  or  more  gunner 's  mates.  These  can  not  be  used  as  mem- 
bers of  the  guns  crews,  but  should  be  stationed  where  they  will  be 
available  in  case  of  breakdown. 

(5)  Turret  electricians. — Every  turret  should  have  an  electri- 
cian permanently  detailed  for  duty  in  the  turret,  and  whose  battle 
station  is  in  the  turret.  His  duties  are  to  keep  the  electrical  installa- 
tion in  good  working  order,  and  his  battle  station  is  wherever  he 
can  best  lookout  for  fuses  and  circuit  breakers. 

(6)  Gun  captain. — Each  gun  of  a  turret  should  have  a  gun  captain 
qualified  or  acting.  He  should  be  selected  with  great  care,  due 
weight  being  given  to  ability  to  handle  men,  knowledge  of  the  gun 
and  mount,  alertness,  keenness,  and  judgment.  He  may  have 
no  additional  duties,  or  may  occupy  a  station  of  the  loading  crew. 
In  any  case  he  should  be  in  a  position  to  observe  and  direct  the 
work  of  the  crew. 

(7)  Pointers  and  sight  setters. — Every  gun  in  a  turret  must  have 
at  least  two  pointers.  These  are  usually  called  first  and  second 
pointers. 

(8)  Trainer  and  sight  setter. — Every  turret  requires  a  trainer 
and  a  trainer's  sight  setter.  These  are  usually  called  first  and 
second  trainers.  Their  stations  are,  respectively,  at  the  training 
wheel  and  the  trainer's  sight  mechanism,  and  their  respective 
duties  are  to  keep  the  turret  trained  on  the  target,  and  to  keep  the 
sight  set  according  to  the  orders  through  the  fire-control  system. 

(9)  Messengers.— It  is  well  to  have  a  messenger  in  the  turret 
and  one  in  the  handling  room.  The  one  in  the  turret  should  be 
in  the  booth  with  the  turret  officer,  and  the  one  in  the  handling 
room  should  be  at  the  voice  tube  leading  to  the  turret. 

(10)  Li  charge  of  handling  room. — When  there  is  no  junior  offi- 
cer in  charge  of  the  handling  room,  a  petty  officer,  thoroughly 
familiar  with  the  drill,  should  be  placed  in  charge  and  held  account- 
able.   • 

437.  Living  in  turrets. — Gunner's  mates,  tm'ret  electricians 
and  theii'  helpers  should  live  in  the  tuiTet,  and  one  of  them  should 
always  be  required  to  be  there.  There  should  be  no  objection 
to  these  men  making  themselves  as  comfortable  as  possible  therein, 
provided  the  efficiency  of  the  gear  is  in  no  way  impaired,  the  turret 
and  handling  room  kept  clean  and  in  order,  and  abuses  against 
discipline  prevented. 

7431°— 23 5 


52  SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

438.  Giving  commands. — Commands  involving  the  whole  tur-, 
ret  should,  of  course,  be  given  by  the  turret  officer.  The  junior; 
officer,  or  turret  captain,  in  charge  of  one  gun,  or  the  gun  captain,' 
may  give  orders  or  commands  as  necessary  in  the  service  of  his, 
own  gun.  Unnecessary  commands  tend  to  confusion.  The  drill 
should  be  carried  out  in  perfect  silence,  each  man  performing  his; 
own  duty  quickly,  and  with  as  little  interference  with  others  as 
possible. 

439.  Loading  position. — In  those  tun-ets  that  require  the  gum 
to  be  brought  to  a  loading  position  (approximate)  care  should: 
be  taken  to  inform  the  pointer  when  the  gun  is  again  ready  for: 
movement  in  elevation.  This  time  will  vary  with  different  guns,  i 
depending  upon  the  method  of  loading  the  powder;  but  in  case  the 
pointer  is  allowed  to  elevate  the  gun  before  the  breech  is  closed,  it 
is  especially  important  that  the  shell  be  seated  securely  to  prevent 
it  slipping  back  out  of  the  breech. 

440.  Standard  gun  crew  titles. — There  is  a  tendency  to  care- 
lessness among  young  officers  in  naming  the  different  members  of 
a  turret  crew. 

441.  Assignment  to  turret  stations. — A  man  should  be  sta- 
tioned in  the  position  that  he  is  best  qualified  to  fill.  Each  man 
should  be  trained  for  as  many  stations  as  practicable,  though  spe- 
cially trained  for  his  own  particular  station.  Generally  the  greater 
the  number  of  stations  a  man  is  capable  of  filling  the  better  is  he 
able  to  perform  the  duties  of  his  own,  and  the  better  the  duties  of 
those  who  may  be  disabled  will  be  absorbed  by  the  remaining 
members  of  the  crew.  The  gun  captain  will  be  responsible  for  the 
service  of  the  gun  in  action.  Gun  captains  should  not  be  finally 
selected  until  the  division  officer  knows  his  men  thoroughly.  The 
gun  captain  should  not  be  recommended  for  examination  until  he 
has  been  through  at  least  one  target  practice  while  acting  in  that 
capacity.  Plugmen  should  be  strong*,  quick,  and  steady.  Men 
who  are  mentally  quick  should  be  selected  to  run  electric  gear, 
rammers,  hoists,  etc. 

442.  Preliminary  instruction  in  loading. — Having  tentatively' 
stationed  the  gun  crews,  the  first  drill  periods  should  be  devoted 
to  explaining  and  demonstrating  the  gear.  The  men  should  be 
taught  at  this  time  the  general  scheme  of  loading,  nomenclature 
of  parts,  the  necessity  for  precision  and  safety  regulations.  After 
these  are  understood  the  individuals  should  be  drilled  in  their  par- 
ticular duties.  Each  movement  of  each  man  should  be  studied 
until  the  best,  surest,  and  quickest  method  of  accomplishing  each 
task  is  discovered.  Insist  upon  precision  rather  than  speed.  The 
candidate  for  each  position  should  carefully  practice  his  pa^-t  until 
fairly  proficinet,  and  then  the  crew  can  be  given  exercise  in  loading. 


PART    IV GUN    DRILLS.  53 

443.  Loading  exercises. — In  the  complicated  power  loadinj? 
turrets  save  the  gear  as  much  as  possible.  After  a  load  criticize 
in  detail  each  mistake.  Then  load  once  more,  and  repeat  the  lec- 
ture. It  is  a  frequent  and  bad  practice  to  slam  through  seven  or 
eight  loads,  all  imperfect  in  some  detail. 

444.  Timing  loads. — As  soon  as  the  crews  can  load  with  pre- 
cision begin  to  pit  them  against  one  another.  Speed  in  loading 
is  the  natural  result  of  precision  and  team  work.  In  the  event  of 
mishap  always  have  the  fault  remedied  as  would  be  the  case  in 
service,  and  always  complete  evei^  load  that  is  attempted.  The  time 
should  be  taken  from  shot  to  shot,  as  seconds  saved  in  loading  may 
be  readily  lost  by  the  pointer. 

445.  Priming. — ^The  plugman  should  practice  priming  many 
times  a  day  until  proficient. 

446.  Powder  passing. — If  the  powder  is  passed  by  hand,  the 
passers  should  be  required  to  pass  at  least  50  bags  a  day.  This  can 
be  accomplished  by  sending  the  bags  up  on  one  side  of  the  turret 
and  down  on  the  other.  Care  must  be  exercised  to  always  have  the 
strap  end  of  the  bag  uppermost,  and  that  this  strap  is  not  used  in 
passing  the  bags.  The  powder  passes  should  be  drilled  daily  until 
they  are  developed,  and  can  continue  their  duties  without  becoming 
fatigued.  Every  individual  who  handles  the  powder  must  under- 
stand that  the  ignition  end  of  all  bags  must  be  toward  the  breech. 
Instruction  must  be  given  regarding  the  care  to  be  taken  in  handling 
bags^the  breaking  of  a  single  powder  bag  may  interrupt  or  delay 
the  firing,  and  should  not  occur. 

447.  Training  of  pointers. — Having  become  familiar  with 
the  gun  and  its  appurtenances,  the  candidate  for  pointer  should  be 
taught  the  significance  of  the  "stand-by"  and  the  "firing"  signals, 
the  time  interval  to  be  used,  etc.,  the  necessity  of  being  "on"^  when 
he  fires,  to  "hold  fire"  if  he  is  not  "on,"  and  in  general  given  a 
thorough  knowledge  of  the  system  of  spotting  and  fire  control. 
It  is  not  sufficient  to  tell  a  pointer  that  "the  better  the  pointing  the 
poorer  the  results  if  the  sights  aire  incorrectly  set."^  He  must  be 
told  WHY.  He  should  understand  enough  of  the  principles  of  fire 
control  to  know  why  implicit  obedience  to  the  orders  of  the  spotter 
is  necessary,  and  why  an  attempted  betterment  of  the  spotter's 
corrections  will  certainly  result  in  disaster.  He  should  under- 
stand the  firing  connections,  the  methods  of  firing,  and  the  safety 
precautions.  After  instruction  has  been  given  the  candidate  for 
pointer,  he  should  be  put  through  exhaustive  tests.  The  time  to 
be  spent  on  each  man  will  vary  considerably,  but  sufficient  time 
must  be  allowed  to  give  each  candidate  a  thorough  and  impartial 
examination.  Too  little  attention  is  sometimes  paid  to  the  con- 
sistent drilling  of  pointers.     The  turret  should  be  in  a  state  of  pre- 


54  SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

paredness  at  all  times,   and  should  have  an  adequate  supply  of 
expert  gun  pointers. 

448.  Selection  of  pointers  to  continue  training. — Some  men 
will  soon  begin  to  do  better  than  others,  the  groups  of  candidates 
should  be  rearranged,  putting  the  best  men  together.  The  best 
and  steadiest  should  be  tried  at  training,  as  this  is  the  more  difficult 
position.  After  a  few  drills  and  trials  of  different  groups,  the  poorer 
ones  can  be  dropped,  and  the  entire  time  devoted  to  the  training 
of  those  who  have  shown  themselves  to  be  the  most  promising. 

449.  Safety.— All  safety  regulations  7nust  be  strictly  obeyed.  In 
stationing  the  crew  regard  must  be  had  to  their  safety  under  all 
conditions.  Arrangements  must  be  made  so  that  ammunition  cars 
can  be  loaded  in  safety.  The  turret  officer  is  responsible  for  the 
crew,  and  every  precaution  should  be  taken  to  avoid  accidents  to 
them. 

INTERMEDIATE  CALIBER  AND  MINOR  CALIBER  GUN 
DRILLS. 

450.  Drills. — The  following  drills  for  broadside  guns  are  those 
which  have  given  the  best  results  in  service.  A\Tiile  strict  com- 
pliance with  them  is  not  mandatory,  it  is  believed  that  they  are  the 
best  that  have  been  developed  to  date,  and  they  should  be  followed 
until  opportunity  to  observe  results  and  experience  sufficient  to 
lead  to  improving  them  have  been  had. 

461.  Service  of  3-inch,  50-caliber  semiautomatic  anti- 
aircraft guns.— 

(1) .     Title  and  stations  of  gun  creic. — 

Title.  Station. 

Plugman  fgun  captain').. .  Near  operating  lever,  in  charge  of  crew. 

Pointer At  elevating  wheel. 

Trainer At  training  wheel. 

Sight  setter At  sight-setting  mechanism. 

First  shellman Left  and  rear  of  breech.     Acts  as  gun 

captain  in  absence  of  gun  captain. 

Second  shellman Rear  of  first  shellman. 

Third  shellman Directly  in  rear  of  breech. 

Fuse  setter Standing  bv  ammunition  which  may  be 

in  racks,  "boxes  or  on  deck. 
Gunner's  mate Standing  by  his  tools. 

2.  Commands. — -In  the  service  of  the  gun  the  following  commands 
shall  be  used: 

(a)  Stations. — -At  this  command,  which  may  be  given  at  any  time 
or  in  any  formation,  the  crew  goes  at  once  to  their  gun,  take  their 
respective  stations  preparatory  to  loading  and  firing  the  gun,  keep 


PART   IV GUN    DRILLS.  55 

silence,  and  await  further  commands.     The  gun  is  supposed  to  be 
ready  for  the  exercise  required  when  this  command  is  given. 

(6)  Table. — (Give  number  of  F.  (\  table);  zone  (give  number  of 
F.  C.  zone).  Note.— See  Ordnance  Pamphlet  No.  145  or  brass 
plates  on  guns  which  give  for  the  various  tables  and  zones: 

(1)  The  sight-bar  range. 

(2)  The  fuse  setting."  The  fuse  is  set,  if  not  already  set.  The 
sight  is  set  for  range. 

(c)  Scale. — (Give  reading  on  arbitrary  deflection  scale.)  The 
sight  is  set  for  deflection. 

{d)  Load  {the  ''table"  and  "zone"  having  been  received). — Pointer 
and  trainer  keep  gun  pointed  on  target  if  already  designated.  Sight 
setter  sets  sights  as  ordered.  Plugman.(gun  captain)  super\ises; 
opens  plug,  if  not  already  open.  First  shellman  loads  and  shoves 
home  the  cartridge  case,  its  fuse  setting  being  that  designated. 
Second  shellman  "hands  another  cartridge  case  to  first  shellm.an. 
Third  shellman  stands  by  to  catch  the  empty  case  when  the  gun 
is  fired.  If  empty  case  does  not  come  clear  out,  he  extracts  it. 
Fuse  setter  sets  fuse  for  designated  zone. 

(e)  Tram  on  (designate  target);  bearing  (give  number  of  degi'ees 
target  bears  fi-om  ahead  to  the  right);  elevation  (give  number  of 
degrees  gun  is  to  be  elevated).  Note.— Point  of  aim  is  the  middle 
of  the  target  unless  otherwise  designated.  The  gun  will  be  trained 
on  the  target. 

(/)  Commence  Firing! — This  command  may  be  given  either 
before  or  after  the  gun  is  loaded.  If  it  is  given  before,  the  gun  will 
be  loaded  at  once.  The  table,  zone,  scale,  and  target  having  been 
designated,  the  firing  and  service  of  the  gun  are  started .^ 

The  pointer  will  fire  when  on  target  provided  the  gun  is  ready, 
the  sights  are  set,  and  a  firing  signal  is  sounding. _ 

The  gun  will  be  reloaded  as  soon  as  fired  and  firing  will  continue 
until  the  ammunition  is  exhausted  or  until  the  command  "cease 
firing."  In  case  a  new  zone  is  ordered  take  care  that  thereafter 
the  gun  is  loaded  with  cartridge  ha\dng  the  latest  fuse  setting. 

(g)  Silence.'— This  command  is  given  if,  for  any  reason,  it  is  neces- 
sary to  stop  temporarily  the  ser\'ice  of  the  gun.  It  may  be  given 
by  the  division  officer  or  by  any  member  of  the  crew  noticing  some- 
thing requiring  immediate  attention.  "\\Tien  it  is  given,  every 
member  of  the  crew  ceases  all  operations,  stands  in  his  tracks,  and 
awaits  instructions. 

If  a  member  of  the  crew  calls  "silence'^  he  will  point  out  to  the 
division  officer  or  gun  captain  what  he  has  observ^ed. 

(h)  Carry  on! — After  the  command  "silence''  the  defect  having 
been  remedied,  this  command  is  given,  at  which  the  crew  resume 
the  operation  in  which  they  were  engaged  when  command  "silence'' 
was  given. 


56  SHIP    AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

(i)  Cease  firing! — The  service  of  the  gun  is  stopped.  If  the  gun 
is  loaded  the  plugman  opens  the  breech.  The  first  shellman  with- 
draws the  cartridge  case  and  sets  fuse  at  "safety." 

All  safety  precautions  with  reference  to  misfires  and  hangfires 
will  be  strictly  observed. 

If  the  crew  leaves  the  gun  at  any  time,  the  gun  shall  be  left  in  the 
condition  of  "cease  firing." 

(j)  Unload! — This  command  will  only  be  given  after  the  gun  is 
loaded  and  before  the  command  "commence  firing."  The  procedure 
is  the  same  as  at  "  cease  firing. ' ' 

(k)  Secure! — -The  members  of  the  crew  under  the  supervision  of 
the  gun  captain  return  everything  that  has  been  provided  and 
secure  the  gun.  Ammunition  is  returned  to  the  magazine.  If  gun 
has  actually  been  fired,  the  crew  assist  the  gunner's  mate  in  washing 
out  and  oiling  the  bore.     The  crew  fall  in  for  muster. 

3.  Duties  of  members  of  creivs. — (a)  Gun  captain. — The  gun  cap- 
tain is  the  direct  representative  of  the  battery  officer  and  in  absolute 
charge  at  the  gun.  He  is  responsible  for  the  conduct,  efficiency, 
and  spirit  of  the  crew.  He  will  be  often  detailed  to  conduct  drills 
and  must  know  all  about  his  gun,  the  duties  of  each  member  of  the 
crew,  first  aid,  and  the  action  needed  to  meet  all  casualties. 

He  is  responsible  for  the  gun  and  crew;  for  carr^dng  out  all  safety 
precautions ;  and  must  report  immediately  to  the  control  officer  and 
the  battery  officer  any  casualties  or  unusual  conditions. 

He  is  responsible  for  all  gear  at  the  gun  and  for  the  prompt  and 
accurate  execution  of  all  orders  received  from  the  control  officer. 
He  sees  that  individual  duties  are  properly  performed  by  members 
of  the  crew.     He  tests  the  breech  mechanism. 

In  preparing  for  exercise  he  pro^ddes  lanyards,  recocking  tool, 
hand  electric  light  and  knife  with  which  to  open  ammunition  boxes. 
Assisted  by  the  second  shellman,  removes  tampion.  On  manning 
gun  reports  via  sight  setter  to  control  officer  when  gun  is  ready. 
Operates  breech  plug  as  necessary — that  is,  if  the  semiautomatic 
attachment  is  not  being  used,  or  if  the  plug  does  not  remain  open 
after  firing. 

Watches  gun  to  see  that  it  returns  to  battery. 

Watches  lock-plate  locking  de^dce  and  sees  that  it  is  properly  set. 

Sees  thrust  cam  properly  set  and  operating  lever  disengaged  from 
shaft. 

Calls  '  'Ready  "  to  pointer  when  breech  is  closed  after  loading. 

In  unloading  opens  breech  slowly  and  carefully. 

In  case  of  misfire  and  gun  is  "in  battery"  plugman  recocks  and 
calls  out  "Ready."  If  gun  still  misfires  he  removes  firing  pin  and 
examines  same,  replacing  spare  parts  when  necessary. 

In  case  gun  fails  to  return  to  battery  by  not  more  than  2  inches, 
plugman  sings  out  "Fire  by  lanyard!"  and  after  gun  is  loaded  hooks 


PART   IV GUN    DRILLS.  57 

lanyard,  sings  out ''Ready"  and  stands  by  to  fire  when  pointer  sings 
out  ''FireV 

In  case  the  gun  is  more  than  2  inches  from  "in  battery"  he 
(assisted  by  gun  crew)  endeavors  to  jar  gun  back  to  battery  by  using 
a  hea\y  weight  against  the  breech. 

Note. — Marks  should  be  painted  on  the  gun  and  slide  to  indicate  to  the  plugman 
whether  or  not  gun  has  returned  to  battery. 

In  case  breech  plug  jams  in  closing,  plugman  closes  it,  using  hand 
pressure  on  bottom  of  plug.  If  plug  still  fails  to  close,  he  extracts 
shell,  using  operating  lever,  and  examines  bore. 

In  general,  gun  captain  replaces  firing  mechanism  as  necessary, 
and  handles  all  casualties. 

(6)  Pointer. — The  pointer  operates  the  elevating  wheel  to  keep 
Ms  horizontal  wire  continuously  on  the  point  of  aim. 

In  preparing  for  exercise  he  removes  eight  caps,  cleans  and  focuses 
sights  as  necessaiy  (sight  caps  are  kept  on  except  when  gun  is  actu- 
ally in  use).  He  examines  firing  mechanism  and  sight  lights,  tests 
elevating  gear,  checks  cross  wires  with  trainer  and  reports  "Ready" 
to  gun  captain. 

He  fires  the  gun  but  only  after  the  following  conditions  are  met: 
"Commence  firing,"  given,  gun  reported  ''Ready''  by  plugman, 
sight  set  and  reported  ^'Set''  by  sight  setter,  and  firing  signal  sound- 
ing. It  is  imperative  that  the  pointer  and  trainer  keep  continuously 
on  the  target,  since  the  pointer  must  not  miss  a  firing  signal. 

Gun  will  be  customarily  fired,  using  electric  firing  circuit. 

If  gun  fails  to  fire  upon  attempt  to  fire,  pointer  sings  out  "  MisfireP'' 

In  case  gun  captain  has  ordered  "Fire  by^  lanyard,"  after  report  of 
"Ready,"  when  pointer  wishes  to  fire,  he  sings  out  "Fire"  and  gun 
captain  pulls  firing  lanyard. 

In  case  of  blurred  sight,  pointer  cleans  it  with  lens  paper. 

In  case  of  cross  wires  jar  out  of  adjustment  he  informs  gun  captain 
by  singing  out  "Cross  wires  cut."  This  will  be  apparent  if  much 
coaching  is  required  to  get  trainer  on. 

Pointer's  sight  is  first  assumed  to  be  correct. 

If  it  is  apparent  that  pointer's  sight  is  wrong,  or  if  it  is  destroyed, 
he  sings  out  "  Trainer  fire!" 

Thereafter  pointer  elevates  as  trainer  directs  and  fu'es  gun  when 
trainer  sings  out ' '  Fire, ' '  if  firing  signal  is  sounding. 

In  case  of  hangfire  keeps  gun  pointed  clear  of  friends. 
_  (c)   Trainer. — Operates  training  wheel  to  keep  vertical  wire  con- 
tinuously on  the  point  of  aim  or  as  directed.     He  should  require 
but  little  coaching  from  pointer  after  they  have  once  checked  up. 

In  preparing  for  exercise  he  takes  off  sight  covers,  provides  lens 
paper,  cleans  and  focuses  sight  as  necessary,  examines  night  sight 
lights,  checks  cross  wire  with  pointer,  tests  training  gear,  and  reports 


58  SHIP    AND    GUX    DRILLS. 

'' Ready ^^  to  gun  captain  (sight  caps  are  kept  on  except  when  gun  is 
actually  in  use).     Trains  on  designated  bearing  or  target. 

In  case  of  hang  fire  keeps  gun  trained  clear  of  friends. 

In  case  of  blurred  sight  cleans  it  with  lens  paper. 

{d)  Sight  setter. — Sets  sights,  wears  phone,  and  transmits  all 
communications  between  gun  and  group  control  officer.  In  pre- 
paring for  exercise  provides  and  plugs  in  telephone  and  tests 
communication  with  control  officer.  Corrects  and  tests  night  sight 
lights  and  battle  lantern.  Tests  sight  mechanism  and  checks  zero 
of  range  dial  and  sword  arm. 

Operates  range  and  deflection  scales  as  directed  by  group  control 
officer.  Sets  sight,  range  first,  reporting  ''Set''  to  pointer  and  touch- 
ing him  lightly  when  sights  have  been  set. 

This  report  of  "Set"  will  also  be  made  after  gun  captain's  report 
of  ''Ready'''  if  not  actually  changing  sight  setting. 

Repeats  all  orders  to  the  gun  captain  coming  from  control  officer, 
and  so  fuse  setter  can  hear  him.  If  ranges  or  orders  are  not  under- 
stood sings  our  "'Repeat"  over  telephone. 

During  firing,  should  a  regular  firing  interval  elapse,  (after  sights 
are  set)  without  a  firing  signal  reaching  him,  reports  to  control, 
"iVo  buzzer  on  gun!"  making  sure  he  has  Ijeen  heard  by  requiring 
an  acknowledgment. 

Minimizes  talking  over  telephone  to  give  communication  from 
control  the  right  of  way. 

He  will  not  change  sight  setting  while  a  firing  signal  is  sounding. 

(e)  First  shellman. — Receives  cartridge  from  second  shellman  and 
loads  gun. 

In  preparing  for  exercise  assists  sight  setter  connect  up  battle 
lantern,  provides  bucket  of  clean  fresh  water,  loading  glove,  and 
clean  hand  swab. 

Stands  in  rear  of  left  of  breech,  facing  to  right,  as  close  to  gun  as 
safety  will  permit. 

Receives  cartridge  from  second  shellman,  holding  it  close  to  the 
breech  parallel  to  the  bore,  above  the  path  of  the  empty  case  in 
ejection,  left  hand  under  cartridge  case  about  at  the  balance,  right 
hand  on  the  base,  fingers  extending  upward.  Loads  smartly  by 
aligning  cartridge  with  bore  and  following  it  home  -vvith  the  right 
hand,  letting  the  breechblock  force  the  hand  upward  in  closing, 
being  careful  not  to  get  fingers  caught  in  breech.  Be  careful  to 
have  the  point  of  the  shell  in  center  of  bore  to  avoid  hitting  the  fuse. 

In  unloading  receives  the  cartridge  and  sets  fuse,  at  safety  and 
passes  cartridge  to  second  shellman. 

(/)  Second  shellman. — Keeps  first  shellman  supplied  with  cartridge. 

In  preparing  for  exercise  assists  gun  captain  (plugman)  to  remove 
tompion  and  to  clear  deck  of  obstacles.  Rigs  davit  for  getting 
ammunition  to  guns. 


PART    IV GUN    DKTLLS.  59 

Stands  in  rear  of  gun  and  to  right  of  fii'st  shellman;  receives  car- 
tridge \vith  both  hands  around  the  middle  so  that  the  first  shellman 
may  receive  it  in  position  to  load  from  fuse  setter;  hands  cartridge 
to  first  loader  -with  point  toward  breech. 

In  unloading  receives  cartridge  fi'om  first  shellman  and  replaces 
it  in  the  supply, 

(g)  Third  shellman. — Catches  ejected  cases  and  throws  them  clear 
of  the  service  of  the  gun. 

In  preparing  for  exercise  assists  second  shellman  in  clearing  deck 
of  obstacles  and  to  rig  ammunition  da\dt  if  necessary. 

Stands  to  rear  and  right  of  gun. 

{h)  Fuse  setter. — Sets  shrapnel  fuses  as  directed  by  group  control 
officer  over  telephone.  Hears  sight  setter  repeat ' '  table  "  and  ' '  zone, ' ' 
and  consults  table  (similar  to  brass  plate  on  gun)  to  obtain  fuse  setting. 
If  this  table  can  not  be  read,  obtains  fuse  setting  from  sight  setter. 

In  preparing  for  exercise  pro\'ides  table  of  fuse  settings,  fuse 
wrench  and  pliers  to  remove  fuse  caps. 

Note.— When  there  is  possibUity  of  an  attack,  ammunition  should  be  kept  in 
ready  boxes  near  the  gans,  with  fuses  set,  the  shell  of  like  fuse  settings  grouped  together 
by  zones,  e.  g.,  zone  1, 1  second  seconds,  etc.;  zone  12, 12  second  seconds.  As  shells 
from  a  zone  are  used  the  fuse  setter  sets  fuses  for  a  similar  number  of  shells  and 
thus  keeps  racks  or  boxes  filled. 

GUNNER'S   MATES. 

General  duties. — Provides  spare  parts  and  tools,  and  prepares  to 
repair  any  casualty  likely  to  occur.  Inspects  all  guns  just  prior  to 
firing. 

Note.— Clearing  away  generally  in  wake  of  gun,  if  not  already  done,  will  be  done 
by  the  whole  crew  under  the  gun  captain's  direction. 

Similarly  ammunition  will  be  provided  at  the  guns,  the  ammu- 
nition being  obtained  from  the  ammunition  crew  who  bring  it  to 
the  main  deck  level. 

Misfires. — The  most  frequent  causes  of  misfires  are:  Failure  of  the 
gun  to  completely  return  to  battery,  causing  the  trigger  arm  to  fail 
to  engage  the  sear  bar;  broken  firing  pin  or  weak  spring. 

Removal  of  personnel  casualties. — It  is  the  duty  of  the  gun  crew  to 
continue  the  service  of  the  gun  and  to  overcome  every  obstacle 
which  interferes  therewith.  The  gun  crew  will,  therefore,  not 
cease  their  operations  of  loading,  but  two  men  nearest  to  the 
wounded  man  should,  without  orders,  place  him  in  any  convenient 
position  clear  of  the  working  of  the  gun  and  return  to  their  duties. 

Changing  stations. — As  soon  as  the  personnel  is  fairly  proficient  at 
their  regular  stations  they  should  be  exercised  at  other  stations  in 
their  own  units,  in  order  that  the  personnel  may  be  proficient  not 


60  SHIP   AND    GUN   DRILLS. 

only  at  their  own  stations,  but  also  have  a  thorough  idea  of  their 
relation  to  the  rest  of  the  personnel  and  have  a  groundwork  for  train- 
ing as  reliefs. 

Note. — The  foregoing  standard  instructions  for  service  of  the  antiaircraft  guns  are 
issued  for  the  guidance  of  all  concerned. 

Attention  is  also  invited  to  requirements  of  safety  orders  (Xaval 
Instructions). 

462.  Service  of  4-inch,  50-caliber  case  gun. — 

(1)  Titles  and  stations  oj  gun  crew. — 
Title.  Station. 

Plugman  (gun  captain). .  .At  operating  lever. 

Pointer At  elevating  wheel. 

Trainer At  training  wheel. 

Sight  setter At  sight  mechanism. 

First  shellman Left  and  rear  of  breech. 


Third  shellman ;  Y^^'  °^  ^'^^  shellman 


Second  shellman  .  .  . 

Third  shellman 

Fourth  shellman Right  and  rear  of  breech. 

Note. — More  shellmen  may  be  required  if  the  ammunition  supply  is  difficult. 

(2)  Commands. — 

(a)  Stations! — At  this  command  the  crew  go  to  their  stations  pre- 
paratory to  loading  and  firing  the  gun. 

(6)  Load! — (The  gun  having  been  fired.) 

Pointer  and  trainer  keep  gun  on  target. 

Sight  setter  sets  sights  as  ordered  over  fire-control  system. 

Plugman  opens  breech  and  feels  face  of  plug  to  see  if  firing  pin  is 
housed. 

First  shellman  inserts  and  shoves  home  the  cartridge  case. 

Plugman  closes  breech  and  calls  out  "Ready!" 

Second  and  third  shellmen  provide  ammunition  to  first  shellman. 

Fourth  shellman  stands  by  to  remove  empty  case  after  gun  is 
fired. 

(c)  Commence  firing! — This  command  may  be  given  either  before 
or  after  the  gun  is  loaded.  If  it  is  given  before,  the  gun  will  be 
loaded  at  once.  The  firing  and  ser\dce  of  the  gun  are  started,  the 
pointer  firing  on  the  firing  signal,  or  when  on  the  target,  depending 
upon  the  nature  of  the  practice  being  conducted.  The  gun  is 
reloaded  as  soon  as  fired,  and  firing  continues  until  the  ammunition 
is  exhausted  or  until  the  command  ''Cease  Firing!" 

(d)  Cease  firing! — The  service  of  the  gun  is  stopped. 
If  the  gun  is  loaded,  the  plugman  opens  breech. 


PART   IV GUN    DRILLS.  61 

First  shellman  withdraws  loaded  cartridge  case. 

(e)  Unload! — This  command  will  be  given  only  after  the  gun  is 
loaded  and  before  the  command  "Commence  Firing!"  Procedure 
is  the  same  as  at  "Cease  Firing?" 

(/)  Secure! — The  members  of  the  crew,  under  the  super\'ision 
of  the  gun  captain,  return  everything  that  has  been  provided  and 
secure  the  gun.  If  the  gun  has  actually  been  fired,  the  crew  assist 
the  gunner's  mate  in  washing  out  and  oiling  the  bore.  The  crew 
fall  in  for  muster. 

453.  Service  of  6-inch,  61-caliber  bag  gun. — 

1.  Titles  and  stations  oj  gun  crew. — 

Title.  Station. 

1.  Plugman  (gun  captain). At  operating  lever. 

2.  Pointer At  elevating  wheel. 

3.  Trainer At  training  wheel. 

4.  Sight  setter At  sight  mechanism. 

5.  Trayman At  left  and  rear  of  breech, 

^    -p  /At  left  and  rear  of  first  shellman. 

6.  Kammerman \Commands  in  absence  of  gun  captain. 

7.  First  shellman Rear  of  breech  facing  to  right. 

8.  Second  shellman Rear  and  right  of  first  shellman. 

9.  First  powderman wear  of  breech  slightly  to  the  right. 

10.  Second  powderman At  left  of  first  powderman. 

11.  Powder  passer At  hoist  or  scuttle. 

2.  Commands. — In  the  service  of  the  gun  the  following  commands 
shall  be  used : 

(a)  Stations! — -At  this  command,  which  may  be  given  at  any  time 
or  in  any  formation,  the  crew  go  at  once  to  their  guns,  take  their 
respective  stations  preparatory  to  loading  and  firing  the  gun,  keep 
silence  and  await  further  commands.  The  gun  should  be  ready 
for  the  exercise  required  when  this  command  is  given. 

(5)  Loai!—T\iQ  crew  being  at  their  stations  go  through  the  opera- 
tions of  loading  the  gun. 

(c)  Train  on  {designate  target)! — Bearing  (give  relative  bearing  of 
target).  The  gun  will  be  trained  on  the  target.  Use  standard  point 
of  aim  unless  otherwise  ordered .     (Middle  of  target  at  the  water  line . ) 

{d)  Range. — (Give  range  in  yards.)  Scale. — (Give  reading  on 
deflection  scale.)    The  sight  will  be  set. 

(e)  Commence  firing! — This  may  be  given  either  before  or  after 
the  gun  is  loaded.  If  given  before,  the  gun  will  be  loaded  at  once. 
The  target,  range,  and  scale  having  been  designated,  the  firing  and 
service  of  the  gun  are  started.  The  pointer  will  fire  when  on  the 
target  pro\'ided  the  gun  is  ready,  sights  are  set,  and  a  firing  signal  is 


62  SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

sounding.  The  gun  will  be  reloaded  as  soon  as  fired.  The  firing 
will  continue  until  the  ammunition  is  exhausted  or  until  the  com- 
mand ' '  Cease  firing! ' ' 

(/)  Silence! — This  command  is  given  when,  for  any  reason,  it  is 
necessary  to  stop  the  service  of  the  gun.  It  may  be  given  by  the 
division  officer  or  by  any  member  of  the  crew  noticing  something 
requiring  immediate  attention.  When  it  is  given,  every  member 
of  the  crew  ceases  all  operations  and  awaits  instructions.  If  a  member 
of  the  crew  calls  out  '^Silence''  he  will  point  out  to  the  division  officer 
or  gun  captain,  what  he  has  observed. 

{g)  Carry  on! — After  the  command  ''Silence!  "  the  defect  ha\dng 
been  remedied,  this  command  is  given  by  the  gun  captain  at  which 
the  crew  resume  the  operation  in  which  they  are  engaged  when  the 
command  ''Silence!  "  was  given. 

(h)  Cease  firing! — The  ser\dce  of  the  gun  is  stopped.  The  gun 
captain  extracts  the  primer  and  examines  it  to  see  that  it  has  not 
been  fired.  Exposed  powder  charge  is  replaced  in  tank  and  cov- 
ered. 

(i)  Unload! — Gun  captain  extracts  primer  to  see  that  it  has  not 
been  fired.     The  folloAAdng  disposition  will  be  made  of  the  charge: 

IMMERSE    IN   DISTILLED   WATER. 

1.  (a)  If  primer  has  been  fired. 
(6)  If  there  has  been  a  misfire. 

(c)  If  gun  is  still  warm  and  no  attem])t  has  been  made  to  fire  it. 

2.  If  gun  is  cold  and  has  not  been  fired,  examine  charge  carefully. 
(a)  If  dry,  free  from  grease,  and  in  good  condition  put  in  tank  and 

send  back  to  magazine. 

(6)  If  slightly  greasy  repack  in  new  bag. 

(c)  If  grease  or  moisture  has  gotten  into  powder  immerse  in 
distilled  water. 

Shellman  back  out  and  remove  shell,  tray  being  inserted  to 
protect  screw  box. 

(j)  Secure. — At  this  command  the  ammunition  will  be  returned 
to  the  magazine,  spare  parts  returned  to  their  places,  necessary 
gear  stowed  away,  and  the  gun  secured. 

If  the  gun  has  been  fired,  as  soon  as  possible  after  the  firing  has 
ceased,  the  gun  should  be  thoroughly  washed  out,  dried  and  oiled. 
If  practicable  this  should  be  done  while  the  gun  is  still  hot. 

(k)  Fire  by  director. — Pointer  and  trainer  move  the  gun  to  follow 
the  pointers  in  the  elevating  and  training  instruments  which  are 
operated  from  the  directorscopes.  Firing  signals  are  rung.  Switch 
on  motor  generator.  On  the  firing  signal,  pointer  closes  his  firing 
key  if  his  pointers  are  together,  and  the  trainer  notifies  him  that  his 
pointers  are  together,  by  signal  light.    The  firing  circuit  is  com- 


PART    IV GUN    DRILLS.  63 

pleted  by  the  directorscope  o])erator  who  closes  the  master  key  when 
the  cross  wires  are  on  the  target.  Sights  are  set  to  the  proper  range 
and  scale  so  that  a  quick  change  can  be  made  to  pointer  fire. 

(l)  Pointer  fire — Master  key. — Pointer  and  trainer  keep  on  the 
target  by  using  sights,  disregarding  the  follow- the-pointer  system. 
Pointer  closes  firing  key  at  the  firing  signal  if  his  cross  wires  are  on 
the  point  of  aim  and  the  circuit  completed  by  the  master  key  in  the 
defense  station  on  the  buzzer.     Switch  on  motor  generator. 

(m)  Pointer  fire. — Switch  on  battery.  Pointer  and  trainer  keej) 
on  target  using  the  sights,  disregarding  the  follow  the  pointer.  Salvo 
signals  are  rung  from  the  group  control  station  and  pointer  closes 
his  firing  key  (firing  the  gun  on  the  buzzer),  if  his  cross  wires  are  on 
the  point  of  aim. 

3.  Duties  of  members  of  crew. — Gun  captains  will  see  that  members 
of  their  crew  read  these  instructions  and  understand  their  duties. 

The  duties  of  the  members  of  the  crew  are  as  follows: 

{a)  Gun  captain. — The  gun  captain  is  the  direct  representative  of 
ihe  battery  officer  and  is  in  absolute  charge  at  the  gun.  He  is 
responsible  for  the  conduct,  efficiency,  and  spirit  of  the  crew.  He 
will  be  often  detailed  to  conduct  drills  and  must  know  all  about  his 
gun,  the  duties  of  each  member  of  the  crew,  first  aid,  and  the  action 
needed  to  meet  all  casualties.  He  is  responsible  for  the  carrying 
out  of  all  safety  precautions  at  the  gun  and  will  report  immediately 
any  casualties  or  unusual  conditions  to  control  and  the  battery  officer. 

He  is  responsible  for  all  gear  at  the  guns  and  for  the  prompt  and 
accurate  execution  of  all  orders  received  from  control. 

He  sees  that  the  following  items  are  at  his  gun:  Combination 
sponge  and  rammer,  hand  rammer,  hand  sponge,  gun  and  safety 
rules,  tub  full  of  water,  and  first-aid  pouch.  All  of  these  are  kept 
at  the  gun  always,  but  the  gun  captain  is  to  be  responsible  for  their 
preservation  and  care.  The  gun  captain  and  crews  are  to  remove 
and  replace  gun  shutters  at  any  time  ordered,  to  remove  tompion, 
and,  after  drill  or  firing  ,to  swab  out  gun  if  necessary,  and  to  replace 
tompion  and  shutters.  Gun  tubs  are  to  be  swung  under  breech  of 
gun  when  gun  is  secured.  At  drill,  both  day  and  night,  he  is  to 
test  out  ammunition  hoist,  leaving  cover  open  during  exercise. 
He  sees  that  primer  belt  and  dummy  primers  are  at  the  gun,  or  if 
firing  get  live  primers  from  battery  officer.  For  drill,  he  sees  that 
drill  shell  and  drill  bag  in  tank  are  at  gun.  Sees  friction  disks 
uncovered  so  as  to  set  them  up  easily  if  they  slip,  and  a  large  wrench 
at  hand  for  that  purpose;  sees  battle  lantern  rigged;  sees  fire  hose 
led  out  by  traymen,  draws  circle  around  gun  for  recoil  (14  inches  for 
reduced  charge  and  18  inches  for  full  charge),  and  tests  the  firing 
circuit  on  both  generators  and  battery  with  test  lamp.  He  provides 
hand  sponge. 


64  SHIP   AND    GUN   DRILLS. 

Lens  paper  is  kept  close  at  hand  by  both  pointers  and  trainers  for 
use  in  case  lenses  become  blurred  from  sweat  during  the  firing.  As 
they  are  apt  to  forget  that  they  have  it  or  that  it  is  only  sweat  which 
is  affecting  their  telescope  during  the  firing,  and  not  the  telescope 
has  gone  wrong  (which  they  usually  think),  the  gun  captain  is  trained 
to  caution  them  to  wipe  off  their  lenses  the  minute  they  have  trouble. 

Eye  buffers  should  have  four  small  holes  near  the  lens  to  reduce 
the  formation  of  moisture  on  the  lens. 

The  standard  point  of  aim  is  the  center  of  target  at  water  line  unless 
another  point  of  aim  is  specifically  designated. 

Finally  the  gun  captain  upon  receiving  the  "Ready"  from  each 

member  of  his  crew,  orders  the  sight  setter  to  report  "Number 

ready"  over  the  voice  tube  to  control  officer. 

He  will  report  the  gun  ready  to  control  as  soon  as  sufficient  men 
are  present  to  serA^e  the  gun,  if  it  be  cast  loose.  He  give  the  orders 
to  the  crew  for  ser^dng  the  gun  and  requii'es  a  prompt  repetition  by 
sight  setters  of  all  orders  received  from  control.  He  inspects 
pointers'  and  trainers'  telescopes  to  see  that  they  are  set  on  the  same 
power  and  properly  focused.  He  sees  that  his  ammunition  supply 
is  adequate  and  that  powder  passers  do  not  allow  powder  to  pile 
up  at  the  gun. 

He  carries  primers  in  a  belt.  He  stands  close  to  gun  at  its  right 
rear,  operates  the  plug  with  his  right  hand,  and  primes  with  his  left 
hand.  On  opening  plug,  checks  swing  with  left  hand  to  prevent 
jaiTing  gun;  wipes  off  mushroom  with  wet  sponge  attached  to  wrist 
of  left  arm,  watches  salvo  latch,  to  see  when  gun  is  fired;  notes  return 
of  gun  to  battery  after  firing;  watches  firing  lock  when  he  closes 
plug  to  see  that  lock  is  fully  closed,  and  in  case  of  jam  takes  the 
action  required.  He  keeps  an  ear  open  for  the  buzzer  and  wastes 
no  time  to  ha^^e  its  failure  reported ;  also  keeps  sight  setter  constantly 
attentive. 

On  opening  plug  after  firing  he  sees  that  the  firet  shellman  inspects 
to  see  bore  clear  before  shell  is  loaded  and  that  the  powderman  loads 
charge  with  red  end  to  rear,  and  only  after  "Bore  clear"  has  been 
given.  When  gun  is  loaded  and  sights  set  gun  captain  sings  out 
' '  Ready. ' '  If  gun  is  loaded  and  a  change  of  range  or  scale  is  received 
gun  captain  sings  out  "Not  ready,  "  but  gives  "Ready"  when  sight 
setter  sings  out  "Set." 

In  any  case  of  casualty,  gives  command  "Silence,''  upon  which 
every  member  of  the  crew  stops  operations  and  awaits  instructions. 
When  casualty  is  remedied  the  gun  captain  commands  "  Carry  on,  " 
upon  which  service  of  the  piece  is  resumed. 

In  case  of  a  jam  where  primer  jams  in  primer  seat  and  prevents 
wedge  closing,  he  ejects  primer  with  considerable  force  and  reprimes. 

In  director  fire  in  case  gun  does  not  fire  on  the  salvo  signal  on 
which  the  pointer  calls  ''Fire"  or  when  the  master  key  is  closed,  a 


PART    IV GVN    DRILLS.  65 

misfire  exists,  wait  for  next  buzzer  and  try  again.  If  gun  misfires 
again  gun  captain  gives  command  ''Shijt  to  battery,  "  which  auto- 
matically changes  the  fire  to  pointer  fire — without  master  key. 

In  any  case  of  misfire  by  battery  gun,  captain  cocks  lock,  holding 
back  cocking  arm  of  hammer  with  left  hand,  and  sings  out  ''Ready 
percussion."     He  releases  the  hammer  when  pointer  calls  fire. 

If  gun  fires  by  percussion,  gun  captain  gives  command  ''Shift  to 
motor  generator,'^  and  again  tries  director  fire.  If  gun  again  misfires, 
shift  to  battery  or  percussion  as  required  and  report  to  control  that 
director  circuit  is  out  of  commission. 

If  gun  misfires  by  percussion,  gun  captain  sings  out  "Misfire, 
shift  primer,"  and  extracts  and  examines  the  primer. 

If  it  has  been  fired,  the  procedure  for  hangfire  shall  be  followed. 
Don't  open  breech. 

If  the  primer  has  not  fired,  gun  captain  gives  conmiand  "Shift  to 
motor  generator,''  and  sings  out  "Ready." 

In  case  of  hangfire  the  gun  captain  makes  repeated  attempts  to 
fire  the  gun,  feeding  primers  into  the  lock  as  required.  If  gun 
fails  to  fire,  the  plug  shall  not  be  opened  until  30  minutes  has  elapsed 
after  the  last  attempt  to  fire  the  gun.  Report  to  battery  and  control 
officer 

In  case  of  broken  powder  baq,  stop  firing  until  all  loose  grains  of 
powder  have  been  picked  up  from  around  gun  and  out  of  screw  box, 
and  dumped  into  tub  of  fresh  water,  and  until  screw  box  has  been 
washed  out  with  sponge  to  insure  the  removal  of  all  black  powder 
grains.     Gun  captain  wipes  out  screw  box  mth  hand  sponge. 

In  case  the  gun  fails  to  return  to  battery,  gives  command  "Cease 
firing"  and  carries  out  the  following  procedure.  Don't  load  the 
gun.  Depress  gun  as  far  as  possible.  Pointer  elevates  and  depresses 
quickly  with  a  jerky  motion  of  elevating  wheel;  trainer  trains  right 
and  left  in  same  manner;  gun  crew  endeavors  to  raise  gun  and  jar  it 
back  into  battery.     When  gun  returns  to  battery  resume  firing. 

Marks  should  be  fixed  or  painted  on  guns  to  indicate  to  gun  captain 
whether  or  not  the  gun  has  fully  returned  to  battery. 

In  case  sight  crosswires  are  out  of  adjustment  sees  that  pointer  trains 
on.  If  firing  then  proves  the  pointer' s  sight  to  be  out  sees  that  trainer 
sings  out  "On"  when  he  is  on  target  as  signal  for  pointer  to  fire. 

In  case  pointers  appear  to  have  trouble  seeing  target  clearly  gun 
captain  cautions  them  to  wipe  off  their  sights. 

In  case  of  broken  air  line  see  that  valve  imder  gun  is  shut,  and  that 
thereafter  in  loading  the  dampened  sponge  rammer  is  used  in  bore 
following  home  loaded  shell. 

In  case  of  dropped  shell,  he  stops  first  powderman  with  left  hand 
from  loading  in  powder  ahead  of  shell  in  case  latter  makes  the 
attempt. 


66  SHIP   AND    GUN   DRILLS. 

In  no  case  is  gun  captain  to  trip  salvo  latch  when  gun  is  loaded 
unless  he  gets  a  direct  order  to  unload,  from  proper  authority. 

At  drill  he  is  actually  to  prime  the  gun  with  dummy  primers  and 
must  be  given  regular  and  frequent  drills  in  this. 

Other  casualties  such  as  jammed  plug,  choked  vent,  and  burred 
screw  box  will  be  remedied  as  quickly  as  possible,  sending  for  a 
gunner's  mate  for  assistance  or  spare  parts. 

(6)  Pointer. — The  pointer  takes  station  on  the  left  Of  gun  on  plat- 
form; operates  elevating  wheel  to  keep  horizontal  wire  continuously 
on  the  point  of  aim,  or  following  the  pointer  in  the  elevating  receiver. 
\\Tien  necessary  he  coaches  trainer  to  keep  vertical  wire  on. 

In  preparing  for  exercise,  pointer  removes  sight  cap,  cleans  sights, 
removes  friction  disk  cover,  tests  elevating  gear,  examines  firing  cir- 
cuit, sees  firing  switch  on  motor  generator;  checks  cross  wires  with 
trainer,  and  reports  ''Ready"  to  gun  captain. 

He  fires  gun,  but  only  when  the  following  conditions  are  met: 
After  "  Commence  firing"  has  been  given  by  the  gun  captain,  sights 
reported  "Set"  by  sight  setter,  the  gun  reported  ready  by  gun  cap- 
.tain  after  loading,  with  cross  wires  steady  on  the  point  of  aim  or 
pointers  together  and  firing  signal  sounding  buzzer  or  whistle. 
Pie  calls  out  "Fire"  when  he  presses  firing  key.  He  must  be  sure 
to  press  down  hard  on  the  firing  key  and  hold  it  down  for  a  second. 
He  shall  also  be  sure  to  hold  the  cross  wire  steady  on  the  target  while 
in  the  act  of  firing.  If  using  director  or  master  key  fire,  he  closes  his 
key  on  firing  signal  if  the  pointers  are  together  and  the  trainers  signal 
light  is  on,  or  he  is  on  the  target. 

If  the  gun  fails  to  fire,  pointer  tries  again  on  next  buzzer,  if  gun 
misfires  again  shifts  transfer  switch  to  battery  at  once  and  next 
attempts  to  fire  by  battery — pointer  fire,  without  master  key. 

If  gun  fails  to  fire  by  battery  he  calls  out ' '  Misfire  "  and  listens  for 
gun  captain  to  report  "Beady  percussion.'' 

When  pointer  is  again  ready  to  fire,  after  report  "Ready  percussion  " 
and  when  firing  signal  is  sounding,  he  calls  out ' '  Fire. ' ' 

If  gun  fires  he  next  attempts  to  fire  by  motor  generator,  if  director 
or  master  key  fire  is  being  used. 

In  case  gun  misfires  by  motor  generator  and  battery,  use  percus- 
sion firing  thereafter. 

In  case  gun  does  not  fire  by  percussion  on  first  attempt,  pointer 
shifts  transfer  switch  on  gun  captain's  order  and  next  tries  by  motar 
generator  in  the  usual  way.     Gun  captain  will  reprime. 

In  case  of  hangfire  he  keeps  gun  pointed  clear  of  other  ships. 

In  a  case  of  blurred  sight,  cleans  with  lens  paper  and  refocuses 
telescope. 

In  case  sight  cross  wires  jar  out  of  adjustment  he  informs  gun  captain 
by  singing  out  "Cross  ivires  out.''  This  will  be  apparent  if  much 
coaching  is  required  to  get  trainer  on. 


PART   IV GUN    DRILLS.  67 

If  it  is  apparent  from  firing  that  pointer's  sight  is  WTong  (which  he 
can  tell  by  spotting  his  own  shot),  or  if  sight  is  destroyed,  he  sings 
out  "  Trainer  fire.'' ^ 

Thereafter  pointer  elevates  as  trainer  directs,  and  presses  firing 
key  when  trainer  sings  out  "  Frre,^'  if  firing  signal  is  sounding. 

If  he  can  not  see  the  target,  he  reports  the  fact  and  when  directed 
to  do  so,  aims  at  the  horizon.  For  pointer  fire  buzzer  will  be  rung 
3  seconds  off  and  3  seconds  on  except  when  ranges  are  being  sent  to 
guns  (same  for  master-key  firing).  For  director  fire  stand-by  buzzers 
will  be  rung  before  the  director  rolls  on. 

(c)  Trainer. — The  trainer  takes  station  on  right  side  of  gun  on 
platform;  operates  training  wheel  to  keep  vertical  wire  continuously 
on  point  of  aim  as  directed  by  pointer  or  to  follow  the  pointer  in  the 
training  receiver.  In  director  fire  he  closes  key  when  pointers  are 
matched;  this  indicates  to  pointer  that  red  and  white  pointers  are 
together. 

In  preparing  for  exercise  he  turns  air  on  gas  ejector;  removes 
sight  cap;  cleans  sights,  tests  training  gear,  checks  cross  wires  with 
pointer;  reports  "Ready"  to  gun  captain  and  trains  on  designated 
bearing  or  target. 

If  none  is  designated  trains  gun  to  center  of  arc. 

In  case  of  "hangfire,'^  keeps  gun  trained  clear  of  other  ships. 

In  case  of  "Marred  sight,"  cleans  with  lens  paper  and  refocuses 
telescope. 

In  case  of  casualty  to  the  pointer's  sight,  at  pointer  fire,  and  order 
is  given  "  Trainer  fire,''  he  keeps  vertical  wire  on,  coaches  pointer  to 
keep  horizontal  wire  on,  and  sings  out  ''Fire"  when  cross  wires  are 
steady  on  the  point  of  aim. 

If  he  can  not  see  the  target,  he  reports  the  fact  and  trains  on 
bearings  sent  from  control. 

(d)  Sight  setter. — The  sight  setter  takes  station  at  sight  scales, 
standing  erect,  feet  apart,  with  left  ear  close  to  voice  tube;  sets 
sights  and  transmits  all  communications  between  gun  captain  and 
control. 

In  preparing  for  exercise,  he  provides  and  connects  telephone, 
loosens  up  dogs  on  telephones  trunk  when  ordered,  and  tests  com- 
munication with  control.  Tests  voice  tube  to  control.  He  turns 
on  sight  lights,  checks  zero  of  range  dial  and  sword  arm,  tests  sight 
mechanism  by  setting  range  5,000  and  then  back  to  zero,  and  running 
deflection  drum  from  40  to  60,  than  back  to  50. 

Passes  on  to  gun  captain  all  orders  received  from  control.  If  any 
order  is  not  clearly  understood  by  sight  setter  he  calls  "Repeat" 
over  voice  tube  (or  telephone). 

Sets  ranges  and  scales  as  received  from  control,  ranges  first,  repeat- 
ing them  to  gun  captain,  reporting  "Set"  and  touching  pointer 

7431°— 23 6 


68  SHIP    AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

lightly  at  the  same  time  when  sights  have  been  set.  Examines 
sight  drums  after  each  shot  and  if  they  have  jammed  resets  them. 

During  firing,  should  twice  regular  firing  interval  elapse  without 

any  firing  signal  reaching  him,  sings  out  "No  buzzer  on  gun  No " 

and  makes  sure  he  has  been  heard  by  requiring  acknowledgement. 
The  sight  setter  will  be  particularly  careful  to  set  the  range  and 
deflection  by  coming  up  to  the  mark  and  stopping  on  the  mark. 
Should  he  revolve  the  dial  or  scale  beyond  the  correct  range  or 
deflection  mark,  he  will  turn  back  beyond  the  marks  one  unit  and 
again  approach  the  correct  marks,  setting  properly.  To  always  set 
sights  accurately  from  the  same  direction  requires  practice,  and 
makes  all  the  difference  between  a  good  and  a  poor  sight  setter. 

(e)  Trayman. — The  trayman  operates  loading  tray  to  protect  screw 
box  and  operates  gas  ejector  valve. 

In  preparing  for  exercise,  he  provides  loading  tray,  primer  belt, 
first-aid  packet,  and  assists  in  removing  tampion. 

He  stands  to  left  and  rear  of  breech,  holding  tray  with  right  hand 
on  upper  handle;  tray  parallel  to  axis  of  gun  and  clear  of  gun  recoil. 
It  is  important  that  tray  be  held  parallel  to  axis  of  gun  and  put  in  line 
with  axis  before  shoving  in. 

As  soon  as  the  plug  is  open  for  loading,  he  inserts  tray  and  shuts 
off  air  with  right  hand  when  shell  is  seated.  He  removes  tray 
quickly  as  soon  as  powder  is  shoved  home,  by  withdrawing  it  to  the 
rear  and  downward  without  side  pull. 

\^^en  unloading,  after  powder  is  withdrawn,  inserts  tray  before 
shell  is  withdrawn. 

In  case  of  lock  jam,  he  calls  out  "Silence''^  and  announces  ''Lock 
ja7n." 

In  case  of  broken  air  line,  keeps  end  of  hose  from  whipping  around. 

In  case  of  broken  powder  bag,  assists  in  removing  grains  of  powder 
from  screw  box. 

(/)  Rammerman.—lji  absence  of  gun  captain  acts  in  his  place. 
Operates  combination  sponge  and  rammer  in  case  of  foul  bore  or  air 
line  broken. 

In  preparing  for  exercise,  provides  rammer,  combination  sponge 
and  rammer,  and  gun  safety  rules. 

He  stands  to  the  right  of  first  shellman  and  close  to  him,  facing 
breech,  left  foot  forward.  Holds  rammer  against  base  of  shell,  when 
shell  is  entered  in  chamber  seats  same  with  rammer,  makes  way 
quickly  for  powderman. 

In  case  oifoul  bore  or  air  line  broken,  dips  combination  sponge  and 
rammer  in  gun  tub,  rams  shell  home,  with di-awing  sponge  with  spiral 
motion  which  sponges  chamber  and  mushroom. 

He  keeps  careful  watch  for  lock  jams  and  in  case  of  one  sings  out 
' ' Silence, "  " Lock  jam. ' ' 

(g)  First  shellman. — Loads  shell  in  gun. 


PART    IV GUN    DRILLS.  69 

In  preparing  for  exercise  he  provides  loaders'  gloves,  assists  in 
filling  gum  tub  and  drinking-water  bucket. 

He  stands  in  rear  of  breech,  facing  to  the  right,  as  close  to  gun  as 
safety  will  permit,  wears  glove  on  right  hand  and  holds  shell  point 
forward,  directly  in  rear  and  parallel  to  bore.  Observes  when  plug 
is  opened  to  see  if  any  smoke,  fumes,  burning  or  solid  objects  are  left 
in  chamber  of  bore  after  firing.  If  clear,  announces  ''Bore  clear^^  in 
a  loud  voice.  If  not  clear,  he  announces  ''Foul  hore,''  loads  shell 
and  blocks  powderman  clear  of  gun. 

The  shell  is  held  in  left  hand,  supported  midway  between  point 
and  rotating  hand,  with  shellman's  right  palm  near  the  base.  First 
ehellman  enters  shell  in  chamber  and  avoids  striking  tray.  Makes 
way  very  quickly  for  powderman.     In  unloading  takes  out  shell. 

In  case  he  notices  a  lock  jam,  he  calls  out  "Silence.'' 

In  case  tray  is  not  fully  in,  he  holds  up  load  until  tray  is  fully 
inserted,  so  as  to  prevent  burring  screw  box. 

In  case  he  drops  a  shell  he  lets  it  lie  and  takes  next  one  from  second 
shellman. 

(h)  Second  shellman. — Keeps  first  shellman  supplied  with  shells. 
Holds  shell  with  both  hands  around  the  middle  when  handing  shell 
to  first  shellman. 

He  stands  to  rear  and  right  of  rammerman. 

In  case  first  shellman  drops  a  shell,  the  second  shellman  shall  imme- 
diately hand  him  another,  then  pick  up  dropped  shell,  keeping  clear 
of  possible  recoil  of  gun. 

Note. — The  service  of  the  6-inch,  51  caliber  bag  gun  is  the  same  as  the  5-inch,  51 
caliber  bag  gun. 

(i)  First  powderman. — The  first  powderman  loads  the  powder  in 
the  gun. 

In  preparing  the  battery  for  exercise,  assists  first  shellman  in  filling 
gun  tub,  and  buckets  of  drinking  water.  Wears  loading  glove, 
provided  by  first  shellman,  on  left  hand. 

Stands  in  rear  breech,  facing  first  shellman  and  just  to  right  of 
axis  of  bore  produced.  He  must  be  clear  of  first  shellman  and  gun 
recoil.  Powderman  braces  himself  firmly  with  feet  well  apart  and 
with  body  turned  slightly  so  it  is  between  charge  he  holds  and  the 
breech. 

Holds  powder  bag  against  his  body,  red  end  in  left  hand,  right 
hand  near  middle.  As  shell  is  loaded  powderman  shifts  weight  to 
right  foot,  swings  his  body  to  right,  carrying  powder  bag  forward, 
inserts  l)ag  closely  following  the  withdrawal  of  rammer,  and  pushes 
with  left  fist.  He  must  be  fast  in  removing  his  arm  from  powder 
chamber. 

In  unloading  withdraws  powder  charge  and  passes  it  to  second 
powderman. 


70  SHIP    AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

In  case  of  foul  bore  he  instantly  turns  his  l^ack  to  breech  fully- 
protecting  charge  with  l)ody,  and  jumps  well  clear  with  powder  bag 
till  his  gun  has  been  sponged  out. 

When  plug  is  closed  he  observes  lock,  to  note  a  jam,  in  which  he 
calls  '^ Silence"  and  announces  '' Lock  jam.'^ 

In  case  of  brolen  powder  bag,  calls  ''Silence,'^  "Broken  powder  bag," 
and  immerses  l^ag  in  gun  tub,  and  picks  up  all  loose  grains  and  im- 
merses them.  He  must  be  constantly  on  the  alert  for  a  dropped  shell 
so  as  not  to  load  powder  in  ahead  of  shell. 

(j)  Second  powderman. — He  keeps  first  powderman  supplied  with 
powder. 

In  preparing  for  exercise,  he  provides  powder  can  wrench,  and 
assists  in  getting  up  ammunition  as  ordered. 

Arranges  powder  tanks,  standing  them  upright  to  rear  and  right  of 
gun;  stands  to  left  and  rear  of  first  powderman. 

WTien  "Bore  clear"  is  called,  he  removes  cover  from  next  powder 
tank  and  when  the  charge,  already  in  the  first  powderman's  hands, 
is  shoved  into  the  gun,  he  pulls  next  charge  out  of  tank  and  hands  it 
to  first  powderman,  red  end  to  rear. 

When  unloading,  receives  charge  withdrawn  by  first  powderman 
and  returns  it  to  tank. 

In  case  oifoul  bore  keeps  all  powder  cans  closed,  and  gets  them  well 
clear  of  the  gim. 

In  case  of  broken  powder  bag,  sings  out  "Silence,"  and  immerses 
broken  bag  in  gun  tub,  and  picks  up  all  loose  grains  and  immerses 
them. 

In  case  of  broken  air  line,  shuts  air  line  under  gun. 

{k)  Powder  /Josser.— Tends  the  powder  hoist  or  scuttle  and  supplies 
powder  and  shell  to  the  second  powderman  and  second  shellman  as 
required. 

In  preparing  for  the  exercise,  he  opens  powder  hoist,  tests  flame 
proof  flap,  and  establishes  communications  ^^dth  the  ammunition 
crew. 

He  stands  by  his  hoist,  receives  the  tank  and  shell  as  they  come 
up  and  places  them  in  a  convenient  place  on  deck  for  the  second 
powderman  and  second  shellman.  He  gives  orders  ammunition 
crew  for  sending  up  powder,  regulating  the  powder  supply  to  the 
rate  of  fire  and  preventing  the  piling  up  of  powder  around  the  gun. 

When  going  into  reserve,  he  closes  hoist  and  sets  up  on  one  dog. 
In  case  hoist  breaks  down  he  secures  powder  from  the  adjacent  hoist. 


PART    IV GUN    DRILLS. 

TURRET  DRILLS. 
454.  Service  of  12-iiich  46-caliber  gun. 
Type  "Florida." 
Stations  and  duties  in  brief. 


71 


Title. 


Station . 


Duty. 


(a)    Turret  crew 

Turret  oflBcer 

Turret  captain... 

Turret  talker 


Officer's  booth 

In  or  near  officer's 
booth. 

Officer's  booth 


In  general  charge. 

See  turret  ready  for  firing;  complete  check- 
offl  ist ;  provide  spare  parts;  general  super- 
vision under  turret  officers. 

On  phones  2JD  or  2JE. 


POINTERS  GROUP. 


Right  pointer  (ele- 
vating pointer). 


Left  pointer  (firing 
pointer). 


Trainer. 


Right  sight  setter. 

Left  sight  setter. . . 
Train's  sight  setter. 


Right     elevating 
wheel. 


Left    elevatiu] 
wheel . 


Trainer's  booth. 


Right    sight   set- 
ter's station. 

Left  sight  setter's 

station . 
Trainer's  booth . . . 


Provide  lens  paper;  remove  dust  caps; 
wipe  off  lens. 

In  director  fire.— l^ay  guns;  wear  IJE  or  IJD 
phone;  turn  on  ready  light  when  guns 
are  laid. 

In  pointer  fire. — Shift  to  two-hand  drive 
and  keep  horizontal  wire  on  the  point 
of  aim. 

In  firing  single  barrel.—Fire  when  salvo 
signal  rings  and  cross  wires  are  on  target. 

Same  as  right  and  in  addition,  in  firing 
double  barrel,  fire  when  salvo  signal 
rings  and  cross  wires  are  on  the  target. 

Provide  lens  paper;  remove  dust  cap; 
wipe  off  lens;  keep  vertical  wire  on  target; 
in  director  fire  keep  pointers  together  in 
following  the  pointer  in  train:  cut  out 
firing  circuit  when  off  the  target. 

Test  sight  setting  gear;  wear  IJE  or  IJD 
phone;  set  all  ranges  and  deflections  re- 
ceived and  check  with  visuals. 

Same  as  right  sight  setter. 

Test  gear;  wear  IJD  or  IJE  phone;  receive 
and  set  deflection. 


72 


SHIP   AND   GUN    DRILLS. 


Stations  and  duties  in  brief. 

LOADING  GROUP. 

(Right  side — Left  side  same.) 


Title. 


Station . 


Duty. 


Gun  captain. 


Hoist  and  Ram- 
merman  (may 
also  be  gun  cap- 
tain.) 

Plugman 


Trayman. 


Carman 

(b)  Upper  handling 
room  {right  side 
and  left  side  same) 

Signalman 

Hoistman 

SheUman 

Powder  man 

(c)  Circle  deck  (elec- 
trical deck). 

Turret  electrician.. 

(d)  Lower  handling 
room. 

Junior  officer 


Gun  compartment 
in  charge. 


At  hoist  and  ram- 
mer controller. 


At  gun-plug  oper- 
ating lever. 

Trayman's  plat- 
form. 


Rear  end  of  car. 


hoist 
In 


At   signal 

to    turret 

charge . 
At  hoist  controller; 

fori  ower  car. 
Alongside   shell 

tray 

Alongside  powder 

table. 


Electrical  deck... 


Handling  room.. 


See  air  on  gun;  test  breech  mechanism;  see 
tompion  out,  primer  vent  clean,  and 
spare  parts  at  hand;  supervise  loading 
gun;  repeat  orders  from  turret  officer. 

Test  gear;  hoist  upper  car;  ram  shell  and 
powder;  lower  car. 


Provide  primers;  open  plug;  prime;  close 
plug;  turn  on  loading  ready  light. 

See  bore  and  service  box  clear;  report; 
place  tray  in  gun;  wipe  off  mushroom; 
turn  off  air  when  shell  is  seated;  shove  in 
first  two  powder  bags;  steady  second  two 
bags  to  be  rammed  in;  remove  tray. 

Dump  powder  into  car  tray  in  line  with 
bore  in  front  of  rammer. 


Test  signal  gear;  put  powder  bags  in  upper 
car;  put  signal  ''Hoist"  on  indicator  and 
turn  on  safety  switch  when  car  is  loaded. 

Test  gear;  hoist  car  from  lower  handling 
room  when  indicator  signal  is  on  "Hoist." 

Ram  shell  into  upper  car;  notifies  signal- 
man when  car  is  loaded. 

Put  powder  in  upper  car  when  car  is  low- 
ered. 


See  electrical  gear  working;  carry  out  in- 
structions of  tiu-ret  officer. 


In  general  charge;  see  hose  led  out;  immer- 
sion tanks  fiUed;  safety  precautions  car- 
ried out;  tongs  and  trolley  in  working  or- 
der; see  powder  and  shell  properly  placed 
for  handhng  as  instructed  by  turret 
officer. 


PART    IV GUN    DRILLS. 


73 


Stations  and  duties  in  brief — Continued. 

LOADING  GROUP— Continued. 


Title. 

Station. 

Duty. 

Eight  side  {left  side 

same,  except  only 

one  talker  and  one 

gunner's  mate  in 
lower  handling 

room). 

Signalman 

At  signal  indicator 
to    upper    han- 

In charge  right  side;  test  indicators;  see 

bags  put  in  car,  red  end  aft;  put  on  signal 

dling  room. 

for  hoist  when  car  is  loaded. 

Four  outside  shell- 

Man    trolleys    in 

Receive  shells  from  inside  shellman;  land 

men. 

handling  room. 

on  shell  table  and  load  in  lower  car  as 
needed. 

Three  inside  sheU- 

In  sheU  rooms 

Place  tongs  on  shells  and  sUng  them  ready 

men. 

for  coming  out  of  shell  rooms. 

Four  outside  pow- 

In  handling  room. . 

Receive  powder  from  magazines  through 

dermen. 

scuttlein  door  andloadlower  car. 

Four  inside  pow- 

In  magazines 

Remove  powder   from   tanks   and   pass 

dermen. 

through  powder  scuttles  in  door. 

Talker 

Voice  tube  to  tur- 
ret. 

Transmit  orders  from  turret  officer. 

In  charge  of  magazines. 

Loading  drill. 


Commands. 


Procedure. 


"Stations" 

"Load"   (the  gun 
havingbeen  fired) 

Turret  captain 

Gun  captain 

Trainer 

Elevating  pointer. . 

Plugman 

Trajrman 


Signalman     upper 
handling  room. 


The  turret  being  manned,  the  crew  take  stations,  maintain 
silence,  and  be  prepared  for  the  command  "load." 


Repeat  order. 
Do. 

Keep  vertical  wire  on  point  of  aim  or  in  foUow  the  pointer,  keep 
the  red  and  white  pointers  together. 

Depress  guns  to  loading  position  (about  2°  elevation);  turn 
off  gun-laying  ready  Ught. 

Turn  off  ready  Ught;  open  breech,  insert  new  primer,  close 
plug  when  gun  is  loaded. 

Look  through  bore,  wipe  ofE  mushroom,  call  "Foul  bore"  or 
"Bore  clear."  If  foul  bore,  wait  for  bore  to  clear  if  air  is  on 
main  Une,  if  not,  use  auxihary  air  Une.  If  no  air  is  on  wipe 
out  powder  chamber  with  wet  swab.  See  screw  box  clear 
of  splinters  of  unburned  powder;  put  in  tray;  cut  off  air. 

Put  signal  "hoist"  on  indicator  and  turn  on  safety  switch  when 

'  car  is  loaded,  and  all  is  clear;  when  car  is  hoisted  signal 
"lower." 


SHIP   AND   GUN    DRILLS. 

Loading  drill — Continued. 


Commands. 


Procedure . 


Hoist  and  rammer- 
man. 
Carman 

Trayman 

Carman 

Trayman 

Hammerman 

Trayman 

Hoist  and  rammer- 
man. 

Plugman 

Elevating  pointer. 

Hoistman     (lower 

car). 
Shellman 

Powderman 

Signalman 

Electrician 


Inside  shellmen 

Outside  shellmen. . . 
Inside  powdermen. 

Outside      powder- 
men. 
Signalman 


Hoist  car  when  plug  is  open  and  bore  reported  clear;  ram  and 

seat  shell;  withdraw  ranmier. 
Dump  first  two  bags  whem  rammer  has  been  returned  and  hold 

dumping  handle  up. 
See  first  two  bags  ready,  bags  not  cock  billed,  red  ends  to  rear, 

then  ram  in  by  hand. 
Dump  last  two  bags. 
See  bags  clear  for  ramming,  as  above. 

Ram  last  two  bags  just  inside  gas  check  seat;  withdraw  rammer. 
Remove  tray. 
I-owercar. 

Close  breech;  turn  on  ready  light. 

Lay  guns;  in  director  fire  turn  on  gun-laying  ready  Ughts. 

UPPER  HANDLING  ROOM. 

When  signal  comes  from   lower  handhng  room  to  "hoist," 

hoist  lower  car  when  upper  car  is  on  buffers,  empty. 
See  that  shell  is  clear  when  it  comes  out  of  lower  car,  shove  sheU 

in  upper  car  and  notify  signalman  when  car  is  clear  for 

hoisting. 
SUde  first  two  bags  to  signalman,  who  places  them  in  car. 

Pass  two  last  bags  in  front  of  upper  car. 
Place  last  two  bags  in  upper  car  and  when  all  is  clear  signal 

"hoist." 

ELECTRICAL  DECK. 

Observe  aU  switches  and  note  and  report  to  turret  officer  any 
gear  not  working  properly. 

LOWER  HANDLING  ROOM. 

Put  tongs  on  shells  and  shngs  them  ready  to  pass  into  handling 

room. 
Run  shells  on  to  table  and  into  cars. 
Remove  covers  from  powder  tanks,  pass  powder  into  lower 

handhng  room  through  flap  doors. 
Receive  powder  from  inside  powdermen  through  scuttle  in 

magazine  door,  place  in  car. 
When  car  is  loaded,  turn  on  safety  switch  and  signal  "hoist'' 

to  upper  handhng  rooms. 


Note.— Completeness,  accuracy,  and  time  of  load  are  to  be  developed  in  drill. 
455.  Service  of  14-inch.,  50-caliber  gun. 

THREE-GUN   TURRET. 

Turret  officer. — The  turret  officer  is  stationed  at  left  periscope  and 
is  in  charge  of  the  efficient  service  of  his  turret. 


PART    IV GUN    DRILLS.  75 

At  general  quarters  lie  reports  to  control  by  turning  on  "Ready 

light"'  when  turret  is  completely  manned  and  ready  in  all  respects. 

He  acknowledges  all  messages  from  control  by  blinking  "Ready 

On  receiving  order  to  "Commence  firing"  the  signal  is  given  to 
all  stations  over  voice  tubes.  When  guns  are  loaded  the  order 
"Target"  is  given  to  elevating  pointer,  and  when  guns  are  elevated 
or  "Set,"  the  "Ready  light"  to  control  is  turned  on  showing  the 
turret  is  ready  to  fire. 

Care  shall  be  taken  to  see  that  the  proper  firing  switches  are  closed 
to  the  guns  that  are  to  fire.     Misfires  are  to  be  avoided. 

The  turret  officer  is  a  member  of  the  fire-control  party  and  will 
keep  the  control  officer  informed  of  all  interruptions  of  fire  and  shall 
give  all  information  that  may  be  of  value  in  the  handling  of  the 
ship's  batteries. 

In  the  absence  of  the  turret  officer  his  duties  are  taken  over  in 
sequence  by  the  turret  junior  officer,  turret  captain,  and  turret 
gunner's  mates. 

DUTIES   OF   CREW. 

TURRET    officer's    BOOTH   AND   TURRET    CHAMBER. 

Turret  captain. — ^The  turret  captain  is  the  assistant  to  the  turret 
ofl&cer.  His  station  is  at  right  periscope,  but  he  goes  to  any  place 
in  the  turret  where  his  presence  is  needed.  Before  battle  he  will 
issue  six  boxes  of  primers  to  all  gun  captains,  who  will  retain  one 
box  and  serve  out  the  others  to  his  primermen.  He  must  be  familiar 
with  turret  procedure  and  with  each  man's  duties;  he  must  be  able  to 
conduct  all  drills  when  necessary.  He  must  know  thoroughly  all 
gear  in  the  turret;  must  acquaint  himself  with  the  history  of  the 
turret;  must  know  and  keep  record  of  all  casualties  that  have  ever 
occurred  in  the  turret,  and  must  be  able  to  direct  the  gunner's 
mates  and  strikers  in  upkeep  and  repairs.  He  will  see  that  the 
turret  routine  is  carried  out  and  will  never  disable  the  turret  for 
repairs  without  orders  from  the  turret  officer.  He  will  keep  the 
turret  log  and  submit  it  weekly  to  the  turret  officer  on  Fridays  not 
later  than  4  p.m.  He  must  be  able  to  prepare  the  turret  for  use,  and 
will  see  that  the  guns  are  always  ready  to  fire.  He  must  be  able  to 
bore  sight.  He  must  be  familiar  with  the  fire-control  installation 
and  procedure,  and  must  be  able  to  take  full  charge  of  the  turret 
when  operating  under  local  control.  In  case  of  fire  in  turret,  opens 
all  emergency  sprinkling  valves  and  pull  "Silence  bell"  cord. 

Messenger. — ISfans  JD^  (JEO  phone  and  repeats  all  orders  received 
to  the  turret  officer;  keeps  account  of  all  shots  fired.  He  must  be 
thoroughly  familiar  with  all  terms  and  orders  that  are  likely  to  be 
used  and  will  make  every  effort  to  keep  the  turret  officer  and  cliief 


76  SHIP   AND   GUN    DRILLS. 

fire-control  officer  informed  of  all  that  occurs.  When  the  turret  is 
operating  under  local  control  he  will  ring  the  salvo  bells  and  buzzers. 
His  station  is  in  the  center  of  the  booth: 

Gun  captains. — The  gun  captain  is  in  direct  charge  of  all  the  oper- 
ations of  loading  his  gun  and  is  in  command  of  his  gun's  crew.  He 
is  responsible  for  the  conduct,  efficiency,  and  spirit  of  the  crew  who 
must  be  made  to  realize  that  he  is  the  dii*ect  representative  of  the 
turret  officer  and,  under  the  turret  captain,  in  absolute  charge  of  his 
own  gun.  He  must  thoroughly  understand  the  duties  of  each  mem- 
ber of  his  crew,  must  be  able  to  instruct  new  men,  and  must  know 
what  action  to  take  in  case  of  any  casualties.  On  manning  the  gun 
he  reports  to  the  tmret  officer  when  able  to  load,  and  will  at  the  same 
time  report  absentees  and  request  detail  of  extra  men. 

A'o.  1  gun  captain  {right  gun). — After  each  shot  inspect  screw  box 
and  gas  check  seat  and  sponges  mushroom,  inspects  bore,  and  reports 
"Bore  clear"  or  "Foul  bore."  Places  loading  tray  in  screw  box; 
when  shell  is  rammed  and  rammer  drawn  back  receives  fu'st  two 
bags  of  powder  on  tray,  and  rams  them  in  gun  clear  of  screw  box; 
receives  the  last  two  bags  on  tray,  making  sure  the  red  ends  are  aft; 
when  the  charge  is  rammed  home  removes  tray,  taking  care  that  tray 
does  not  strike  plug;  opens  breech- closing  valve  and  touches  plug 
handle  to  close  plug.  When  plug  is  closed  and  locked,  steps  off 
platform  onto  shelf  plate  and  tm-ns  on  "Ready  light."  Turns  off 
"Ready  light "  when  gun  has  been  fired.  In  case  no  air,  closes  plug 
by  hand.  Pro\ddes  himself  with  spare  primers  and  in  case  of  mis- 
fire reprimes  from  shelf  plate,  using  tool  pro\ided.  If  rammer  is 
out  of  commission,  assists  in  ramming  shell  by  hand,  and  ramming 
powder  by  hand,  one  bag  at  a  time.  If  powder  hoists  are  out  of 
commission,  receives  bags  from  man  under  gun,  places  them  on  tray, 
and  rams  them  by  hand. 

No.  2  gun  captain  (center  gun). — Same  duties  as  No.  1. 

No.  S  gun  captain  {left  gun). — Same  duties  as  No.  1. 

Powder  hoistmen  4,  5,  6. — No.  4  operates  right  hoist  control,  hoist- 
ing car  when  hoist  signal  is  on  "Hoist"  and  gun  captain  signals 
"Bore  clear."  When  car  is  up,  puts  control  wheel  on  "Neutral"; 
when  rammer  is  clear  trips  tray  allowing  first  two  bags  to  roll  into 
loading  tray,  releases  bottom  tray,  trips  top  tray,  releases  top  tray, 
trips  bottom  tray;  when  last  two  bags  are  in  loading  tray  releases 
bottom  tray,  steps  on  car-latch  lever  and  lowers  car.  Rammer  out 
of  commission:  Assists  in  ramming  shell  by  hand.  Powder  hoist 
out  of  commission:  Assists  plugman  in  remo\dng  car  cover,  takes 
station  in  hoist  trunk  on  top  of  car,  receives  bags  through  powder 
passing  door  from  upper  powder  handling  room  and  passes  to  man 
under  gun. 

No.  5  powder  hoistman. — Operates  hoist  of  center  gun.  Duties 
same  as  No.  4. 


PART    IV GUN    DRILLS.  77 

No.  6  powder  hoistman. — Operates  hoist  of  left  gun.  Duties  same 
as  No.  4. 

Rammer  men  7, 8,  9. — The  rammer  men  operate  the  powder  rammer 
and  assist  with  the  hand  rammer  if  necessary,  taking  the  latter  from 
its  storage  place  and  getting  it  behind  shell.  No.  7  operates  right 
rammer  and  right  rammer-motor  controller.  No.  9  operates  left 
rammer  controller.  In  case  one  rammer  motor  breaks  down,  shift 
to  other  motor.  No.  7  and  No.  9  operate  the  controllers,  and  gun- 
ner's mates  for  right  and  left  guns  sMft  clutches  as  necessary.  Ram 
shell  when  tray  is  entered  and  ' '  Bore  clear  "  is  given.  When  shell  is 
rammed  home  withdraw  rammer  to  rear  end  of  spanning  tray,  ram 
powder  when  last  two  bags  are  in  tray,  ramming  charge  just  inside 
of  gas  check  seat;  withdraw  rammer  and  signal  for  transfer  tray  to  be 
lowered.  When  tray  is  lowered  roll  shell  from  transfer  tray  into 
rammer  tray.  Shell  must  invariably  be  seated  hard,  but  powder 
will  be  rammed  just  inside  of  gas  check  seat,  care  being  used  not  to 
strike  the  bags  against  the  shell  with  too  much  force.  Shell  shall  not 
be  rammed  with  powder  charge  interposed  between  base  of  shell 
and  head  of  rammer. 

No.  8  Rammer  man  (center  gun). — Duties  same  as  No.  7  except  he 
does  not  handle  rammer  motor  controller. 

No.  9  Rammer  man  (left  gun). — Duties  same  as  No.  7. 

Transfer  tray  men  10,  11,  12. — No.  10,  11,  and  12,  in  rear  of  shell 
table;  operates  transfer  tray  latch,  lowering  or  raising  transfer  tra> 
on  signal  from  rammer  man ;  assists  in  rolling  shell  on  table.  Rammer 
out  of  commission,  assists  with  hand  rammer. 

Shellmen  13,  14,  15. — Gunner's  mates  stationed  in  rear  of  each  gun 
to  watch  operation  of  all  gear  and  shift  clutches.  Operates  shell 
shutter  in  right  and  left  gun  chambers  and  roll  shell  to  center  gun. 

Shellmen  16,  17. — At  auxiliary  shell  hoist.  Assist  where  needed 
in  turret.  In  case  of  breakdown  of  shell  hoist,  man  tackle  for 
hoisting  shell  through  tube  hoist. 

Cradle  men  18, 19. — No.  18  operates  shell  cradle  for  right  shell  hoist, 
dumping  shell  as  required.  If  right  shell  joist  is  out  of  commission, 
mans  the  right  auxiliary  hoist  drum,  hoisting  shell  by  auxiliary 
hoist.  If  all  power  off  tun-et.  mans  Mark  XII  shell  hoist.  Right 
rammer  out  of  commission,  assists  in  ramming  shell  by  hand.  Mans 
voice  tube  to  shell- handling  room. 

No.  19  cradlemen  (left  gun). — Duties  same  as  No.  18  except  they 
are  for  left  gun. 

Plugman  20,  21,  22. — No.  20  plugman,  right  gun:  Under  breech  of 
gun,  opens  plug,  locks  plug  in  open  position,  primes,  unlocks  plug 
when  tray  is  removed,  and  stands  clear  of  recoil.  Misfire:  Opens 
lock  mth  tool  provided,  picks  up  extracted  primer  and  hands  it  to 
gun  captain;    closes  lock  when  reprimed.     Powder  hoist  out  of 


78  SHIP   AND   GUN    DRILLS. 

commission:  Assists  in  removing  car  cover,  receives  bag  from  man 
in  trunk,  and  passes  them  to  gun  captain  on  loading  platform. 

No.  21  plugman  {center  gun). — Duties  same  as  No.  20. 

No.  22  plugman  {left  gun). — Duties  same  as  No.  20. 

Trainers  2S,  24,_  25. — Trains  turret.  Sees  turret  on  zero  or  180°, 
and  turret  train  indicator  set  at  zero  or  180°  as  soon  as  station  is 
manned.  When  sliifting  sides,  shift  target-turret  indicator.  When 
ordered,  follows  target-turret  indicator  as  quickly  as  possible  until 
target  is  designated,  then  keeps  vertical  wire  on  until  ordered  to 
shift  targets.  If  sights  jar  out  calls,  "Mark"  until  correct  elevating 
pointer's  sight  is  determined. 

Firing  jpointers  26,  27,  28. — Mans  fuing  key  at  pointer's  station. 
When  master  key  fu-e  is  used,  closes  key  from  "Stand-by"  to  end 
of  firing  signal,  and  in  pointer  fire,  closes  key  during  firing  signal 
when  he  wishes  to  fire.  Should  be  trained  to  either  firing  pointer 
or  trainer.  Watches  "Ready"  lights;  if  necessary,  notifies  elevat- 
ing pointers  when  former  are  on.  If  cross  lines  do  not  check  with 
elevating  pointer,  calls  out  "Check  sight  setting."  When  sights 
are  correctly  set,  the  telescope  whose  vertical  wire  checks  with 
trainers  is  assumed  to  be  correct. 

Elevating  pointers  26,  27  28. — Elevates  when  ready  lights  are  on  or 
when  word  "Target"  is  received  from  booth;  points  or  lays  them 
to  pro})er  director  setting  (calling  "Set"  to  booth  in  latter  case) 
and  brings  guns  to  loading  position  after  each  shot.  For  pointer 
fii'e  or  master  key  calls,  "Mark"  when  cross  lines  are  on,  before  each 
shot,  if  possible.  In  charge  of  pointers  and  sight  setters  and  gives 
orders  for  shifting  from  one  side  to  the  other.  Operates  clutch 
for  shifting  to  hand  elevating  gear.  Reports  "Ready"  when  target 
indicator  is  set,  gear  tested,  and  turret  on  zero,  or  180°. 

Sight  setters  29,  SO,  31. — Mans  JD  (JE)  phone  and  sets  sights. 
Checks  ranges  received  over  phone  Avith  \isual,  after  sights  are  set. 
In  case  of  discrepancy  calls.  "Check  \dsual."  Formally,  sets  by 
telephone  and  checks  by  Adsual.  Relief  firing  pointer.  Repeats 
director  angles  received  over  telephone  and  \-isual  to  elevating 
pointer. 

UPPER   POWDER  HANDLING   ROOM. 

Petty  officer  in  charge. — In  center,  forward  of  powder  tray.  In 
charge  of  powder  crew.  Will  test  gear  and  report  to  booth  if  there 
are  any  absentees,  requesting  detail  of  extra  men,  and  report  to 
booth  when  ready.  Will  see  that  powder  is  distributed  properly 
from  lower  hoists  to  upper  hoists,  four  bags  to  each  upper  hoist;  and 
that  bags  are  put  in  upper  hoist,  red  end  aft.  Will  see  that  safety 
precautions  are  observed.  At  "'Silence"  will  take  station  at  sprin- 
kler valve  and  be  ready  to  turn  it  on  if  necessary.    Have  powder  men 


PART    IV GUN    DRILLS.  79 

Nos.  36,  37,  and  40  go  to  hand  training  room  when  called  to  man  hand 
training  gear.  Have  hand  passing  platform  when  manned  if  powder 
hoists  are  out  of  commission. 

Hoist  man  No.  <?^.— Operates  left  lower  hoist  controller.  Operates 
hoist  on  signal  from  lower  handling  room.  As  bags  roll  out  of  hoist, 
he  passes  them  on  tray  to  powder  men  34  and  36;  first,  third,  fifth, 
and  sixth  bags  to  36,  red  end  outboard;  second  and  fourth  bags  to  34, 
red  end  inboard.  Left  hoist  motor  car  out  of  commission:  Throw  in 
clutch  to  connect  left  hoist  ^^^th  hand  gear.  Hand  passing:  Receive 
bags  from  34  and  pass  to  48.  Mans  voice  tube  to  lower  handling 
room  and  booth. 

Hoist  man  No.  33. — No.  33  operates  right  lower  hoist  controller; 
operates  hoist  on  signal  from  lower  handling  room.  As  Imgs  roll  out 
of  hoist  he  passes  them  on  tray  to  powder  men  Nos.  35  and  37  at  right 
and  center  hoists;  first  and  third  bags  to  center,  red  end  inboard;  and 
second,  fourth,  fifth,  and  sixth  bags  to  right  hoist,  red  end  outboard. 
Right  hoist  motor  out  of  commission:  Throw  in  clutch  to  connect 
right  hoist  with  hand  gear.  Hand  passing:  Receive  bags  from  35  and 
pass  to  39.     Mans  voice  tube  to  lower  handling  room  and  booth. 

Pounder  men  Nos.  34  and  35. — Nos.  34  and  35:  Forward  side  of  pow- 
der tray  in  center;  receive  bag  from  hoist  men  and  pass  them  to  40. 
Hand  passing:  Opens  powder  passing  hatch;  receive  bags  from  man. 
on  ninth  platform  and  pass  them  on  tray  to  powder  men. 

Powder  men  Nos.  36,  37,  38,  39,  40,  41,  42.— ^o.  36  at  forward  end 
of  left  upper  hoist;  receives  bags  from  hoist  man;  passes  tirst  bag  to  38; 
shoves  second  bag  in  car;  passes  third  ba'g  to  38;  shores  fourth  bag 
in  car.  Hand  passing:  Takes  station  on  ninth  platform;  receives 
bag  from  man  on  eighth  platform  and  passes  to  powder  man  in  upper 
handling  room.     Mans  hand  gear  in  training  room  when  called. 

No.  37  at  forward  end  of  right  upper  hoist;  receives  bags  from 
hoistman;  passes  first  bag  to  39,  holds  second  bag  ready  to  shove  in 
car.  When  car  is  do'wn  and  first  two  bags  are  in,  passes  third  bag 
to  39  and  shoves  fourth  bag  in  car.  Hand  passing:  Takes  station 
on  seventh  platform;  receives  bags  from  man  on  sixth  platform  and 
passes  them  to  man  on  eighth  platform.  Mans  hand  gear  in  training 
room  when  called. 

No.  38  at  after  end  of  left  upper  hoist.     Duties  same  as  39. 

No.  39  at  after  end  of  right  upper  hoist;  receives  first  bag.  WTien 
car  is  down  shoves  bag  in  car.  When  first  two  bags  are  in  car 
trips  top  tray,  allowing  lags  to  drop  into  lower  tray;  releases  top 
tray;  receives  third  bag  and  shoves  it  into  car.  When  fourth  bag 
is  in,  puts  signal  on  "Hoist"  and  releases  control  safety  latch.  All 
bags  to  go  in  red  end  aft.  Hand  passing:  Ships  bracket  in  hoist 
trunk;  stands  on  powder  tray;  receives  bags  from  hoistman  and 
passes  through  door  to  powderman,  on  top  of  car.  Mans  voice  tube 
to  top  of  hoist. 


80  SHIP   AND   GUN   DRILLS. 

No.  40  at  forward  end  of  center  upper  hoist;  receives  bags  from 
34  and  35;  passes  first  bag  to  41;  shoves  second  bag  in  car;  passes 
third  bag  to  41;  shoves  fourth  bag  in  car.  Hand  passing:  Takes 
station  on  eighth  platform ;  receives  bag  from  man  on  seventh  plat- 
form, and  passes  to  man  on  ninth  platform.  Mans  hand  gear  in 
training  room  when  called. 

No.  41  at  after  end  of  center  upper  hoist.     Duties  same  as  39. 

No.  42  in  turning  gear  room.  Stands  by  to  shift  clutches  for 
shifting  to  auxiliary  or  hand  power. 

Electrician. — Provides  electrical  spares  in  both  turret  and  shell- 
handling  room.  After  seeing  all  switches  closed  and  auxiliary 
lighting  tested,  stands  by  on  electrical  deck. 

SHELL-HANDLING   ROOM. 

Shell  captains  Nos.  4S  and  44. — ^No.  43  in  charge  of  right  shell- 
handling  room  crew,  at  right  shell  tube;  assists  in  placing  shell  in 
tube.  Sees  gear  in  working  order  and  reports  "Ready"  to  booth 
when  crew  is  present  and  tube  is  filled  with  shell.  Provides  two 
sharp  knives  to  cut  shell  lashing  and  sees  that  grommets  and  lash- 
ings are  not  throxm  so  they  '\\dll  jam  turret  in  training.  Has  shell 
brought  up  from  lower  circle  and  lower  handling  room  during  lulls  in 
firing,  first  obtaining  permission  from  the  booth.  Has  hoist  motor 
started  at  order  "Stations,"  but  sees  that  it  does  not  run  unneces- 
sarily. At  the  order  "Silence"  stands  by  to  turn  shell-sprinkling 
valve  on  in  case  fire  starts  in  shell-handling  room.  Provides  two 
crowbars  for  clearing  jams  of  shell  or  fragments  against  turret.  Mans 
voice  tube  to  top  of  hoist. 

No.  44  in  charge  of  left  shell-handling  room  crews.  Duties  same 
as  No.  43. 

Shell  hoistmen  Nos.  45  and  46. — No.  45  operates  right  shell  hoist; 
starts  motor  and  operates  hoist,  watching  automatic  danger  signal 
and  hoisting  every  time  "  Hoist"  is  fully  shown  and  the  shell  is  in 
the  bottom  of  the  "tube.  Attaches  auxiliary  shell  hoist  whip  to  shell 
in  case  of  breakdown  of  hoist.     Mans  voice  tube  to  machinery  deck. 

No.  46  operates  left  shell  hoist.  Duties  same  as  No.  45.  Mans 
voice  tube  to  booth  and  lower  handling  room. 

Winchmen  Nos.  47  and  48. — Man  parbuckle  drums.  No.  47  jDar- 
buckles  shell  into  hoist  from  stowage  for  right  shell  hoist.  Hoists 
shell  from  lower  handling  room  when  necessary  if  turret  is  trained 
iore  and  aft;  other\\T.se  assists  with  shell  purchase. 

No.  48  parbuckles  shell  into  hoist  from  stowage  for  left  shell  hoist. 
Other  duties  same  as  No.  47. 

Shellmen  Nos.  49,  50,  51,  52,  53,  and  54-— ^os.  49,  51,  53  are  right 
shell  crew;  handle  parbuckles  and  steady  shell  from  stowage,  and 
place  in  right  shell  hoist  tube.     Replace  shell  from  stowage  in  shell- 


PART    IV GUN    DRILLS.  81 

handling  room  with  shell  from  circle  deck  stowage  when  time  per- 
mits. Assist  with  shell  purchases  or  tackle  when  hoisting  shell  from 
lower  circle  or  lower  handling  room.  Nos.  49  and  51  man  hand 
gear  in  turning  gear  room  when  called.  Nos.  50,  52,  and  54  are  left 
shell  crew.  Duties  same  as  right  crew.  Nos.  50  and  52  man  the 
hand  gear  in  turning  gear  room  when  called. 

LOWER  HANDLING   ROOM   AND   MAGAZINES. 

Junior  turret  officer. — In  charge  of  ammunition  supply.  Responsi- 
ble for  eflScient  supply  of  powder  and  shell,  and  rigid  adherence  to 
''Safety  orders."  Be  prepared  to  take  over  duties  of  turret  officer 
in  his  absence. 

Gunner's  mate. — In  the  absence  of  junior  turret  officer,  has  super- 
\dsion  of  the  entire  powder  supply.  In  direct  charge  of  magazine 
crew.  Makes  necessary  repairs  to  powder  hoists.  Sees  magazine 
safety  precautions  carried  out  and  in  case  of  fire  in  handling  room 
floods  magazine.  Sees  gear  always  in  working  order  and  scuttle 
flaps  tight.  When  ordered,  has  4  bags  ready  for  each  gun  and  6  bags 
in  each  hoist,  and  12  in  magazine  before  reporting  "Ready"  to  the 
booth.  Keeps  up  a  continuous  supply  of  powder.  "WTien  powder 
has  been  sent  from  upper  powder  handling  rooms  after  each  shot, 
the  hoistmen  signal  "  Hoist"  on  the  telegraphs  and  start  the  hoists. 
'* Hoist"  on  the  telegraph  will  be  the  signal  to  start  the  passing  of 
powder  out  of  magazines,  ^^^len  the  powder  is  up,  the  hoistmen 
signals  "  Stop  "  on  the  telegraphs  and  stops  hoists,  ''  Stop  "  being  the 
signal  to  stop  passing  powder  from  the  magazines.  Powder  that  can 
not  be  put  into  the  hoists  or  on  the  tray  will  be  returned  to  the  maga- 
zines. Gunner's  mate  pro^ides  tools  and  spares,  and  sees  cloth  and 
sewing  material  on  hand  for  making  repairs  to  torn  powder  bags. 
Keeps  full  supply  of  wrenches  in  magazines  for  opening  powder  tanks. 

Messenger  83. — Mans  voice  tube  to  officer's  booth  and  shell-hand- 
ling room. 

Handling -room  powder  men. — Even  numbers  are  right  crew, odd 
numbers  left  crew. 

Powdermen  55  and  56. — Stationed  in  front  of  loading  tray;  receive 
bags  from  powdermen  and  roll  into  conveyor,  taking  care  bags  are 
entered  square  to  avoid  jams. 

Nos.  57  and  58  stationed  at  side  of  conveyor;  man  voice  tubes  and 
"Hoist"  telegraphs. 

Nos.  63  and  64  at  after  magazine  scuttle;  give  signal  to  magazines 
to  pass  out  powder;  receive  first  bag,  carry  it  and  place  it  in  hoist, 
red  end  inboard.  Hand  passing:  Receive  first  bag  out  of  each  door 
and  pass  it  to  first  platform. 

Nos.  61  and  62  receive  second  bag  out  of  after  door  and  place  it  on 
tray,  red  end  outboard.  Hand  passing:  Receive  second  bag  out  of 
each  door  and  pass  it  to  first  platform. 


82  SHIP   AND    GUN   DRILLS. 

Nos.  59  and  60  receive  third  bag  out  of  afterdoor  and  place  it  in. 
right  hoist,  red  end  inboard.  Hand  passing:  Receive  third  bag  out 
of  each  door  and  pass  it  to  first  platform. 

Nos.  69  and  70  give  signal  to  magazine  to  pass  out  powder;  receive 
first  bag  out  of  forward  door  and  place  it  in  right  hoist,  red  end  out- 
board. Hand  passing:  Take  station  on  sixth  platform;  receive  bags 
from  fifth  and  pass  to  seventh  platform. 

Nos.  67  and  68  receive  second  bag  out  of  forward  door  and  place  it 
in  right  hoist,  red  end  outboard.  Hand  passing:  Take  station  on  fifth 
platform;  receiA^e  bags  from  foiuth  and  pass  to  sixth  platform. 

Nos.  65  and  66  receive  third  bag  out  of  forward  door  and  place  it 
in  right  hoist,  red  end  outboard.  Hand  passing:  Take  station  on 
fourth  platform;  take  bags  from  third  platform  and  pass  to  fifth 
platform.     If  "Silence"  bell  rings,  mans  starboard  fire  hose. 

Magazine  'poivdermen. — Remove  powder  from  tanks  and  pass  it 
into  handling  room  on  signal.  In  any  one  magazine  not  more  than 
six  bags  shall  ever  be  out  of  the  tanks  at  one  time;  that  will  be  three 
bags  in  each  passageway.  Not  more  than  two  covers  to  full  tanks 
shall  be  removed,  and  not  more  than  four  additional  covers  shall  be 
loosened.     All  assist  in  closing  flap  when  "Silence"  bell  is  heard, 

Nos.  71  and  72  in  charge  of  af terpassage ;  magazine,  at  scuttle; 
receive  powder,  place  it  on  tray,  and  pass  it  into  handling  room  on 
signal. 

Nos.  73  and  74  in  afterpassage,  magazine ;  remove  powder  from  tanks 
and  assist  in  placing  it  on  tray  and  shoving  it  into  handling  room. 

Nos.  75  and  76  in  afterpassage,  in  magazine;  open  tanks  and  assist 
in  carrying  powder  from  tanks  to  scuttle. 

Nos.  77  and  78  in  charge  of  forward  passage;  in  magazine.  Duties 
same  as  Nos.  73  and  74. 

Nos.  79  and  80  in  foi-ward  passage,  in  magazines.  Duties  same  as 
Nos.  73  and  74. 

Nos.  81  and  82  in  forward  passage,  in  magazine.  Duties  same  as 
Nos.  75  and  77. 

456.  Service  of  16-inch,  45-caliber  guns. 

Two  gun  turrets. 

STANDARD   TURRET   CALLS. 

1.  Turret  officer's  booth "  Booth." 

2.  Right  gun "  Right  gun." 

3.  Left  gun "Left  gun." 

4.  Pointer  station,  right  gun "  Right  pointer." 

5.  Pointer  station,  left  gun "  Left  pointer." 


PART   IV GUN    DKILLS.  83 

6.  Trainer's  station,  right  gun "  Right  trainer. ' ' 

7.  Trainer's  station,  left  gun "Left  trainer." 

8.  Upper  powder-handling  room "  Powder." 

9.  Shell-handling  room "Shell." 

10.  Lower  handling  room "  Handling  room." 

11.  Turning  gear  room "Turning  gear." 

12.  Electric  platform "  Electric." 

13.  Ex-caliber  guns "  Ex-caliber." 

Turret  officer. — The  turret  officer  is  stationed  at  left  periscope  and 
is  in  charge  of  the  eflBcient  service  of  his  turret. 

At  general  quarters  he  reports  to  control  by  turning  on  "Ready 
light"  when  turret  is  completely  manned  andVeady  in  all  respects. 

He  acknowledges  all  messages  fiom  control  by  blinking  "  Ready 
light." 

On  recei\T.ng  order  to  "  Commence  firing  "  the  signal  is  given  to  all^ 
stations  over  voice  tubes.  WTien  guns  are  loaded  the  order  "  Target " * 
is  given  to  elevating  pointer  and  when  guns  are  elevated  or  "Set" 
the  "Ready  light"  to  control  is  turned  on  showing  the  turret  ia 
ready  to  fire. 

Care  shall  be  taken  to  see  that  the  proper  firing  switches  are  closed 
to  the  guns  that  are  to  fire.     Misfires  are  to  be  avoided . 

The  turret  officer  is  a  member  of  the  fire  control  and  will  keep  the 
control  officer  informed  of  all  interruptions  of  fire  and  shall  give  all 
information  that  may  be  of  value  in  the  handling  of  the  ship's 
batteries. 

In  event  of  group  control  the  turret  officer  mans  the  directorscope, 
and  the  turret  captain  takes  over  the  duties  of  the  turret  officer. 

In  the  absence  of  the  turret  officer  his  duties  are  taken  over  in 
sequence  by  the  turret  junior  officer,  turret  captain,  and  turret 
gunner's  mates. 

DUTIES  OF  CREW. 

TURRET   officer's   BOOTH  AND   TURRET   CHAMBER. 

Turret  captain. — The  turret  captain  is  the  assistant  to  the  turret 
officer.  His  station  is  at  right  periscope,  but  goes  to  any  place  in  the 
turret  where  his  presence  is  needed.  Before  battle  he  will  issue 
six  boxes  of  primers  to  all  gun  captains,  who  will  retain  one  box 
and  serve  out  the  others  to  his  primer  men.  He  must  be  familiar 
with  turret  procedure  and  with  each  man's  duties:  he  must  be  able 
to  conduct  all  drills  when  necessary.  He  must  know  thoroughly 
all  gear  in  the  turret;  must  acquaint  himself  with  the  history  of  the 
turret;  must  know  and  keep  record  of  all  casualties  that  have  ever 
7431°— 23 7 


84  SHIP   AND   GUN   DRILLS. 

■occurred  in  the  turret,  and  must  be  able  to  direct  the  gunner  s 
mates  and  strikers  in  upkeep  and  repairs.  He  will  see  that  the 
turret  routine  is  carried  out  and  will  never  disable  the  turret  without 
orders  from  the  turret  officer.  He  will  keep  the  turret  log  and  submit 
it  weekly  to  the  turret  officer  on  Fridays  not  later  than  4  p.  m. 
He  must  be  able  to  prepare  the  turret  for  use,  and  will  see  that  the 
guns  are  always  ready  to  fire.  He  must  be  able  to  bore  sight.  He 
must  be  familiar  with  the  fire-control  installation  and  procedure, 
and  must  be  able  to  take  full  charge  of  the  turret  when  operating 
under  local  control.  In  case  of  fire  in  turret  opens  all  emergency 
sprinkling  valves  and  pull  "Silence  bell"  cord. 

Telephone  talker. — 1.  Mans  JD^  (JE^)  phone  and  repeats  all  orders 
received  to  the  turret  officer;  keeps  account  of  all  shots  fired.  He 
must  be  thoroughly  familiar  with  all  terms  and  orders  that  are 
likely  to  be  used  and  will  make  every  effort  to  keep  the  turret 
officer  and  chief  fire-control  officer  informed  of  all  that  occurs. 
When  the  turret  is  operating  under  local  control  he  will  ring  the 
salvo  bells  and  buzzers.     His  station  is  in  the  center  of  the  booth. 

Voice-tube  talker  2. — ^^lans  voice  tubes  in  booth. 

Gunner's  mates  3  and 4. — No.  3  is  stationed  outboard  of  right  gun; 
No.  4  outboard  of  left  gun.     Watch  operation  of  all  gear. 

Gun  captains  5  and  6. — The  gun  captain  is  in  direct  charge  of  all 
the  operation  of  loading  his  gun  and  is  in  command  of  his  gun's 
crew.  He  is  responsible  for  the  conduct,  efficiency,  and  spirit 
of  the  crew,  who  must  be  made  to  realize  that  he  is  the  direct  repre- 
sentative of  the  turret  officer  and,  under  the  turret  captain,  in  abso- 
lute charge  of  his  own  gun.  He  must  thoroughly  imderstand  the 
duties  of  each  member  of  his  crew,  must  be  able  to  instruct  new 
men,  and  must  know  what  action  to  take  in  case  of  any  casualties. 
On  manning  the  gun  reports  to  the  turret  officer  when  able  to  load, 
and  will  at  the  same  time  report  absentees  and  request  detail  of 
extra  men. 

No.  5  gun  captain  (right  gun). — After  each  shot  inspect  screw  box 
and  gas  check  seat  and  sponges  mushroom,  inspects  bore  and  reports 
"Bore  clear"  or  "Foul  bore."  Lowers  spanning  tray  when  shell  is 
rammed  and  rammer  drawn  back,  receives  first  bag  of  powder  on 
tray,  and  shoves  it  forward  on  tray;  divides  next  two  bags,  one 
forward,  one  aft;  receives  the  last  two  bags  on  tray.  The  red  ends 
of  all  bags  must  be  aft.  When  charge  is  rammed  home  raises  span- 
ning tray,  taking  care  that  tray  does  not  strike  plug,  opens  breech 
closing  valve  and  touches  plug  handle  to  close  plug.  When  plug 
is  closed  and  locked,  steps  off  platform  onto  shell  plate  and  turns 
on  ' '  ready  light. ' '  Turns  off ' '  ready  light ' '  when  gun  has  been  fired. 
In  case  no  air,  closes  plug  by  hand,     Provides  himself  with  spare 


PART    IV GUN    DRILLS.  85 

primers  and  in  case  of  misfire  reprimes  from  shelf  plate,  using  tool 
provided.  If  rammer  is  out  of  commission  assists  in  ramming  shell 
by  hand,  ramming  powder  by  hand,  one  bag  at  a  time.  Powder 
hoists  out  of  commission,  lands  bags  from  whip  on  the  tray  and  rams 
them  by  hand. 

No.  6  grm  captain  (left  gun). — Same  duties  as  No.  5. 

Trayman,  7  and  8. — Stationed  outboard  of  spanning  tray  on  shelf 
plate.  Assist  gun  captains  in  handling  spanning  tray  and  powder 
on  tray.  If  rammer  is  out  of  commission  assist  in  ramming  shell 
and  powder  by  hand. 

Hoistmen  9  and  10. — No.  9  operates  right  hoist  control,  hoisting 
car  when  hoist  signal  is  on  "Hoist"  and  gun  captain  signal  "Bore 
clear."  When  car  is  up  puts  control  wheel  on  " Neutral. "  When 
rammer  is  clear  opens  door  and  as  gun  captain  and  trayman  roll  out 
bags:  operates  air  connection  on  hand  wheel  to  bring  powder  bags 
into  position.     When  last  two  bags  are  out,  closes  door  and  lowers  car. 

Rammer  out  of  commission:  Assists  in  ramming  shell  by  hand. 
Powder  hoist  out  of  commission:  Assists  primerman  in  handling 
whip  in  gun  pit. 

No.  10  operates  hoist  for  left  gun.     Duties  same  as  No.  9. 

Rammermen  11  and  12. — The  rammerman  operates  the  powder 
rammer  and  assists  with  the  hand  rammer  if  necessary,  taking  the 
latter  from  its  stowage  place  and  getting  it  behind  shell.  No.  11 
operates  the  right  rammer  and  No.  12  the  left  rammer.  In  case  one 
motor  breaks  down  the  other  is  started  after  switches  are  thrown  on 
rammer  motor  panel  in  hand-gear  room.  No.  11  and  No.  12  operate 
the  controllers,  sliifting  clutches  as  necessary  for  controlling  rammer 
for  other  gun.  Ram  shell  when  spanning  tray  is  in  place  and  shell 
on  tray.  When  shell  is  rammed  home  \\ithdraw  rammer  rear  end 
of  spanning  tray,  ram  powder  when  last  two  bags  are  in  tray,  ram- 
ming charge  just  inside  of  gas  check  seat;  withdraw  rammer.  Shell 
must  be  seated  hard,  but  powder  will  be  rammed  just  inside  of  gas 
check  seat,  care  being  used  not  to  strike  bags  against  the  shell. 
Shell  shall  not  be  rammed  with  powder  charge  interposed  between 
base  of  shell  and  head  of  rammer. 

Cradletncn  1-3  and  14. — No.  l'^  operates  shell  cradle  for  right  shell 
hoist,  dumping  shell  as  required.  If  right  shell  hoist  is  out  of 
commission,  mans  the  right  auxiliary  hoist  drum,  hoisting  shell  by 
auxiliary  hoist.     If  all  power  is  off  turret,  mans  differential  purchase. 

Right  rammer  out  of  commission,  assists  in  ramming  shell  by 
hand.     ^lans  voice  tube  to  shell  handling  room. 

No.  14  operates  shell  cradle  for  left  shell  hoist.  Duties  same  as 
No.  13. 

Shelbnen  15,  16,  17,  and  IS. — No.  15  and  No.  17  stationed  on  shell 
table,  right  gun.     Receive  shells  from  cradle  and  roll  them  along 


86  SHIP   AND   GUN    DRILLS. 

shell  table  to  rammer.  Shell  hoist  out  of  commissioD,  assist  No.  13 
at  auxiliary  hoist.  Rammer  out  of  commission  assist  in  ramming 
shell  by  hand. 

No.  1()  and  No.  18  stationed  at  left  gun.  Duties  same  as  No.  ]5 
and  No.  17. 

Primermcn  19  and  20. — No.  19  stationed  in  gun  pit,  right  gun. 
Primes  when  plug  is  opened  and  stands  clear  of  recoil.  Misfire, 
opens  lock  with  tool  provided,  picks  up  extracted  primer  and  hands 
it  to  gun  captain.  Closes  lock  when  reprimed.  Powder  hoist  out 
of  commission,  receives  bags  through  door  leading  to  upper  powder 
handling  room,  and  assisted  by  No.  9  hoists  bags  to  tray. 

No.  20  stationed  under  breech  of  left  gun.     Duties  same  as  No.  19. 

Trainers  21  and  22. — No.  21  at  trainer's  station  under  right  gun, 
No.  22  under  left  gun;  trains  turret.  When  ordered  follows  train 
indicator  as  quickly  as  possible.  If  sights  jar  out,  calls  "Mark" 
until  correct  elevating  pointer's  sight  is  determined. 

Pointers  23  and  ^4.— No.  23  at  pointer's  station  under  right  gun; 
No.  24  under  left  gun.  E^levates  when  ready  lights  are  on  or  when 
word  "Target"  is  received  from  booth,  and  lays  guns  to  proper 
elevation,  following  elevation  indicator.  Closes  firing  key  from 
"Stand-by''  to  end  of  firing  signal  if  "on"  with  elevation  indicator. 
In  case  of  failure  of  Selsyn  system,  lays  guns  to  proper  angle  of  eleva- 
tion (calling  "Set"  to  booth)  and  closes  firing  key  during  firing 
signal.  In  pointer  fire  closes  key  during  firing  signal  when  he 
wishes  to  fire.  Brings  gun  to  loading  position  after  each  shot. 
Operates  clutch  for  shifting  to  hand  elevating  gear.  Reports  ready 
to  booth  when  stations  are  manned. 

Sight  setters  25  and  26. — No.  25  at  sights  of  right  gun.  No.  26  at 
sights  of  left  gun.  Mans  JD  (JE)  phone  and  sets  sights.  Check 
ranges  received  over  phone  with  visual  after  sights  are  set.  In  case 
of  discrepancy  calls  to  sub,  "Check  visual."  Normally  sets  by 
telephone  and  checks  by  visual. 

Relief  pointer:  In  case  of  failure  of  Selsyn  system  "Marks"  to 
pointer  when  gun  is  laid  to  correct  director  angle. 

UPPER  POWDER  HANDLING  ROOM. 

Petty  officer  in  charge  27. — In  center  forward  of  hoists.  In  charge 
of  powder  crew.  Tests  gear  and  reports  to  l)Ooth  if  there  are  any 
absentees,  requesting  detail  of  extra  men,  and  reports  to  Iwoth  when 
ready.  Sees  that  powder  is  distril)uted  properly  from  lower  hoists  to 
upper  hoists,  and  that  Ijags  are  put  in  upper  hoist,  red  end  aft.  Sees 
that  safety  precautions  are  observed.  At  "Silence"  will  take 
station  at  sprinkler  valve  and  will  be  ready  to  turn  it  on  if  necessary. 


PART   JV GUN   DRILLS.  87 

Sends  powdermen  No.  30  and  No.  31  to  hand -training  room  when 
called  to  man  hand-training  gear.  If  powder  hoists  are  out  of 
commission  stations  crew  to  pass  powder  into  gun  pit. 

Hoistman  No.  t^8. — Operates  left  lower  hoist  controller  on  signal 
from  lower  handling  room.  As  bags  roll  out  of  hoist  he  passes  them 
on  tray  to  powdermen  No.  30  and  No.  32,  red  end  aft.  Left  hoist 
motor  out  of  commission:  Throw  in  clutch  to  connect  left  hoist  with 
hand  gear.  Hand  passing:  Opens  door  to  powder  trunk,  receives 
bag  and  passes  to  powderman  No.  30. 

Haistmen  No.  29. — Operates  right  lower  hoist  controller.  Duties 
same  as  No.  28. 

Powdermen  30,  31,  32  and  33.— 'No.  30  and  No.  31  outboard  of 
powder  tray.  Receive  bags  from  hoistmen  (No.  28  and  No.  29)  and 
pass  them  to  powdermen  No.  32  and  33  who  are  stationed  outboard 
of  upper  hoist.  No.  32  and  No.  33  load  upper  powder  hoist  and 
signal  when  ready  to  hoist.  Hand  passing:  No.  30  and  No.  31 
receive  bags  from  No.  28  and  No.  29  and  pass  them  to  No.  32  and 
No.  33,  who  pass  the  bags  through  the  door  into  the  gun  pit. 

Note. — After  the  guns  are  loaded,  5  bags  of  powder  will  be  placed  in  each  upper 
hoist  car,  ready  for  hoisting.  Not  more  than  10  bags  of  powder,  5  for  each  conveyor, 
will  be  in  the  lower  powder-handling  room  ready  to  be  sent  up  to  the  upper  handling- 
room. 

SHELL-HANDLING  ROOM. 

Shell  captains  34  and  35. — No.  35  in  charge  of  right  shell-handling 
room  crew,  at  right  shell  tube ;  assists  in  placing  shell  in  tube.  Sees 
gear  in  working  order  and  reports  "Ready"  to  booth  when  crew  is 
present  and  tube  is  tilled  with  shell.  Provides  tv/o  sharp  knives  to 
cut  shell  lashing  and  sees  that  grommets  and  lashings  are  not  tin-own 
so  they  will  jam  turret  in  training.  Has  shell  brought  up  from 
lower  handling  room  during  lulls  in  tiring,  first  obtaining  permission 
from  the  booth.  Has  hoist  motor  started  at  order  "Stations"  but 
sees  that  it  does  not  run  unnecessarily.  At  the  order  "Silence" 
stands  by  to  turn  shell-sprinkling  valve  on  in  case  fire  starts  in  shell- 
handling  room.  Provides  two  crowbars  for  clearing  jams  of  shell  or 
fragments  against  turret.     Mans  A'oice  tube  to  top  of  hoist. 

No.  34  in  charge  of  left  shell-handling  room  crew.  Duties  same 
as  No.  35. 

Shell  hoistmen  36  and  37. — No.  37  operates  right  shell  hoist;  starts 
motor  and  operates  hoist,  watching  automatic  danger  signal  and 
hoisting  every  time  "Hoist"  is  fully  shown  and  that  the  shell  is  in 
the  bottom  of  the  tube.  Attaches  auxiliary  shell-hoist  whip  to  shell 
in  case  of  breakdown  of  hoist.     Mans  voice  tube  to  machinery  deck. 

No.  36  operates  left  shell  hoist.  Duties  same  as  No.  37.  Mans 
voice  tube  to  booth  and  lower  handlinor  room. 


88  SHIP   AND   GUN    DRILLS. 

Winchmen  38  amd  39. — Man  parbuckle  drums,  No.  39  parbuckles 
shell  into  hoist  from  stowage  from  right  shell-hoist.  Hoists  shell 
from  lower  handling  room  when  necessary  if  turret  is  trained  fore 
and  aft,  otherwise  assists  with  shell  purchase. 

No.  38  parbuckles  shell  into  hoist  from  stowage  for  shell-hoist. 
Other  duties  same  as  No.  39. 

Shellmen  Nos.  40,  41,  42,  43,  44  and  45. — Nos.  41,  43,  and  45  are 
right  shell  crew;  handle  parbuckles  and  steady  shell  from  stowage, 
and  place  in  right  shell-hoist  tube.  Replace  shell  from  stowage  in 
shell  handling  room  with  shell  from  circle  deck  stowage  when  time 
pennits.  Assist  with  shell  purchases  or  tackle  when  hoisting  shell 
from  lower  circle  or  lower  handling  room.  Nos.  41  and  43  man  hand 
gear  in  turning  gear  room  when  called.  Nos.  40,  42  and  44  are  left 
shell  crew.  Duties  same  as  right  crew.  Nos.  40  and  42  man  the 
hand  gear  in  turning  gear  room  when  called. 

LOWER  HANDLING  ROOM   AND   MAGAZINES. 

ELECTRICAL    DECK. 

^  Junior  turret  officer. — In  charge  of  ammunition  supply.  Respon- 
sible for  efficient  supply  of  powder  and  shell  and  rigid  adherence  to 
"Safety  orders."  Be  prepared  to  take  over  duties  of  turret  oflScer 
in  his  absence. 

Electricians. — Provide  electrical  spares  in  both  turret  and  shell 
handling  room.  After  seeing  all  switches  closed  and  auxiliary 
lighting  tested  stand  by  on  electrical  deck. 

Gunner's  mate  46. —In  the  absence  of  junior  turret  officer  has 
supervision  of  the  entire  powder  supply.  In  direct  charge  of  maga- 
zine crew.  Makes  necessary  repairs  to  powder  hoists.  Sees  maga- 
zine safety  precautions  carried  out  and  in  case  of  fire  in  handling 
room  floods  magazine.  Sees  gear  always  in  working  order.  WTien 
ordered  4  bags  for  each  gun  and  6  bags  in  each  hoist,  and  12  bags 
ready  in  magazine  before  reporting  " Ready"  to  the  booth.  Keeps 
up  a  continuous  supply  of  powder.  When  powder  has  been  sent 
from  upper  powder-handling  rooms  after  each  shot,  the  hoistment 
signal  "  Hoist "  on  the  telegraph  will  be  the  signal  to  start  the  passing 
of  powder  out  of  magazines.  \Mien  the  powder  is  up,  the  hoistment 
signal  "Stop"  on  the  telegraphs  and  stop  hoists,  "Stop"  being  the 
signal  to  stop  passing  powder  from  the  magazines.  Powder  that 
can  not  be  put  into  the  hoists  or  on  the  tray  will  be  returned  to  the 
magazines.  Gunner's  mate  provides  tools  and  spares  and  sees 
cloth  and  sewing  material  on  hand  for  making  repairs  to  torn  powder 
bags.  Keeps  full  supply  of  wrenches  in  magazines  for  opening 
powder  tanks. 


PART   IV GUN    DRULLS.  89 

Messenger  47. — ^Mans  voice  tube  to  officer's  booth  and  shell-handling 
room. 

Handling-room  powdermen. — Odd  numbers  are  right  crew,  even 
numbers  left  crew. 

Outside  powdermen  48,  49,  50,  51,  52,  and  53.—^o.  50  and  No.  51 
are  stationed  in  front  of  loading  tray,  receive  bags  and  load  them 
into  conveyor,  taking  care  that  bags  are  entered  squarely  ^  to  avoid 
jams  and  with  red  end  aft.  Man  voice  tubes  and  "Hoist"  tele- 
graphs. 

No.  48,  No.  49,  No.  52,  and  No.  53  are  stationed  along  powder 
tray  and  pass  bags  to  No.  50  and  No.  51. 

Hand  passing:  Man  whip  and  hoist  bags  to  upper  powder  han- 
dling room. 

Outside  poivdermen  54,  55,  56,  57,  58,  59,  60,  61,  62,  and  6J.— Pass 
bags  from  scuttles  to  powder  tray. 

Scuttle  operators  64,  65,  66,  and  67. — Operate  powder  scuttles. 

Inside  powdermen  68,  69,  70,  71,  72,  73,  74,  75,  76,  77,  78,  and79.— 
Stationed  inside  magazines.  Remove  powder  from  .tanks,  pass 
along  powder  tj'av,  and  load  into  powder  scuttles  on  signal  from 
handling  room.  In  any  one  magazine  not  more  than  6  bags  shall  be 
out  of  the  tanks  at  one  time. 

The  covers  on  not  more  than  two  full  tanks  shall  be  removed  and 
not  more  than  five  additional  covers  shall  be  loosened. 

No.  68,  No.  69,  No.  78  and  No.  79  in  charge  at  scuttles,  and  load 
bags  into  scuttles. 

Note.— The  following  applies  to  9-B  (turret  No.  4). 

Outside  poivdermen  54-  55.  56,  57.  58,  59,  60,  61,  62,  arwf  6-^'— Stationed 
on  first  platform.  Receive  powder  from  magazines  and  pass  into 
powder  scuttles  leading  to  lower  handling  room. 

Scuttle  operators  64,  65,  66,  and  67. — Operate  powder  scuttles  from 
magazines  on  first  platform. 

Inside  powdermen  68,  69,  70,  71,  72,  73,  74,  75,  76,  77,  78,  and  79.— 
Stationed  inside  magazines.  Duties  same  as  for  inside  powdermen, 
Turrets  No.  1,  No.  2,  and  No.  3. 

457  Service  of  14-inch,  45-caliber  guns.— 

Two  gun  turrets. — The  general  duties  of  the  crew  and  the  procedure 
for  this  turret  is  the  same  as  for  the  14-inch,  45-caliber,  three-gun 
turret,  except  that  the  specific  duties  of  the  crew  at  the  order  ''  Load  " 
are  as  noted  below. 

TURRET 

No.  1  plugman. — Opens  plug,  sponges  mushroom,  primes. 
No.  7  second  loader  {outboard  in  gun  chamber). — Takes  position  on 
loading  platform.     Assists  plugman  in  opening  plug  and  examines 


90  SHIP   AND   GUN   DRILLS. 

plug  tray  for  extracted  primer.  Assists  first  loader  to  place  platform 
tray  in  screw  box. 

No.  8  first  loader  {inboard  in  gun  chamber). — Takes  position  on 
loading  platform.  Places  platform  tray  in  screw  box.  Examines 
bore  and  reports  "  Clear  bore "  or  "  Foul  bore."     Turns  off  air. 

No.  3  trayman. — Places  standing  tray  on  platform  tray.  Assists 
powder  rammerman  with  powder  rammer. 

No.  6  second  shellman. — Trips  dump  tray  while  loading  trays  are 
being  put  in  position  and  guides  shell  into  rammer  tray.  Latches 
up  dump  tray. 

No.  2  rammerman. — Operates  power  rammer  control  when  certain 
trays  are  in  proper  position  and  rams  shell  into  gun.  When  shell 
has  seated  and  has  extended  until  friction  clutch  slips,  withdraws 
power  rammer. 

Nos.  9  and  10,  first  and  second  jpoivdermen. — On  hearing  the  report 
"Clear  bore"  the  first  powderman  trips  safety  latch  on  flame  proof 
flaps  and  the  first  two  bags  of  powder  are  shot  out  of  bin  on  tray  under 
the  gun.  Both  powdermen  then  pass  bags,  beckets  up,  simultane- 
ously to  the  first  and  second  loaders,  who  place  thejn  on  tray,  where 
they  are  rammed  home  by  the  powder  rammerman,  assisted  by  the 
trayman.  The  first  and  second  powderman  then  pass  up  the  remain- 
ing two  bags  of  the  load  as  described  above,  where  they  are  rammed 
home  when  in  place  on  the  tray. 

No.  3  trayTYian. — Places  standing  tray  in  upright  position  upon 
completion  of  ramming  of  powder  charge. 

Nos.  7  and  8,  first  and  second  loaders. — Remove  platform  tray  from 
gun  upon  completion  of  ramming  powder  charge.  Assist  plugman 
in  closing  of  plug  and  jump  clear  of  loading  platform.  (Plugman 
see  operating  lever  lanyard  in  place.) 

No.  5  first  shellman. — When  dump  tray  is  latched,  and  power  ram- 
mer withdrawn  from  gun,  dumps  shell  on  dump  tray.  Signals  hoist- 
man  to  lower  ear,  and  trips  carrier  latch.  When  car  is  landed  in 
upper  shellroom,  signals  "Hoist." 

UPPER    SHELL    SUPPLY. 

Right  (or  left,  upper  ^oisiman.— Lowers  car  when  signal  '"lower"  is 
received  from  turret.  Hoists  car  when  shell  is  in  carrier  of  car  and 
trolley  and  transportation  eyes  are  clear  and  annunciator  is  on 
"hoist." 

Trolleyman. — Overhauls  pulley  of  transportation  trolley  to  land 
shell  in  hoist  car.  Hauls  transportation  trolley  to  ^•icinity  of  lower 
hoist  or  bin.  Hauls  next  shell  to  proper  height  when  hooked  on 
differential  pulley  of  transportation  trolley. 

First  shellman. — Guides  shell  into  carrier  of  hoist  car.  Unhooks 
transportation  trolley  and  unships  transportation  eye  when  nose  of 


PART    IV GUN    DRILLS.  91 

shell  is  seated  in  hoist  car  and  guard  chain  of  upper  hoist  is  latched. 
Trips  bale  of  carrier  clear  so  shell  will  seat  in  hoist  car.  Returns 
transportation  eye  to  lower  handling  room.  Hooks  transportation 
trolley  to  next  shell.  Assists  trolleyman  to  hoist  next  shell  to  proper 
height. 

Second  shellman. — Unhooks  guard  chain  of  upper  hoist.  Assists 
first  shellman  to  guide  shell  into  hoist  car.  Hooks  guard  chain  of 
hoist.  Unhooks  next  shell  from  lower  hoist  as  soon  as  weight  is  taken 
by  transportation  trolley.  Unships  one  transportation  eye  and 
gives  it  to  bin  shellman. 

Bin  shellman. — Hooks  bin  trolley  to  shell.  Hoists  shell  on  bin 
trolley.  Carries  shell  by  bin  trolley  to  position  for  hooking  to  trans- 
portation trolley.  Receives  transportation  eye  from  second  shell- 
man  whenever  shell  from  bin  is  hooked  on  transportation  trolley. 

Lower  hoist  man. — Tends  voice  tubes.  Operates  lower  hoist  con- 
troller to  hoist  shell  on  signal  from  lower  handling  room. 

Cable  tender. — Guides  cables  of  upper  hoist  to  see  that  cables  are 
kept  clear  whenever  upper  hoist  is  operated. 

Note.— It  should  be  made  the  general  practice  to  take  sheUs  from  lower  shell 
supply  as  long  as  this  method  is  rapid  enough.  The  upper  shell  room  stowage  should 
be  used  only  when  necessary. 

LOWER    SHELL   SUPPLY   CREW. 

Trolleyman. — Guides  trolley  from  inside  shell  room  door  to  hoist, 
operating  switch  to  guide  trolley  to  proper  track.  Eases  away  on 
pulley  to  transfer  shell  to  hoist.  Returns  trolley  to  shell  room  when 
lower  hoLst  has  shell. 

First  shellman. — Guides  shell  from  shell  room  to  hoist.  Hooks 
shell  to  lower  hoist,  using  distant  control.  Closes  gate.  Operates 
signal  to  lower  hoistman,  when  shell  is  hooked  on. 

Second  shellnmn. — Guides  shell  to  hoist,  assisting  first  shellman. 
Collects  transportation  eyes  dropped  from  upper  shell  room. 

Note  — Each  outside  sheU  crew  feeds  its  nearest  hoist. 
SHELL-ROOM  CREW. 

There  shall  be  a  crew  of  three  men  in  each  of  the  two  shell  rooms. 
Each  crew  shall  be  organized  as  follows: 

Trolleyman. — Operates  inside  shell  trolley.  Assists  in  hoisting 
shell  from  storage.  Eases  away  on  differential  purchase  of  inside 
trolley  when  shell  is  being  transferred  to  outer  transportation  trolley. 
Transfers  inside  trolley  with  assistance  of  second  shellman  w^hen 
shells  from  one  row  of  stowage  are  expended. 

First  shellman. — Hooks  inside  purchase  to  transportation  eye  in 
base  of  shell.     Hoists  shell  from  stow^age.     Hooks  outside  transpor- 


92  SHIP   AND    GUN   DRILLS. 

tation  trolley  to  shell.  Takes  strain  on  outside  differential  pulley 
when  transferring  shell  from  one  pulley  to  other.  Hoists  shell  on 
outside  trolley  to  proper  height  for  clearing  door  combing. 

Second  shellman. — Receives  transportation  eyes  from  outside 
shellman.  Ships  two  transportation  eyes  in  next  shell  to  be  hoisted. 
Assists  in  hoisting  shell  from  storage.  Unhooks  inside  trolley  hook 
from  shell  when  outside  trolley  has  weight  of  shell. 

Note:— There  are  four  inside  trolleys,  two  forward  and  two  aft  in  each  shell  room. 
Inside  shell  crews  shall  work  alternately  forward  and  aft  in  step  with  outside  trans- 
portation troUeys.  In  working  a  row  of  shells,  care  will  be  taken  to  see  that  it  is  never 
necessary  to  shift  two  forward  or  two  after  troUeys  at  the  same  time.  The  pairs  of 
troUeysin  one  half  the  shell  room  should  be  so  worked  that  one  row  being  taken  from 
always  contains  at  least  two  shells  more  than  any  other. 

UPPER  POWDER    SUPPLY   CREW. 

Hoistman. — Runs  the  power  conveyor  and  has  charge  of  upper 
powder  room. 

First  powder  passers. — Take  alternate  powder  bags  as  they  come 
up  in  hoist  so  that  when  a  charge  is  completely  up  the  right  and  left 
side  will  each  have  four  bags.     Pass  the  bags  to  second  powder  man. 

Second  powder  passer. — Passes  powder  bags  along  tray  to  third 
powder  passer. 

Third  powder  passer. — Passes  powder  bags  along  tray  to  fourth 
powder  passer. 

Fourth  powder  passer. — Receives  bags  and  turns  them  on  end  so 
that  the  becket  can  be  reached  by  the  powder  bin  men.  Helps  pass 
four  bags  of  powder  to  powder  bin  after  each  salvo. 

First  powder  bin  man. — In  powder  bin  next  to  powder  room  chute. 
Assisted  by  second  bin  man  he  gets  up  four  bags  for  each  salvo  and 
places  same  horizontally  on  inclined  tray  to  gun. 

Second  potvder  bin  man. — In  powder  bin  next  to  flame  proof  door 
to  gun.  First  and  second  bin  men  push  out  the  next  charge  in  room 
as  the  flame  proof  door  to  gun  is  tripped  after  "  Clear  bore.  "  As  soon 
as  the  charge  is  out  of  the  bin  first  bin  man  opens  flame  proof  trap  to 
powder  room  and  both  bin  men  get  up  a  charge  of  four  bags  for  the 
next  salvo. 

POWDER    SUPPLY. 

LOWER   HANDLING    ROOM. 

Officer  or  chief^  petty  officer. — In  charge  of  lower  handling  room. 
Directs  suppler  in  general  with  regard  to  fire  and  casualties  to 
the  powder  hoist. 

Conveyor  loader. — Takes  bags  from  powder  passers  and  places  same 
squarely  and  carefully  in  the  conveyor.  Trips  circuit  breaker  to 
hoist  in  case  a  bag  gets  foul. 


PART   IV GUN    DRILLS.  93 

Voice  tube  man. — Receives  orders  and  information  from  turret 
officer's  booth  and  upper  powder  room. 

Powderman  {4)  .—Stands  at  chute  and  guides  powder  out  to  give 
to  powder  passers. 

Powder  passers. — Take  one  bag  each  and  carry  it  to  conveyor  to 
give  to  conveyor  loader.  Drop  powder  bags  in  immersion  tanks  in 
case  of  fire. 

Hand  passers. — Stationed  on  powder  passing  platforms  to  pass 
powder  in  case  of  a  casualty  to  powder  conveyor.  Drop  powder 
bags  in  immersion  tanks  in  case  of  fire. 

MAGAZINE. 

Powder  tank  opener. — Opens  four  tanks  for  next  charge.  Loosens 
covers  to  four  tanks  for  the  following  charge.  Only  one  charge  of 
powder  to  be  exposed  at  one  time  in  magazine  by  the  chutes. 

First  powderman. — Assists  tank  opener — removes  powder  carefully 
and  gives  same  to  powder  passers. 

Powder  passers. — Take  powder  after  removal  from  tanks  and  place 
same  by  chute. 

Second  poivderman. — Pass  out  ready  powder  immediately  after 
a  salvo  has  been  fired. 


Part  V 
NOTES  ON  HANDLING  MEN 


Principals  of  Training 99 

95 


HANDLING  MEN. 

Importance  of  proper  handling  of  men. — ^Of  far  greater  importance 
to  officers  than  any  material  or  tools  committed  to  their  charge  is  the 
personnel  with  which  they  are  concerned.  The  morale  and  training 
of  the  men  have  always  been  more  important  factors  in  winning 
battles  than  the  characteristics  of  the  ships  or  of  the  weapons  em- 
ployed. Success  in  training  and  in  the  cultivation  of  morale  depends 
to  a  very  considerable  degree  on  skill  in  handling  men. 

Self -training  on  the  part  of  officers. — It  is  not  fair  to  the  ship  or  to  the 
men  under  the  control  of  an  officer  to  make  them  bear  the  brunt  of 
personal  deficiencies  existing  because  of  a  neglect  of  self-training  on 
the  part  of  the  officer.  If  satisfactory  results  in  a  command  do  not 
appear  to  be  forthcoming,  the  officer  should  make  a  study  of  himself, 
his  methods,  bearing,  and  attitude.  The  cause  of  the  difficulty  may 
in  this  way  be  discovered. 

Force  of  example. — Men  in  the  aggregate  will  take  just  as  much 
Interest  in  their  duties,  and  will  work  just  as  much  as  the  officers 
who  are  placed  over  them.  Example  appeals  strongly  to  men,  and 
officers  must  bear  in  mind  that  their  bearing,  manner,  and  language 
in  dealing  with  seniors,  as  well  as  juniors,  are  copied  by  their  subor- 
dinates. An  officer  must  at  all  times  set  a  high  example  of  industry, 
zeal,  initiative,  and  punctuality,  as  well  as  in  neatness  of  dress  and 
correctness  of  bearing,  in  order  to  promote  the  morale  of  his  command. 

Criticism  of  superiors. — Hostile  criticism  of  authority  will  ruin  any 
military  organization  and  completely  destroy  unity  of  action.  A 
subordinate  is  seldom  in  a  position  to  be  competent  to  judge  of  the 
actions  of  his  superiors,  and  should  not  begin  or  permit  hostile  criti- 
cism. Destructive  criticism,  which  is  sometimes  thoughtlessly 
started  in  officers'  messes,  is  contagious  and  soon  spreads  through  the 
ship  and  kills  ship  spirit.  Cooperation  is  essential  on  the  part  of  all 
hands.  Each  indi\'idual  must  yield  unqualified  support  to  author- 
ity, and  must  assure  himself  that  his  own  part  in  the  task  is  thoroughly 
accomplished,  and  accomplished  in  a  way  which  will  best  assist 
others  who  are  working  toward  the  same  end.  This  is  a  fundamental 
of  discipline  and  is  essential  to  success  in  any  organization  where 
many  men  are  employed. 

First  attributes  of  an  officer. — Knowledge  of  his  profession,  con- 
sideration of  others,  good  manners,  coolness,  and  self-control  are  the 
first  attributes  of  an  officer,  and  are  more  important  in  dealing  with 
juniors  than  mth  seniors.     Leadership  is  an  essential.     Leadership 

97 


98  SHIP   AND   GUN   DRILLS. 

is  fundamentally  based  on  proved  superiority.  The  officer  must  be 
first  in  everything  at  all  times. 

Importance  of  understanding  individuals. — ^An  essential  professional 
study  for  officers  is  a  study  of  the  peculiarities,  abilities,  weaknesses, 
character,  etc.,  of  the  individuals  composing  their  command. 

Methods  of  handling  men. — Praise  "will  usually  better  promote 
interest  and  efficiency  than  censure  or  punishment.  Be  strict  but 
considerate  of  the  limitations  of  others.  Remember  that  you  are 
dealing  "with  individuals  as  sensitive  and  jealous  of  their  rights  as 
yourself.  Fairness  and  impartiality  in  dealing  "^th  men  are 
essentials.  Little  good  and  often  great  evil  is  accomplished  by 
unnecessary  shouting.  Nothing  is  more  discouraging  to  an  indi- 
vidual than  the  finding  of  fault  with  him  when  he  is  using  his  best 
endeavors. 

Importance  of  interesting  men  in  work. — ^No  one  objects  to  useful 
work.  Interest  your  men  in  what  they  are  doing.  In  so  far  as  it  is 
practicable,  each  individual  employed  in  a  task  should  have  a  full 
knowledge  of  the  result  which  it  is  desired  to  attain.  At  drill,  when 
teaching  certain  details,  explain  why  these  details  are  necessary. 
Point  out  the  difficulties  and  the  accepted  methods  of  overcoming 
them.     Use  records  of  past  performances  in  developing  interest. 

Suggestions  from  crew. — Never  disregard,  but  welcome,  suggestions 
from  petty  officers  and  men.  Give  consideration  to  all  suggestions, 
and  if  they  are  not  practicable  explain  why  they  are  not.  Such  an 
attitude  on  the  part  of  an  officer  will  always  help  to  promote  and 
encourage  a  personal  interest  in  their  Work  on  the  part  of  the  crew, 
and  frequently  useful  ideas  will  be  offered. 

Seizing  opportunities. — Take  full  advantage  of  opportunities  as 
they  are  presented.  The  best  organization  is  one  in  which  subordi- 
nate leaders  are  given  specific  tasks,  for  the  accomplishment  of 
which  they  are  given  the  necessary  authority  and  for  which  they 
are  held  rigidly  responsible.  The  leader  must  organize  his  forces 
and  arrange  his  program,  assigning  specific  tasks  to  the  subdi^'isions 
of  his  command,  and  having  done  this  must  take  full' advantage  of 
every  opportunity  that  occurs  to  so  modify  his  program  as  to  advance 
the  completion  of  his  work.  Facilities,  conveniences,  and  opportu- 
nities are  seldom  the  best,  but  full  advantage  must  be  taken  of  such 
as  are  available. 

Petty  officers. — Petty  officers  are  indispensable  assistants.  /They 
must  be  educated  to  realize  and  to  exercise  their  responsibilities. 
The  same  loyal  support  may  be  expected  fi'om  them  that  you  give 
to  your  superiors.  Endeavor  to  handle  the  junior  ratings  of  your 
division  through  their  own  petty  ofl&cers,  and  train  your  junior 
ratings  to  obtain  information  and  instruction  from  the  petty  officers 
of  their  own  division. 


PART   V NOTES   ON    HANDLING    MEN.  99 

Smartness  and  cleanliness  essential. — A  division  that  is  smart  in 
infantry,  boat,  and  other  drills  will  be  smart  in  gunnery.  Cleanliness 
of  uniform,  person,  and  of  ship  are  essential  to  efficiency. 

Competition. — Competition  should  be  stimulated  by  all  legitimate 
means.  Arouse  a  desire  to  beat  your  own  ship's  past  performances. 
Analyze  and  post  all  records  and  scores  in  order  to  arouse  and  hold 
interest  of  the  men. 

At  quarters  and  drills. — At  quarters  officers  must  set  an  example 
in  military  form  and  manners  and  the  divisions  will  imitate  them. 
Men  must  not  be  held  at  "attention"  longer  than  necessary;  but 
when  the  command  is  "attention,"  it  must  be  complied  with. 

Particular  care  with  young  men. — Many  young  men  have  been 
discharged  as  undesirable  or  with  bad-conduct  discharges  who 
might  have  been  saved  to  the  Navy  had  they  had  more  official  interest 
and  encouragement  bestowed  on  them  by  their  division  officers. 
Young  recruits  who  are  inclined  to  be  shiftless  require  forethought 
on  the  part  of  the  division  officer  to  keep  them  from  delinquencies. 
WTien  a  man  shows  signs  of  improvement  he  should  be  encouraged 
by  commendation. 

Commendation,  censure,  and  reports. — Commendations  should 
be  given  in  the  presence  of  others,  and  when  merited  should  be 
prompt.  Censure  should  not  be  public.  Reports  of  a  trifling 
nature  are  undesirable.  A  man  should  never  be  placed  on  the 
report  unless  there  is  ample  and  good  reason  for  believing  that 
he  has  intentionally  committed  an  offense  deser\'ing  of  punishment. 

Comforts  of  men. — The  physical  comfort  of  the  men  must  be  given 
careful  attention.  The  successful  ship  is  a  happy  ship,  and  the 
men  must  feel  that  their  ship  is  their  home.  The  Navy  owes  every 
man  reasonable  comfort  in  a  place  to  eat,  to  sleep,  and  to  spend 
his  leisure  time.  Details,  often  trifling,  in  controlling  the  uniform, 
berthing,  messing,  and  li\'ing  arrangements  may  greatly  contribute 
to  the  welfare  and  contentment  of  the  crew.  It  is  an  essential  part 
of  an  officer's  duty  to  care  for  such  details.  On  Saturdays,  Sundays, 
and  holidays,  and  after  working  hours,  recreation  for  the  divisions, 
such  as  sailing  parties,  swimming  parties,  and  the  like,  should  be 
initiated  by  the  division  officers. 

PRINCIPLES  OF  TRAINING. 

Training  for  ivar  the  first  principle. — A  primary  consideration 
in  training  is  that  war  is  likely  to  occur  \^ath  but  little  warning, 
and  that  the  closer  the  training  exercises  in  time  Of  peace  resemble 
the  conditions  to  be  expected  in  battle  the  fewer  will  be  the  de- 
rangements and  the  smaller  will  be  the  disturbing  influence  of  danger 
and  of  these  derangements  on  the  performance  of  the  crew  in  battle. 
7431  °_23 8 


100  SHIP   AND    GUN   DRILLS. 

Training  more  important  than  material. — Unless  the  naval  officer 
in  time  of  peace  devotes  continuous  thought  and  study  to  the  all- 
important  feature  of  his  profession — making  the  most  out  of  his 
command,  whatever  it  may  be — ^he  can  not  be  prepared  for  the 
duties  that  will  come  to  him  in  war.  In  times  of  peace  it  is  not 
unusual  for  other  matters,  such  as  features  of  administration,  material, 
and  design,  to  occupy  first  place  in  the  minds  of  those  who  may 
be  called  upon  in  war  to  use  weapons  and  ships.  Preparation  for 
war  can  not  be  adequately  accomplished  after  hostilities  have  begun, 
and  unless  his  training  has  been  correct  and  sufficient,  an  officer, 
when  called  upon  for  a  demonstration  of  his  proficiency  in  war, 
will  find  himself  unequal  to  the  task.  Success  in  battle  will  depend 
to  a  far  greater  degree  on  the  spirit  and  morale  of  the  .personnel, 
and  on  the  training  and  ability  of  all  to  coordinate  their  efforts, 
than  any  features  of  administration  or  material.  The  correct  bearing 
and  zealous  efforts  of  every  officer  are  directly  reflected  in  the  interest 
and  enthusiasm  with  which  the  crew  carries  on  the  hard  work  nec- 
essary on  their  part.  The  necessity  for  retaining  the  interest  of 
the  men  is  sometimes  not  fully  appreciated.  A  ship  in  which  the 
men  have  a  knowledge,  interest,  and  pride  in  their  work  is  always 
a  successful  and  a  happy  ship.  This  condition  can  be  attained 
only  by  intelligent  and  cheerful  zeal  on  the  part  of  all  officers. 

Character  of  system. — Systematic  and  progressive  gunnery  training 
begins  with  the  selection  of  the  units  of  the  gun  crews,  followed  by 
the  training  necessary  to  render  each  expert  in  his  indi\ddual  duties. 
The  gun  crew  must  then  be  perfected  as  a  team,  and  when  this  is 
accomplished  the  training  must  develop  the  offensive  power  of  the 
ship's  battery  as  a  whole,  and  finally  efficiency  in  the  collective 
fire  of  the  batteries  of  more  than  one  ship. 

Utilization  of  the  spirit  of  competition. — The  natural  desire  of  one 
man  to  excel  another  in  any  test  of  skill  is  an  incentive  to  thorough 
training  that  may  be  regarded  as  an  essential  stimulus  to  any  real 
success.  However  complete  may  be  the  system  or  the  apparatus, 
or  however  diligent  and  faithful  the  officer,  unless  the  desire  to  excel 
is  excited  maximum  results  can  not  be  attained.  This  desire  to 
excel  should  be  fostered  and  utilized  in  daily  drills  by  pitting  indi- 
viduals and  crews  against  one  another  and  by  comparing  their 
records  with  their  own  past  performances.  Care  must  be  taken  to 
avoid  all  questional)le  or  unfair  methods  of  comparisons. 

Final  purpose  of  training. — The  final  purpose  of  all  gunnery  train- 
ing, battle  efficiency,  must  be  kept  always  in  view.  Comparison  of, 
and  competition  between,  units  is  but  a  means  to  that  end.  What 
is  desired  is  a  state  of  efficiency  which  will  enable  a  vessel  to  make 
a  good  gimnery  performance  under  any  circumstances  and  not  only 
under  the  peculiar  conditions  of  a  particular  problem. 


PART   V NOXrS   ON    HAXtLINO    MEN.  101 

Uniformity^  in  methods  is  essential. — Efficiency  can  not  be  attained 
if  young  and  inexperienced  officers  are  permitted  to  change  approved 
methods  at  their  discretion. 

Permanence  in  stations. — The  skill  of  the  ship  in  gunnery  depends 
directly  upon  the  skill  of  each  officer  and  man  in  his  individual 
duties.  Neither  officers  nor  men  can  reach  their  maximum  skill  if 
they  are  frequently  shifted  from  one  station  to  another.  Meml^ers 
of  crews  should,  however,  be  exercised  in  stations  other  than  those 
they  habitually  fill,  in  order  that  casualties  to  personnel  may  not 
silence  the  fire,  and  that  familiarity  with  the  duties  of  others  may  be 
acquired  and  realization  of  their  responsibilities  of  others  may  be  fully 
recognized. 

Casualties. — Any  training  for  battle  that  does  not  prepare  for  and 
fully  anticipate  casualties  to  both  personnel  and  material  is  incom- 
plete. In  preparing  for  casualties  no  methods  or  devices  should  be 
allowed  that  would  not  be  practicable  in  action.  Many  casualties 
prol^aljle  in  battle  can  not  be  ordered  at  the  times  of  target  practice 
without  introducing  an  element  of  danger  that  is  not  justified  by 
the  results  to  be  obtained.  Proficiency  in  handling  such  casualties 
must  be  attained  by  exercises  held  at  times  other  than  during  target 
practice. 

The  emplo\inent  of  observers  from  own  ship  and  other  ships  is 
desiral)le  for  the  purpose  of  collecting  data,  analyzing  performances, 
detecting  faults  in  methods  and  procedure,  exchanging  ideas,  and 
discovering  violations  of  accepted  procedure. 


Part  VI 
SHIP  MANUALS 


Page. 

Quarters  for  Muster  and  Inspection 105 

General  Muster 108 

The  Guard  of  the  Day 109 

Guard  Mounting 115 

103 


SHIP  MANUALS. 


QUARTERS  FOR  MUSTER   AND   INSPECTION. 

601.  The  calls.— 

(1)  Officers^  call  (call  No.  7.)— This  is  to  be  sounded  five  min- 
utes before  the  routine  time  for  quarters,  taken  up  and  repeated 
by  all  the  buglers  at  the  bugle  stations.  At  this  call  oflficers  and 
men  will  gather  in  the  vicinity  of  the  division  parades. 

(2)  Assembly  (call  No.  5).— This  is  to  be  sounded  at  the  routine 
time  for  quarters,  taken  up  and  repeated  by  all  the  buglers  at  the 
bugle  stations. 

602.  Division  parades. — Each  division  should  be  assigned  a 
parade — a  space  on  deck  for  its  habitual  formation.  The  fair 
weather  parades  are  on  the  uncovered  decks.  The  foul  weather 
parades  are  on  the  covered  decks.  The  assignment  of  division 
parades  should  be  such  that  men  have  only  one  parade  and  one 
formation  for  all  events.  Gunnery  department  di^dsions  should 
be  so  assigned  that  one  side  of  the  ship  balances  the  other  side  of 
the  ship,  in  order  that  the  divisions  will  appear  properly  disposed 
on  going  in  and  out  of  port.  All  other  departments  than  the  gun- 
nery department  should  have  deck  space  assigned  them  fulfilling 
two  requirements:  (1)  That  the  divisions  (or  crews)  of  the  depart- 
ment form  contiguously,  and  (2 )  that  those  departments  of  the  ship's 
company  present  a  well-balanced  formation  going  in  or  out  of  port. 

603.  The  band.— The  band  should  be  paraded  on  the  quarter 
deck,  and  at  order  of  executive  officer  will  play  a  march.  After  all 
departments  and  division  officers  have  reported  the  executive  officer 
will  direct  that  a  march  be  played  for  the  officers  to  march  to  their 
stations. 

604.  Duties  of  oflBicers.— 

(1)  Heads  of  departments. ~E3ich  head  of  department  will  com- 
mand his  own  department  at  quarters  for  muster,  and  will  report 
his  department  to  the  executive.  Where  the  navigating  officer 
takes  the  deck  his  department  should  be  reported  to  him  by  his 
next  in  rank  in  his  own  department,  and  the  report  then  made  by 
the  na\igating  officer  to  the  executive. 

(2)  Division  officers.— Division  officers  and  crew  leaders  normally 
will  report  their  divisions  and  crews  to  their  own  head  of  depart- 
ment. 

105 


106  SHIP   AND    GUN   DRILLS. 

605.  Department  formation.— As  far  as  possible,  depart- 
ments will  form  wdth  all  divisions  facing  to  starboard.  On  going 
in  and  out  of  port  all  divisions  shall  be  formed  facing  outboard. 

606.  Posts  of  officers  and  petty  ofBcers.—  (a)  The  post  of 
the  gunnery  officer  should  be  on  the  starboard  side  of  the  ship,  as 
near  equidistant  as  may  be  from  all  the  divisions  of  his  department. 
The  posts  of  the  other  heads  of  departments  are  in  front  and  center 
of  their  divisions. 

(6)  The  post  of  the  division  officer  is  in  fi-ont  and  center  of  his 
di\'ision. 

((.')  The  post  of  the  division  junior  officer  is  in  rear  of  center  of 
his  division. 

{d)  The  post  of  the  division  leading  petty  officer  is  on  the  right 
of  the  section  leading  petty  officer  of  the  first  section. 

{e)  The  posts  of  the  section  leading  petty  officers. are  on  the  right 
of  the  front  rank  of  their  sections. 

(J)  The  posts  of  the  other  chief  petty  officers  are  in  rear  of  their 
own  sections,  in  line  of  file  closers. 

{(j)  The  squad  leaders  occupy  the  right  file  of  the  front  rank  of 
their  squads. 

Qi)  Other  petty  officers  take  posts  in  the  front  rank  of  their  own 
sections,  from  right  to  left  in  order  of  seniority. 

{i)   Seamen  and  firemen,  first  class,  in  the  front  rank. 

607.  To  form  the  division. — All  divisions  will  form  in  two 
ranks;  the  right  wdng  composed  of  the  first  and  third  sections  of  the 
watch  bill;  the  left  wing  composed  of  the  second  and  fourth  sections 
of  the  watch  bill. 

(1)  At  the  sounding  of  assembly  the  division  leading  petty  officer 
in  front  of  and  facing  the  center  of  the  division  commands  Fall  In; 
at  which  the  watch  sections  form  with  the  section  leading  petty 
officers  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  their  sections. 

(2)  The  division  leading  petty  officer  commands  Muster  the 
Sections;  at  which  each  section  petty  officer  takes  one  step  to  the 
front,  faces  to  the  left,  and  musters  his  section.  Each  faces  to  the 
front  when  his  muster  is  completed. 

(3)  The  division  leading  petty  officer  then  commands  1.  Section 
leaders  to  the  front  and  center;  at  which  the  section  leaders  face  toward 
center;  2.  March;  at  which  section  leaders  march  to  center  and 
face  to  front. 

(4)  The  division  leading  petty  officer  then  commands  Report; 
the  section  leaders  report  in  succession  from  the  right. 

Note.— Sectiou  leaders  do  not  salute  the  division  leading  petty  officers. 

(5)  The  division  leading  petty  officer  then  commands  1.  Posts; 
at  which  the  first  and  third  section  leaders  face  right,  the  second 
section  leader  faces  about,  and  the  fourth  section  leader  faces  to  left; 


PART    VI SHIP    MANUALS.  107 

2.  March;  at  which  the  section  leaders  take  their  posts;  each  on  the 
right  of  front  rank  of  his  own  section. 

(6)  The  division  leading  petty  officer  then  peaces  himself,  facing 
to  left,  one  pace  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  of  the  division  and 
commands  1.  Right;  2.  Dress;  dresses  the  division,  and  commands 

3.  Front. 

(7)  The  division  leading  petty  officer  then  moves  to  the  front  and 
center,  and  facing  the  division  officer  salutes  and  reports  Sir, . 

(8)  The  division  officer  returns  the  salute  and  commands  1.  Post; 
and  the  division  leading  petty  officer  takes  his  post  on  the  right  of 
the  front  rank  of  the  division.     [See  par.  (9aa).] 

(9a)  For  inspection  by  the  diAdsion  officer:  The  division  officer 
commands  Form  for  Ixspectiox.  The  division  junior  officer, 
placing  himself  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  facing  to  left,  com- 
mands 1.  Open  ranks;  at  which  the  division  leading  petty  officer 
drops  to  the  rear  a  sufficient  distance  (governed  by  the  deck  space)  to 
form  the  alignment  for  the  rear  rank;  2.  March;  at  which  the  rear 
rank  steps  back  to  its  alignment  on  the  division  leading  petty  officer; 
both  ranks  dress  to  the  right.  The  division  junior  officer  aligns  both 
ranks,  places  himself  on  the  right  of  the  front  rank  facing  to  the  left 
and  commands  3.  Front ;  at  which  the  division  leading  petty  officer 
resumes  his  post.  The  division  junior  officer  then  proceeds  to  front 
and  center,  faces  the  division  and  commands  1.  Hand;  2.  Salute; 
at  which  the  division  executes  the  right-hand  salute.  The  division 
junior  officer  then  faces  about  and  saluting  the  division  officer, 
reports  Sir,  the  division  is  ready  for  inspection.  The  division  officer 
returns  the  salute  and  commands  Post,  Sir,  and  the  division  junior 
officer  takes  post  to  left  and  rear  of  division  officer.  The  division 
officer  then  commands  Two;  at  which  the  men  drop  right  hands  to 
side. 

(96)  The  division  officer,  accompanied  by  the  division  junior 
officer,  proceeds  to  inspect  his  division,  passing  from  the  right  to 
the  left  along  the  front  rank,  and  from  the  left  to  the  right  along 
the  rear  rank. 

{9c)  The  inspection  completed,  the  division  officer  commands 
to  the  diAdsion  junior  officer  Take  charge,  Sir,  and  proceeds  to  the 
front  of  his  head  of  department;  and,  at  parade  rest,  awaits  the 
head  of  department's  order  to  Report. 

(9c?)  The  division  junior  officer  places  himself  in  frort  of  center 
and  commands  1.  Close  ranks;  2.  March;  3  Parade;  4  Rest;  faces 
about  and  takes  the  position  of  parade  rest.     [See  par.  (10).] 

(9aa)  Should  there  be  no  inspection  of  the  division  to  follow  the 
procedure  given  in  paragraph  (8),  the  division  officer  commands 
Take  charge.  Sir,  and  proceeds  to  report  to  his  head  of  department 
as  in  (9c).  The  division  junior  officer  proceeds  to  bring  the  division 
to  the  parade  rest  as  in  (9c?). 


108  SHIP   AND   GUN    DRILLS. 

(10)  Upon  return  of  the  division  officer  to  his  division  he  relieves 
the  division  junior  officer,  who  takes  his  post  in  rear  of  center,  and 
the  division  officer  then  proceeds  to  carry  out  the  routine. 

608.  Succession  in  the  division.^ — In  the  absence  of  the  diA-ision 
officer  his  prescribed  duties  in  the  division  formation  are  taken  by 
the  division  junior  officer;  and  the  duties  prescribed  for  the  division 
junior  officer  are  taken  by  the  division  leading  petty  officer  in  addi- 
tion to  his  own. 

509.  Formation  of  small  divisions,  or  crews. — In  the  case  of 
those  depai-tments  whose  divisions  are  small  units,  the  procedure 
given  in  article  507  should  be  abridged  as  required. 

510.  Formation  after  ''secure." — After  secure  from  every 
drill  or  exercise,  the  divisions  will  assemble  in  the  above  formation. 
The  di^dsion  leading  petty  officer  on  the  right  flank  of  the  division, 
facing  left,  will  command  Fall  In;  1.  Right;  2.  Dress;  3.  Front; 
1.  Parade;  2.  Rest;  and,  resuming  his  post,  comes  to  the  parade 
rest.     The  division  thus  awaits  the  call  retreat. 

511.  Inspections. — 

(1)  By  the  head  of  the  department.— When  the  head  of  department 
inspects  the  divisions  of  his  department  each  diAdsion  officer  places 
himself  on  the  flank  of  the  front  rank  from  which  the  head  of  depart- 
ment approaches,  and  presents  the  division  with  the  command  1. 
Hand;  2.^  Salute;  3.  Two;  and  accompanies  the  head  of  department 
on  his  inspection  of  the  division. 

(2)  By  the  commanding  officer. — The  same  formalities  are  to  be 
observed  as  in  paragraph  (1).  The  head  of  department  will  accom- 
pany the  commanding  officer  when  the  commanding  officer  inspects 
the  divisions  of  his  department. 

Note. — The  front  raiik;  is  not  to  be  faced  about  as  a  matter  of  routine,  unless 
required  for  some  particular  occasion. 

GENERAL  MUSTER. 

512.  Formation.— 

(1)  At  the  call  (No.  64),  heads  of  departments  command,  Division 
officers  take  charge.  Heads  of  departments  then  form  in  rear  of  the 
captain  in  order  of  seniority  from  right  to  left,  at  parade  rest.  _  Each 
diAdsion  officer  marches  his  division  to  its  designated  place  in  the 
massed  formation;  and,  taking  post  on  the  right  or  left  flank  of  the 
division  as  will  bring  him  nearest  to  the  captain,  commands  1. 
Parade;  2.  Rest;  and  takes  the  position  of  parade  rest.  The  division 
junior  officer,  at  parade  rest,  takes  post  in  rear  of  division  officer. 

513.  Ceremony. — 

(1)  When  all  the  di\'isions  are  massed  the  executive  commands 
to  the  bugler  Sound  attention;  to  the  ship's  company  1.  Hand;  2. 
Salute  ;  faces  about,  salutes,  and  reports  to  the  captain  Sir,  all  hands 


PART    VI SHIP   MANUALS.  109 

are  mustered.  The  captain  returns  the  salute  and  commands  Publish, 
the  orders,  Sir.  The  executive  faces  about  and  commands  3.  Two; 
at  which  the  men  drop  the  hands. 

(2)  The  executive  commands  1.  Attention  to  orders;  or  1. 
Articles  for  the  Government  of  the  United  States  Navy,  as  the  case  may 
be;  2.  Parade:  3.  Rest;  and  publishes  the  orders  in  hand. 

(3)  The  orders  published,  the  executive  commands  to  the  bugler 
Sound  attention;  faces  about,  salutes,  and  reports  to  the  captain, 
Sir,  the  orders  are  published.  The  captain  returns  the  salute  and 
commands  Pipe  doivn,  Sir,  or  Carry  on.  Sir,  as  the  case  may  be. 

(4)  The  executive  faces  about  and  commands  to  the  bugler  Sound 
the  assembly;  division  officers  then  march  the  di\isions  to  the  division 
parades,  and  the  heads  of  departments  resume  command  of  their 
departments. 

THE    GUARD    OF  THE    DAY. 

(When  seamen  are  on  guard  duty.) 

514.  The  officer  of  the  guard. — The  officer  of  the  guard 
occupies  a  position  below  decks  analogous  to  that  occupied  by  the 
officer  of  the  deck  above  decks.  He  is  subordinate  to  the  officer 
of  the  deck,  whose  commands  he  must  obey,  but  he  receives  his 
general  orders  from  the  executive,  to  whom  he  reports  directly. 
He  has,  both  above  and  below  decks,  immediate  command  over 
all  that  relates  to  the  interior  discipline  of  the  ship,  and  he  has 
general  charge  of  the  prisoners.  Below  decks  he  is  responsible 
for  the  lower  decks  routine. 

616.  The  chief  petty  officer  of  the  guard. — The  responsi- 
bilities of  the  chief  master-at-arms  are  given  in  A.  G.  N.,  article 
8,  and  the  Regulations.  He  is  the  chief  petty  officer  of  the  guard. 
He  is  subordinate  to  the  officer  of  the  guard.  The  petty  officers 
and  men  of  the  guard  are  subordinate  to  him. 

616.  Lower  deck  petty  officers.— Gunnery  departnaent  and 
engineering  department  divisions  will  detail  petty  officers  in  charge 
of  the  cleaning  and  discipline  of  their  lower  deck  compartments 
and  spaces.  In  matters  of  discipline,  cleaning  and  care  and  preserva- 
tion these  lower  deck  petty  officers  receive  their  orders  from  their 
own  division  officers.  In  matters  of  police  duty  and  lower  decks 
routine  they  receive  their  orders  from  the  officer  of  the  guard  through 
the  chief  master-at-arms. 

617.  Strength  of  the  guard. — 

(1)  In  battle  ships,  armored  cruisers  and  cruisers  of  the  first  class 
the  guard  of  the  day  shall  consist  of — • 

(a)  One  officer  of  the  guard. 

(b)  One  chief  petty  officer  of  the  guard  (the  chief  master-at-arms). 


110  SHIP   AND   GUN    DRILLS. 

(c)  Four  petty  officers  of  the  guard. 

(d)  Twenty-four  men  of  the  guard. 

(2)  Other  types  of  ships  will  not  be  required  to  provide  for  a 
guard  of  the  day  in  their  organizations. 

518.  The  rosters. — (a)  Junior  officers  serve  on  roster  (a),  which 
is  kept  by  the  executive. 

(5)  Chief  petty  officers  of  the  gunnery  department  divisions  may 
serve  on  roster  (6),  which  is  kept  by  the  gunnery  officer. 

(c)  Petty  officers,  first,  second,  and  third  classes,  of  the  gunnery 
department  divisions  serve  on  roster  (c),  which  rosters  are  kept  by 
the  division  officers. 

(d)  Seamen  and  ordinary  seamen  serve  on  roster  (d),  which  rosters 
are  kept  under  the  direction  of  the  division  officers. 

619.  Details  and  tours. — All  guard  details  come  from  the 
section  on  duty  for  the  day.  Every  morning  before  quarters  the 
chief  master-at-arms  shall  report  to  the  di\ision  officers  the  petty 
officers  and  men  of  the  guard  that  are  to  be  furnished  for  the  next 
day;  and  the  division  officer,  at  quarters,  will  have  the  details 
notified,  and  will  cause  a  list  of  his  details  to  be  furnished  to  the 
chief  master-at-arms.  The  tour  of  guard  duty  is  24  hours.  The 
tour  of  a  petty  officer  of  the  guard,  an  orderly  or  sentinel  on  post 
is  2  hours. 

620.  Posts  of  sentinels.— The  strength  of  the  standard  guard 
permits  six  posts.  WTiere  the  posts  are  less  than  six  the  guard  may 
be  organized  into  more  than  four  reliefs;  in  which  case  petty  officers 
additional  to  four  will  be  required  in  the  guard  detail.  WTiere  the 
posts  number  more  than  six,  additional  men  of  the  guard  will  be 
required  in  the  detail,  so  as  not  to  reduce  the  guard  below  four  reliefs. 
The  captain  regulates  the  number  of  posts. 

521.  Uniform  and  arms  of  the  oflB.cer  of  the  guard  and  of 
the  guard. — 

(1)  In  port: 

Officer  of  the  guard— 

(a)  Uniform  of  the  day,  with  leggings. 

(6)  Sword  and  gloves. 
Men — 

(a)  Uniform  of  the  day,  with  leggings. 

(b)  Equipment,  ser^dce  rifle  belt. 

(c)  Arms,  ser\T.ce  rifle;    with  or  without  ammunition,  as 

ordered. 

(2)  At  sea: 

Officer  of  the  guard  and  men  of  the  guard— 

(a)  Uniform  of  the  day,  without  leggings. 

(b)  Eq-iipment,  service  pistol  belt. 

(c)  Arms,   service  pistol  as  ordered;    ^vith    or    ^^ithout 

ammunition,  as  ordered. 


PART    VI SHIP    MANUALS.  Ill 

(3)  The  chief  master-at-arms  is  exempte^rom  wearing  arms  and 
equipment,  and  from  guard  mount  and  all  Srmations. 

(4)  The  division  officers  are  responsible  as  to  the  uniform  of  their 
details  which  report  for  guard  duty,  and  that  their  details  are  fit 
for  duty. 

522.  The  cominander  of  the  guard. — 

(1)  The  officer  of  the  guard  is  the  commander  of  the  guard,  and 
is  responsible  for  its  instruction  and  discipline.  He  will  see  that 
all  its  members  are  correctly  instructed  in  their  orders  and  duties, 
and  that  they  understand  and  properly  perform  them.  He  receives 
and  obeys  the  orders  of  the  commanding  (executive)  officer  and  the 
officer  of  the  deck,  and  reports  to  the  latter  without  delay  all  orders, 
relating  to  the  guard  not  given  or  transmitted  by  the  officer  of  the 
deck;  he  transmits  to  his  successor  all  information  relating  to  his 
duties. 

(2)  He  will  inspect  his  guard  at  sunset,  and  will  then  perfect  its 
orders  and  dispositions  for  the  night. 

(3)  He  will  inspect  the  reliefs  at  8  a.  m.  and  at  8  p.  m.  and  at 
other  times  ordered.  He  will  see  that  the  reliefs  are  posted  every 
two  hours,  excepting  the  dinner  and  supper  reliefs,  which  are  to  be 
posted  at  12.30  p.  m.  and  not  later  than  6.30  p.  m. 

(4)  He  will  question  his  petty  officers  and  sentinels  relating 
to  the  instructions  they  may  have  received  from  the  oZc?  guard; 
he  will  see  that  patrols  and  visits  of  inspection  are  made  as  directed 
by  the  executive  officer. 

(5)  He  will  see  that  the  orders  of  each  sentinel  and  orderly  are 
bulletined  on  each  post. 

(6)  Should  a  member  of  the  guard  be  incapacitated  from  any 
cause  he  will  call  upon  the  man's  division  officer  for  a  relief.  He 
will  enter  in  the  guard  report  a  record  of  his  tour  of  duty,  and, 
on  the  completion  of  his  tour,  will  present  it  to  the  executive  officer. 
He  will  inspect  the  brig  spaces  and  cells  at  least  once  during  his 
tour  of  duty,  and  at  such  other  times  as  he  may  deem  necessary. 
He  will  require  the  chief  master-at-arms  to  report  to  him  after  each 
meal  that  all  meals  sent  to  the  brigs  are,  in  quantity  and  quality,  in 
accordance  with  regulations. 

(7)  Before  guard  mount  he  will  report  to  the  officer  of  the  deck 
the  names  of  all  men  undergoing  punishment  whose  terms  of  con- 
finement expire  that  day. 

(8)  Before  guard  mount  the  old  and  the  new  officer  of  the  guard 
will  together  inspect  and  visit  the  posts. 

(9)  The  new  officer  of  the  guard  will  receipt  to  the  old  officer 
of  the  guard,  in  the  guard  report,  for  the  articles  under  charge  of 
the  guard.  After  guard  mount  both  officers  of  the  guard  report 
to  the  executive.     On  presenting  themselves  both  salute.     The  old 


112  SHIP   AND   GUN   DRILLS. 

officer  of  the  guard,  standing  on  the  right  of  the  new,  presenting  the 
guard  report,  says,  Si/,  I  report  as  the  old  officer  of  the  guard.  As 
soon  as  the  executive  officer  notifies  the  old  officer  of  the  guard 
that  he  is  relieved,  the  new  officer  of  the  guard  says,  Sir,  I  report 
as  the  new  officer  of  the  guard,  and  then  receives  his  instructions. 
623.  The  chief  petty  officer  of  the  guard. — 

(1)  Before  guard  mount  he  will  prepare  triplicate  lists  of  all  the 
petty  officers  and  men  of  the  guard,  showing  the  assignments  to 
reliefs  and  the  number  of  the  relief.  The  petty  officers  ^\ill  be 
assigned  to  reliefs  in  order  of  seniority,  so  that  the  senior  is  the  petty 
officer  of  the  first  relief,  and  so  on.  One  list  will  be  handed  as  soon 
as  practicable  to  the  officer  of  the  guard.  The  other  two  lists  will  be 
separated  into  reliefs,  and  these  furnished  in  duplicate  to  the  petty 
officers  of  the  guard,  who  will  report  to  the  chief  master-at-arms 
immediately  after  breakfast  for  them.  The  "first  relief"  goes  on 
post  at  guard  mount  till  10  a.  m. ;  then  is  followed  in  regular  order  by 
the  second,  third,  and  fourth  reliefs.  He  will  see  that  the  petty 
officers  of  the  guard  thoroughly  understand,  and  are  prompt  and 
efficient  in  the  discharge  of  their  duties. 

(2)  After  morning  quarters  he  will  proceed  to  the  executive's 
office  and  obtain  the  guard  report. 

(3)  He  will  report  to  the  officer  of  the  guard  all  delinquencies 
among  any  men  whatever  that  come  under  his  notice. 

(4)  Under  the  direction  of  the  officer  of  the  guard  he  will  see 
that  the  compartment  division  petty  officers  carry  out  the  lower 
decks  routine  and  the  general  messmen's  routine. 

(5)  He  is  responsible  that  the  special  orders  for  the  petty  offi- 
cers of  the  guard,  and  for  the  sentinels  and  orderlies,  are  bulle- 
tined where  designated  by  the  executive  officer;  and  that  the  copies 
are  up-to-date  as  to  changes  that  may  from  time  to  time  be  ordered 
in  such  special  orders.  He  is  responsible  that  authenticated  copies 
of  all  special  orders  are  posted  in  the  guard  report. 

524.  Petty  officers  of  the  guard.— 

(1)  Petty  officers  of  the  guard  are  assigned  to  reliefs  by  the  chief 
petty  officer  of  the  guard  (the  chief  master-at-arms). 

(2)  A  petty  officer  of  the  guard  receives  and  obeys  orders  from 
none  but  petty  officers  of  the  guard  senior  to  himself,  the  chief  petty 
officer  of  the  guard,  the  officer  of  the  guard,  the  officer  of  the  deck 
and  the  commanding  (executive)  officer. 

(3)  It  is  the  duty  of  the  petty  officer  of  the  guard  to  post  and  relieve 
sentinels,  and  to  instruct  the  members  of  his  relief  in  their  orders 
and  duties.  i 

(4)  Immediately  after  the  petty  officers  receive  the  lists  of  their 
reliefs  from  the  chief  master-at-arms  they  mil  assign  the  men  of 
their  respective  reliefs  to  posts  by  number,  and  a  man  so  assigned 


PART    VI SHIP    MANUALS.  113 

to  a  post  will  not  be  changed  to  another  post  during  the  same  tour 
of  guard  duty,  unless  by  orders  of  the  officer  of  the  guard. 

(5)  Each  petty  officer  will  then  enter  on  his  lists  the  assignments 
of  the  men  to  posts,  and  will  return  one  copy  to  the  chief  master- 
at-arms,  retaining  the  other  for  his  own  use. 

626.  General  duties  of  petty  ofl5,cer  of  the  guard  on  post. — 

(1)  The  petty  officer  of  the  guard  whcse  relief  is  on  post  generally 
will  remain  accessible  to  the  officer  of  the  deck,  although  his  jjost 
extends  throughout  the  ship. 

(2)  He  will  thoroughly  acquaint  himself  with  all  the  special 
orders  of  eveiy  orderly  and  sentinel  on  his  relief,  and  will  see  that 
each  sentinel  correctly  transmits  such  orders  in  detail  to  his  successor. 

(3)  He  will  see  that  each  sentinel  and  orderly  on  being  posted 
clearly  understands  the  limits  and  extent  of  his  post. 

(4)  When  the  ship  is  at  anchor  he  will  exercise  supervision  over 
all  ship 's  gangways,  and  will  report  to  the  officer  of  the  deck  shore 
boats  coming  alongside.  He  will  see  that  no  property  is  passed  over 
the  gangway  unless  authorized. 

(5)  He  will  inspect  the  orderlies  and  sentinels  every  half  hour. 

(6)  He  will  at  once  report  to  the  officer  of  the  guard  any  unbe- 
coming conduct  on  the  part  of  a  sentinel  or  orderly  on  post. 

(7)  He  vrill  at  once  report  to  the  officer  of  the  deck  any  violation 
of  regulations  or  any  unusual  occurrence  reported  to  him  by  a 
sentinel,  or,  coming  to  his  notice  in  any  other  way,  will  arrest  the 
offender  and  bring  him  to  the  officer  of  the  deck. 

(8)  Each  petty  officer  of  the  guard  is  responsible  for  turning  out 
the  men  of  his  own  relief  for  the  night  watches,  and  he  will  wake 
the  petty  officer  whose  relief  is  next  on  post  in  time  for  the  latter  to 
form  his  relief  and  post  it  promptly. 

(9)  Should  the  guard  be  turned  out  during  the  night  watches 
each  petty  officer  will  call  the  men  of  his  own  relief,  and  cause  his 
men  to  fall  in  promptly. 

(10)  The  petty  officers  of  the  guard  ^vill  acquaint  themselves 
with  the  billets  of  the  men  of  their  own  reliefs.  The  guard  should 
be  billeted  together. 

(11)  The  petty  officer  of  the  guard  ^vill  salute  all  officers,  whether 
by  day  or  night. 

(12)  The  petty  officers  of  the  guard  ^-ill  not  remove  their  accou- 
terments  or  clothing  during  their  tour  of  guard  duty,  and  will  not 
absent  themselves  fi'om  the  vicinity  of  the  guard  headquarters 
except  for  meals  and  for  short,  necessarv  absences. 

626.  Men  of  the  guard— 

(1)  Men  of  the  guard  will  not  remove  their  accouterments  or 
clothing  during  their  tour  of  guard  duty,  and  will  not  absent  them- 
selves from  the  guard  headquarters  except  on  permission  from  their 
own  petty  officer. 


114  SHIP   AND   GUN   DRILLS. 

(2)  During  his  tour  of  guard  duty  a  man  is  subject  to  the  orders  of 
the  commanding  (executive)  officer,  the  officer  of  the  deck,  the 
officer  and  petty  officers  of  the  guard  only. 

(3)  Men  are  assigned  to  reliefs  by  the  chief  petty  officer  of  the 
guard  (the  chief  master-at-arms),  and  to  posts  by  the  petty  officer 
of  the  relief.  They  will  not  change  from  one  post  or  relief  to  another 
during  their  tour  of  duty  unless  so  ordered  by  the  officer  of  the 
guard. 

(4)  Men  of  the  guard  supernumerary  to  those  required  for  the 
regularly  established  posts  are  available  for  such  temporary  and 
special  posts  that  may  be  required,  for  shore  patrol  or  beach  guard 
duty.  When  a  ship  becomes  due  for  shore  patrol  or  beach  guard 
duty,  the  strength  of  the  guard  for  that  day  should  be  temporarily 
augmented  for  the  duty. 

527.  Orders  for  sentinels  and  orderlies  on  post. — Orders 
for  men  on  post  are  divided  into  two  classes,  general  orders  and 
special  orders.  All  men  liable  for  guard  duty  will  be  required  to 
memorize  the  following: 

GENERAL  ORDERS. 

My  general  orders  are: 

(1)  To  take  charge  of  this  post  and  all  Government  property  in 
view. 

(2)  To  walk  my  post  in  a  military  manner,  keeping  on  my  feet 
and  constantly  alert,  observing  everything  that  takes  place  within 
sight  or  hearing. 

(3)  To  report  all  violations  of  orders  or  regulations  that  I  am 
instructed  to  enforce. 

(4)  To  quit  my  post  only  when  properly  relieved. 

(5)  To  receive,  transmit,  and  obey  all  orders  from,  and  to  allow 
myself  to  be  relieved  by  the  commanding  (executive)  officer, 
officer  of  the  deck,  officer  of  the  guard,  or  a  petty  officer,  of  the  guard. 

(6)  To  talk  to  no  one  except  in  line  of  duty.  To  read  nothing  on 
post  except  my  general  and  special  orders. 

(7)  To  learn  my  special  orders. 

(8)  In  case  of  fire  or  disorder  to  give  the  alarm. 

(9)  To  salute  all  officers,  passing  boats  carrying  officers,  and  passing 
ships  of  war. 

(10)  To  be  especially  watchful  at  night. 

(11)  In  any  case  not  covered  by  instructions  to  call  the  petty 
officer  of  the  guard. 

GUARD  MOUNTING. 

528.  Guard  mounting  will  be  held  on  the  parade,  or  at  such, 
place  as  the  commanding  officer  may  direct,  of  the  organization 
from  which  the  guard  is  detailed. 


PART   VI SHIP    MANUALS.  115 

529.  At  assembly  the  detail  for  the  guard  falls  in  on  the  parade. 
The  cliief  petty  officer  verifies  the  detail,  inspects  their  dress  and 
general  appearance,  and  replaces  any  man  unfit  to  march  on  guard. 
He  then  turns  the  detail  over  to  the  commander  of  the  guard  and 
retires. 

530.  At  adjutant's  call,  the  officer  of  the  day  takes  his  place 
in  front  of  the  center  of  the  guard  and  commands: 

1.  Officer  (or  officers)  and  petty  officers;  2.  Front  and  center; 
3.  March;  whereupon  the  officers  and  petty  officers,  take  their 
positions,  are  assigned  and  sent  to  their  posts  as  prescribed  in  article 
2224,   -'Landing  Force  Manual." 

631.  The  officer  of  the  day  will  then  inspect  the  guard  with 
especial  reference  to  its  fitness  for  the  duty  for  which  it  is  detailed, 
and  will  select  as  prescribed  by  ship's  organization  the  necessary 
orderlies  and  sentries.  The  men  found  unfit  for  guard  will  be 
relieved  and  will  be  replaced  by  others  found  to  be  suitable,  if 
available  in  the  organization.  If  none  are  available  in  the  organi- 
zation the  fact  will  be  reported  to  the  adjutant  immediately  after 
guard  mounting. 

632.  When  the  inspection  shall  have  been  completed,  the  officer 
of  the  day  resumes  his  position  and  directs  the  commander  of  the 
guard  to  march  the  guard  to  its  post. 

RELIEVING  THE    OLD    GTTARD. 

633.  As  the  new  guard  approaches  the  parade  of  the  old  guard  or 
such  place  as  has  been  assigned  for  the  old  guard,  the  old  guard  is 
formed  in  line  ydXh.  the  music  3  paces  to  its  right;  and  the  commander 
of  the  new  guard  commands:  1.  Eyes,  2.  Right;  the  commander 
of  the  old  guard  commands:  1.  Present;  2.  Arms;  commanders 
of  both  guards  salute.  The  new  guard  marches  in  quick  time  past 
the  old  guard. 

634.  \\Tien  the  commander  of  the  new  guard  is  opposite  the 
music  of  the  old  guard,  he  commands:  Front;  the  commander  of 
the  old  guard  commands:  1.  Order;  2.  Arms,  as  soon  as  the  new 
guard  shall  have  cleared  the  old  guard. 

635.  The  music  having  marched  3  paces  beyond  the  music  of 
the  old  guard,  changes  direction  to  the  right,  and,  followed  by  the 
guard,  changes  direction  to  the  left  when  on  line  ^^•ith  thf  old  guard; 
the  changes  of  direction  are  ^^"ithout  command.  The  commander 
of  the  guard  halts  on  line  of  the  front  rank  of  the  old  guard,  allows 
his  guard  to  march  past  him,  and  when  its  rear  approaches  him 
forms  it  in  line  to  the  left,  establishes  the  left  guide  3  paces  to  the 
right  of  the  music  of  the  old  guard,  and  on  line  with  the  front  rank, 

7431°— 23 9 


116  SHIP   AND    GUN   DRILLS. 

and  then  dresses  his  guard  to  the  left;  the  music  of  the  new  guard  is 
3  paces  to  the  right  of  its  front  rank. 

536.  The  new  guard  being  dressed,  the  commander  of  each 
guard,  in  front  of,  and  facing  its  center,  commands:  1.  Present;  2. 
Arms;  and  resumes  his  front,  salutes,  carries  sword,  faces  his  guard, 
and  commands:  1.  Order;  2.  Arms. 

537.  Should  a  guard  be  commanded  by  a  petty  officer  he  stands 
on  the  right  or  left  flank,  according  as  he  commands  the  old  or  new 
guard,  and  executes  the  rifle  salute. 

638.  After  the  new  guard  arrives  at  its  post,  and  has  saluted 
the  old  guard,  each  guard  is  presented  by  its  commander  to  its 
officer  of  the  day;  if  there  be  but  one  officer  of  the  day  present,  or  if 
one  officer  acts  in  the  capacity  of  old  and  new  officer  of  the  day, 
each  guard  is  presented  to  him  by  its  commander. 

539.  If  other  persons  entitled  to  a  salute  approach,  each  com- 
mander of  the  guard  will  bring  his  own  guard  to  attention,  if  not 
already  at  attention.  The  senior  commander  of  the  two  guards 
will  then  command:  1.  Old  and  new  guard;  2.  Present;  3.  Arms. 

540.  The  junior  officer  of  the  guard  will  salute  at  the  command 
Present  arms,  given  by  the  senior.  After  the  salute  has  been  ac- 
knowledged the  senior  will  bring  both  guards  to  the  order. 

541.  After  the  salutes  have  been  acknowledged  by  the  officers 
of  the  day,  each  guard  is  brought  to  the  order  by  its  commander; 
the  commander  of  the  new  guard  then  directs  the  orderly  or  orderlies 
to  fall  out  and  report,  and  causes  bayonets  to  be  fixed  if  so  ordered 
by  the  commanding  officer, 

542.  The  commander  of  the  guard  then  divides  the  guard  into 
three  reliefs,  first,  second,  and  third,  from  right  to  left,  and  directs  a 
list  of  the  guard  to  be  made  out  by  reliefs. 

543.  The  sentinels  of  the  old  guard  are  at  once  relieved  by  mem- 
bers of  the  new  guard,  the  two  guards  standing  at  ease  or  at  rest 
while  these  changes  are  being  made.  The  commander  of  the  old 
guard  transmits  to  the  commander  of  the  new  all  his  orders,  instruc- 
tions, and  information  concerning  the  guard  and  its  duties. 

544.  The  sentinels  of  the  old  guard  "having  been  relieved,  take 
post  on  the  left  of  the  old  guard.  The  old  commander  of  the  guard 
then  inspects  the  arms  of  his  guard  and  causes  the  detachment  to 
be  marched  to  its  parade  and  dismissed. 

545.  In  bad  weather  or  when  the  guard  is  small  the  music  may 
be  dispensed  with. 

546.  General  instructions. — 

(I)  At  quarters  for  muster  in  fair  weather,  the  guard  of  the  day 
falls  in  at  the  point  where  the  guard  assembles  for  rendering  side 
honors.  In  foul  weather  the  guard  of  the  day  falls  in  at  the  guard 
chest. 


PART   VI SHIP    MANUALS.  117 

(2)  At  all  emergency  drills  the  guard  of  the  day  assembles  as 
above. 

(3)  At  dhdsion  drills  and  exercises  the  guard  is  dismissed  to 
the  divisions  on  the  drill  call;  the  relief  on  posts  is  relieved  by 
the  chief  master-at-arms  and  the  designated  drill  reliefs. 

(4)  At  battle  drills  the  guard  answers  the  battle  drill  calls  directly; 
the  relief  on  posts  being  relieved  by  the  petty  officer  of  the  guard, 
and  by  him  dismissed  to  the  divisions. 

(5)  On  the  retreat  from  drills  and  exercises  the  guard  call  is  to  be 
sounded,  the  guard  assembled,  the  posts  reestalolished,  and  the 
relief  posted. 

647.  Detailed  instructions. — See  Landing  Force  and  Small 
Arms  Instructions,  1920,  Chapter  II,  which,  where  not  modified 
and  abridged  in  the  foregoing,  should  govern  guard  duty. 


Part  VII. 
PHYSICAL  EXERCISES. 


Physical  Activity  Exercises 121 

Bayonet  Exercise 121 

Physical  Drill  With  Arms 131 

Physical  Drill  Without  Arms 138 

Mass  Cheering  and  Singing 156 

119 


PHYSICAL  EXERCISES. 


PHYSICAL   ACTIVITY   EXERCISES. 

601.  In  addition  to  the  physical  exercises  prescribed  as  standard 
for  all  the  personnel  in  the  Navy,  so-called  "activity  exercises' '  for 
officers  are  necessary.  The  mere  perfunctory  performances  of  certain 
bodily  movements  can  not  produce  physical  fitness.  It  has  been 
shown  durino;  the  World  War  that  men  performing  duties  which  are 
not  of  an  outside  or  physically  active  nature  require  special  exercises 
to  develop  the  abdomen  and  maintain  the  liver,  kidneys,  and  organs 
in  good  condition. 

602.  All  officers  are  urged  to  daily  take  some  special  form  of 
•'activity  exercise"  which  will  prevent  taking  on  excessive  flesh 
and  tend  to  keep  all  organs  of  the  body  in  good  condition.  Such 
movements  as  the  so-called  'Daily  dozen"  and  other  movements 
designed  to  be  used  in  the  morning  or  at  night  are  highly  recom- 
mended. It  is  considered  that  these  are  essential  in  addition  to  all 
other  physical  exercises  which  may  be  taken.  And  when  no  opportu- 
nity permits  of  getting  athletic  exercises  aboard  ship,  such  as  in  a 
destroyer  or  submarine  service,  it  is  imperative  that  all  personnel 
take  some  form  of  "'daily  activity  exercise." 

603.  It  is  believed  that  young  officers  and  especially  those  who 
have  had  the  perfect  physical  training  at  the  Naval  Academy 
deteriorate  physically  more  quickly  than  is  to  be  expected.  This 
is  believed  to  be  particularly  due  to  a  lack  of  attention  paid  to  the 
"activity  upkeep"  of  the  body  and  lack  of  participation  in  outdoor 
sports  such  :s  walking,  swimming,  tennis,  golf,  soccer,  football, 
shooting,  fishing,  and  other  similar  diversions  which  are  presented 
in  one  or  more  forms  throughout  the  service. 

BAYONET   EXERCISE. 

Note.— This  drill  is  considered  to  be  valuable  as  preliminary  training  for  exer- 
cises laid  down  in  ''Landing  Force  Instructions,  1921." 

604.  To  take  intervals  or  distance. — Intervals  or  distances  are 
taken  as  prescribed  in  the  drill  regulations. 

605.  The  guard. — (1)  Intervals  or  distances  ha\dng  been  taken, 
and  the  squad  being  at  the  order,  bayonets  fixed,  the  instructor 

121 


122  SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

commands:  1.  Bayonet  exercise,  2.  Guard.  At  the  first  command, 
pieces  are  brousht  to  the  port;  at  the  second  command,  half  face 
to  the  right,  carry  back  and  place  the  right  foot  about  twice  its 
length  to  the  rear,  the  hollow  of  the  right  foot  in  the  rear  of  the  left 
heel,  the  feet  at  a  little  less  than  a  right  angle,  the  right  toe  pointing 
to  the  right,  both  knees  slightly  bent,  body  erect  on  the  hips,  the 
weight  thrown  a  little  more  on  the  right  leg  than  on  the  left;  at  the 
same  time  throw  the  point  of  the  bayonet  to  the  front,  at  the  height  of 
the  chin,  barrel  to  the  left,  the  small  of  the  stock  directly  in  fi'ont 
of  the  center  of  the  body  below  the  belt,  the  left  hand  below  the 
sight  with  the  thumb  along  the  barrel,  both  arms  free  fi'om  the  body, 
without  constraint  (pi.  12). 


Plate  12.     The  guard. 

(2)  Being  at  guard:  1.  Order,  2.  Arms.  Resume  the  orc?er  as  from 
charge  bayonet. 

606.  The  steps. — (1)  Advance:  Move  the  left  foot  quickly 
forward  8  inches;  follow  with  the  right  foot  the  same  distance. 

(2)  Retire:  Move  the  right  foot  quickly  to  the  rear  8  inches; 
follow  ^vith  the  left  foot  the  same  distance. 

(3)  1.  Step  right,  2.  Step:  Move  the  right  foot  quickly  to  the 
right  8  inches;  follow  with  the  left  foot  to  its  relative  position  in 
front. 

(4)  1.  Step  left,  2.  Step:  Move  the  left  foot  quickly  to  the  left 
8  inches;  follow  with  the  right  foot  to  its  relative  position  in  rear. 

(5)  1.  Front,  2.  Double  :"Advance  the  right  foot  quickly  8  inches 
in  front  of  the  left,  keeping  the  right  toe  to  the  right;  then  advance 
the  left  foot  to  its  relative  position  in  front. 


PART    VII PHYSICAL    EXERCISES. 


123 


(6)  1.  Rear,  2.  Double  Carry  the  left  foot  quickly  8  inches  to 
the  rear  of  the  right ;  then  place  the  right  foot  in  its  relative  position 
in  rear. 

607.  The  facings.— (1)  1.  Face^  right  (or  left),  2.  Face  At  the 
first  command,  bring  the  piece  quickly  to  the  port;  at  the  second 
command,  face  to  the  right,  turning  on  the  ball  of  the  left  foot,  at 
the  same  time  caiTy  the  right  foot  quickly  to  its  relative  position  in 
rear  and  resume  the  guard\]}\.  13). 


^&'=- 


IMnte   V',. 
'acin.^s.  Fir^l  position 


rintc    14. 
Kiglit  luw  parry. 


"^^^^^% 


Left  h»w   [tarry. 


(2)  1.  Right  (or  left)  about,  2.  Face.  Similarly  executed,  facing 
about  on  the  ball  of  the  left  foot. 

(3)  The  foregoing  movements  are  first  executed  ^ri.thout  arms, 
hands  on  hips,  fingers  to  the  front,  thumbs  to  the  rear,  elbows  pressed 
back. 

608.  The  parries.— (1)  In  the  preliminary  drills,  after  the 
parries  and  thrusts,  the  position  of  guard  is  resumed,  by  the  com- 
mand,   Guard!  after  each  movement. 

(2)  1.  Right  (or  left),  2.  Parry:  Move  the  point  of  the  bayonet 
quickly  about  6  inches  to  the  right. 


124 


SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 


(3)  1.  Right  low,  2.  Parry:  Raise  the  butt  outside  the  right  fore- 
arm, the  right  hand  at  the  height  of  the  breast;  at  the  same  time 
describe  a  semicircle  from  left  to  right  with  the  point  of  the  bayonet 
until  it  is  at  the  height  of,  and  a  little  to  the  right  of,  the  right  knee; 
barrel  to  the  left  (pi.  14). 

(4)  1.  Left  low,  2.  Parry:  Lower  the  point  of  the  bayonet,  de- 
scribing a  semicii'cle,  and  carry  it  to  the  left  at  the  height  of,  and  a 
little  to  the  left  of,  the  left  knee;  barrel  to  the  left,  the  right  hand 
opposite  the  left  breast  (pi.  15). 

(5)  1.  High,  2.  Parry:  Raise  the  piece  quickly  with  both  hands, 
the  right  hand  3  inches  in  front  of,  and  4  inches  above,  the  head; 
the  barrel  down  and  supported  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger 


Plate  16.     High  parry. 


of  the  left  hand  above  the  sight,  the  piece  directed  to  the  front  with 
the  point  of  the  bayonet  opposite  the  left  shoulder;  at  the  same  time 
bend  both  knees  slightly  more  than  in  the  position  of  guard  (pi.  16). 

(6)  1.  High  right  (or  left),  2.  Parry:  Executed  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  the  high  parry,  except  that  the  left  shoulder  is  advanced,  and 
the  point  of  the  bayonet  directed  to  the  right  (pi.  17). 

(7)  In  the  different  parries  the  pieces  should  be  so  held  as  to 
cover  the  point  attacked.  When  the  men  ha^e  become  proficient, 
they  will  be  instructed  to  resume  the  guard  without  command. 

609.  The  thrusts. — (1)  1.  Straiejht,  2.  Thrust:  Carry  the  upper 
part  of  the  body  forward,  advance  the  right  shoulder,  straighten 
the  right  leg,  and  bend  the  left  knee;  at  the  same  time  thrust 


TART   VII PHYSICAL   EXERCISES. 


125 


the  piece  directly  to  the  front  to  the  full  length  of  the  right  arm. 
slipping  it  through  the  left  hand,  barrel  up,  the  bayonet  and  the 
butt  at  height  of  the  chin  (pi.  18). 

(2)  The  straight  thrust  should  be  executed  frequently  in  order 
to  strengthen  the  wrist.  It  may  be  executed  directly  from  the 
guard,  or  from  the  right  and  left  parries,  and  the  guard  should  be 
resumed  promptly  to  keep  control  of  the  piece.     In  thrusting,  the 


^late  17.     High  left  parry. 


piece  must  be  held  so  as  to  cover  the  point  most  exposed  to  the 
enemy's  attack. 

(3)  The  thrusts  from  the  different  parries  are  made  with  the  right 
leg  always  straightened,  and  the  body  carried  forward  as  in  the 
straight  thrust. 

(4)  1.  Right  (or  left),  2.  Parry,  3.  Thrust,  4.  Guard.  Execute 
the  straight  thrust. 

(5)  1.  Right  low,  2.  Parry,  3.  Thrust,  4.  Guard.  Thrust  to 
the  full  extent  of  the  left  arm,  barrel  to  the  left,  bayonet  at  the 
height  of  the  waist,  right  hand  at  the  height  of  the  breast,  keeping 
the  left  hand  fast,  stock  outside  the  right  forearm  (pi.  19). 

(6)  1.  Left  low,  2.  Parry,  3.  Thrust,  4.  Guard.  Thrust  to 
the  full  extent  of  the  left  arm,  barrel  to  the  left,  bayonet  at  the 
height  of  the  waist,  right  hand  at  the  height  of  the  breast,  keeping 
the  left  hand  fast,  stock  outside  the  right  forearm. 


126  SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

(7)  1.  High  (or  High  right,  or  High  left),  2.  Parry,  3.  Thrust, 
4,  Guard.  Thrust  in  the  designated  direction  to  the  full  extent 
of  the  left  arm,  barrel  down,  right  hand  above,  and  in  front  of,  the 
head,  keeping  the  left  hand  fast. 

(8)  The  command  for  the  thrust  quickly  follows  the  parry. 

(9)  In  the  same  manner  a  thrust  may  be  executed  directly  from 
the  position  of  guard,  in  the  direction  of  any  jparry,  by  one  command: 
1.  High,  2.  Thrust,  3.  Guard;  or,  1.  Right  low,  2.  Thrust, 
3.  Guard,  etc.  (pi.  20). 

(10)  1.  Low  right,  2.  Short:  Throw  the  body  backward,  straighten 
the  left  leg  and  bend  the  right  knee;  at  the  same  time  draw  the 
piece  back  quickly  to  the  full  length  of  the  right  arm,  lowering  the 


Plate  18.     Straight  thrust. 

butt  about  6  inches  below  the  right  hip,  slipping  the  left  hand  up  to 
the  upper  band,  barrel  up,  left  hand  at  the  height  of  the  hip,  right 
hand  at  small  of  the  stock  (pi.  21). 

(11)  1.  Low  right,  2.  Short,  3.  Thrust  (or  Straight  Thrust): 
Throw  the  body  forward  on  the  hips,  straighten  the  right  leg,  and 
bend  the  left  knee;  at  the  same  time  thrust  the  piece  forward 
quickly  to  the  full  length  of  the  left  arm  without  moving  the  hands, 
barrel  up,  both  hands  at  the  height  of  the  waist  (pi.  22). 

(12)  Should  the  adversary  retreat,  the  straight  thrust  must  be  used. 

( 13)  Being  at  low  right  short :  To  'parry,  move  the  point  of  the  bayo- 
net as  in  right  or  left  parry  without  moving  the  hands. 

610.  To  use  the  butt. — (1)  Butt  to  front:  Raise  the  piece 
nearly  vertical  and  bring  it  back,   barrel  in  the  hollow  of  right 


PART    VII PHYSICAL    EXERCISES.  127 

shoulder,  strike  quickly  the  butt  to  the  front,  straighten  the  right 
leg,  barrel  resting  on  the  shoulder  (pi.  23). 

(2)  Butt  to  right  (or  left):  Face  right  (or  left)  and  proceed 
as  in  bidt  to  front.     In  resuming  the  guard,  face  left  (or  right). 

(3)  Butt  to  rear:  Turn  to  the  right  on  both  heels,  keeping 
the  feet  nearly  at  a  right  angle,  right  toe  to  the  rear,  at  the  same  time 
raise  the  piece  over  the  left  shoulder,  barrel  down  and  horizontal, 
back  of  right  hand  against  left  side  of  neck,  left  hand  near  lower 
hand,  left  leg  straight;  strike  quickly  the  butt  to  the  rear  (pi. 24). 


Plate  19.     Right  low  thrust. 

(4)  In  resuming  the  guard,  turn  to  the  left  on  both  heels,  and 
bring  the  left  toe  to  the  front. 

611.  To  change  guard. — (1).  1.  Change  guard,  2.  Rear:  Turn 
to  the  right  on  both  heels,  raising  the  toes,  and  face  quickly  to  the 
rear;  at  the  same  time  raise  the  point  of  the  bayonet  in  a  semicircle, 
and  throw  the  piece  to  the  rear,  releasing  it  for  an  instant  with  both 
hands  and  then  grasp  it  again  wdth  the  hands  interchanged,  the  right 
hand  below  the  sight  and  the  left  at  the  small  of  the  stock,  the  barrel 
to  the  right  in  the  position  of  guard  (p\.  25). 

(2)  The  parries  and  thrusts,  facings,  steps,  and  other  movements 
may  then  be  executed  according  to  the  foregoing  principles. 

(3)  To  resume  the  original  front,  the  commands  are  the  same,  and 
the  movement  is  executed  in  a  similar  manner. 

612.  Combinations. — (1)  When  the  recruits  are  thoroughly 
familiar  with  the  different  steps,  parries,  and  thrusts,  the  instructor 


128  SHIP   AND    GUN   DRILLS. 

combines  several  of  them  by  giving  the  commands  in  quick  suc- 
cession, increasing  the  rapidity  and  number  of  movements  in  com- 
bination as  the  men  acquire  skill :  Advance,  high  parry,  thrust; 
or  Front  double,  right  parry,  thrust;  Face  left,  high  parry 
THRUST,  etc. 

(2)  The  guard  is  resumed  without  command. 

(3)  Every  movement  to  the  front  should  be  followed  by  a  thrust; 
every  movement  to  the  rear  by  a  jparry. 

(4)  The  cautionary  command,  attack,  may  be  used  preceding  a 
combination  of  movements. 


Plate  20.     High  thrust. 

(5)  To  repeat  a  combination,  the  numerals  one,  two,  three,  etc., 
may  be  used  instead  of  repeating  the  commands. 

(6)  It  is  intended  merely  to  prescribe  the  manner  of  executing 
the  movements  laid  down,  but  not  to  restrict  the  number  of  move- 
ments, leaving  to  the  discretion  of  c.  cs.  and  the  ingenuity  of  in- 
structors the  selection  of  such  other  exercises  as  accord  with  the 
object  of  the  drill. 

(7)  As  soon  as  the  movements  are  executed  accurately,  the  com- 
mands are  given  rapidly,  expertness  in  the  bayonet  exercise  depend- 
ing mostly  on  quickness  of  motion. 

613.  Bayonet  fighting. — (1)  The  man-o'-warsman  should  un- 
derstand the  application  of  the  foregoing  in  attack  and  defense. 
To  that  end  men  must  engage  in  the  assault.  This  requires  masks, 
padded  clothing,  padded  gloves,  dummy  rifles,  and  spring  dummy 


PART    VII PHYSICAL   EXERCISES.  129 

bayonets.  As  a  preliminary  men  should  practice  the  thrusts  at  a 
wall  pad  or  suspended  dummy;  first  from  a  stand,  second  approaching 
at  a  walk,  and  third  approaching  at  the  "double. ' '  Practice  in  the 
use  of  the  butt  in  attack  at  close  quarters  should  also  be  had  against 
the  dummy. 

(2)  A  half-hearted  bayonet  attack  is  dangerous  only  to  the  attacker. 
The  attack  must  be  resolute,  rapid,  and  pushed  well  home.  Even 
if  an  attack  which  has  been  delivered  with  determination  and 
energy  is  parried,  the  very  resolution  -w-ith  which  it  was  delivered 
tends  to  so  upset  the  adversary  that  he  is  unable  to  return.     There 


Plate  21.     Low  rlgbt  short. 

should  be  a  quick  recovery  after  an  attack,  and  a  quick  return 

when  attacked. 

614.  Assault  exercise  I. — Two  men  face  each  other  at  about 
10  yards,  e(i nipped  for  the  assault.  On  the  word  "charge"  from 
the  instructor,  both  advance  at  the  walk,  pieces  at  the  trail.  A, 
when  A^-ithin  reach,  attacks,  doing  his  best  to  hit  his  opponent. 
B  endeavors  to  parry  and  return.  This  should  be  practiced  in  each 
line  of  attack,  given  out  in  advance  by  the  instructor,  B  taking  care, 
at  the  start,  to  show  sufficient  opening  to  the  attack.  Each  man 
knows  exactly  what  his  opponent  is  going  to  do,  and  there  must  be 
no  attempt  to  deceive  the  other.  The  attack  must  be  made  only  in 
the  line  indicated,  ^^'ith  speed  and  determination,  and  both  men  must 
do  their  best  to  hit.  The  man  who  makes  an  unsuccessful  attack 
should  endeavor  to  close  in  on  his  opponent,  to  get  inside  his  oppo- 
nent's bayonet,  with  a  view  to  tripping  and  using  his  butt.     The 


130 


SHIP    AND    GUN    DRILLS. 


raan  who  makes  a  successful  parry  should  at  once  return  and  try  to 
hit  his  opponent  by  any  means  he  has  been  taught. 


Plate  22.     The  low  right  short  thrust. 

615.  Assault  exercise  II. — Two  men  equipped  for  the  assault 
are  placed  facing  each  other  at  about  30  paces.     A  is  directed  to 


Plate  23.    Butt  to  front. 

attack,  B  to  defend.     On  the  word  ''charge"  both  move  forward 
on  a  steady  double,  pieces  at  the  trail.     A  delivers  a  determined 


PART    VII PHYSICAL   EXERCISES. 


131 


attack  on  B.  B  must  parry  and  immediately  return.  A  must  under- 
stand that  this  attack  must  be  delivered  without  hesitation,  for  it 
will  be  impossible  to  stop  and  '  'fence  "  for  an  opening.  The  above 
is  then  reversed,  B  attacks,  A  defends.  This  exercise  should  con- 
tinue, the  instructor  giving  each  man  the  same  opportunity  to  attack 
and  parry  in  a  given  line.  In  the  assault  exercises,  when  a  man  is 
hit,  he  should  sing  out  "hit." 


Plate  24. 
Butt  to  rear. 


Plate  25. 
Change  guard  rear. 


PHYSICAL    DRILL    WITH    ARMS. 


616.  General  rules. — (1)  All  movements  in  this  section  are 
4-counts,  and,  except  "Coming  to  ready,"  are  performed  two  (or 
four)  times. 

(2)  The  exercises  may  be  executed  by  command,  or  to  music,  or 
silently  following  the  motions  of  a  leader,  and  may  be  discontinued 
by  the  comm^and  Halt,  when  the  Order  will  be  resumed. 
_  (3)  Take  intervals  or  distance  as  prescribed  in  the  drill  regula- 
tions. 

617.  Coining  to  ready. — Commands:  Come  to  ready — 1,  2,  3. 
(PI.  26.) 

1.  Raise  the  piece  with  the  right  hand,  grasp  it  \vith  the  left  at 
the  height  of  the  right  shoulder,  knuckles  toward  the  body.  The 
right  hand  will  grasp  the  small  of  the  stock,  forefinger  under  the 
guard . 


7431 


-23- 


-10 


132 


SHIP   AND   GUN    DRILLS. 


2.  Let  the  piece  drop  in  front  of  the  body  to  a  horizontal,  slings 
down,  keeping  the  body  erect. 

3.  Raise  the  piece  horizontally  to  the  height  of  the  shoulders, 
slings  up,  at  the  same  time  moving  the  left  foot  to  the  left  about  12 
inches.  Keep  the  chest  out,  and  the  shoulders  well  back.  This 
position  is  Ready,  and  is  the  starting  point  of  all  the  movements 
under  the  arms. 

618.  First  exercise — Down  and  forward. — Special  Action. — 
The  muscles  of  the  hips,  back,  and  arms.  Commands:  Down  and 
Forward— 1,  2,  3,  4;  1,  2,  3,  4,  etc.     (PI.  27.) 


Fig.    1. 

'Coming  to  Ready, 

First   Position. 


Plate  26. 

Fig.   2. 

"Coming  to  Ready,* 

Second   Position. 


Fig.   3. 
"Ready.' 


1.  From  Beady,  lower  the  piece  horizontally  to  the  insteps,  keeping 
arms  and  knees  (if  possible)  straight. 

2.  Back  to  Ready,  chest  out,  elbows  back. 

3.  Push  piece  horizontally  forward. 

4.  Back  to  Ready. 

619.  Second  exercise — Forward  and  Up. — Special  Action. — 
The  muscles  of  the  arms,  and  of  side  walls  of  the  chest. 

Commands:  Forward  and  Up.— I,  2,  3,  4;  1,  2,  3,  4.     (PI.  28.) 

1.  From  Ready,  push  out  horizontally  forward,  as  in  the  last 
exercise. 

2.  Back  to  Ready,  chest  out,  elbows  back. 


PART    VTI PHYSICAL    EXERCISES. 


133 


Plate  27. 

Fig.  1.  Fi-.   2. 

'Dowu  and  Forward,"   End  of  "Down  and  Forward,"   End  of 

First    Count.  Third    Count. 


Plate  28. 
'Forward  and  Up,"  Third  Count. 


Plate  20. 

"Up  and   Shoulders,"   Second 

Count. 


134 


SHIP   AND   GUN   DRILLS. 


3.  Push  the  piece  to  high  vertical,  keeping  it  horizontal,  and 
expanding   chest. 

4.  Back  to  Ready. 

620.  Third  exercise — ^Up  and  shoulders. — Special  Action. — 
The  muscles  of  the  arms,  and  of  the  side  and  front  walls  of  the  chest. 
Commands:   Up  and  Shoulders— 1,  2,  3,  4;  1,  2,  3,  4.     (PI.  29.) 
1.  From  Ready,  push  the  piece  to  vertical,  as  in  last  exercise. 


Plate  no. 
'Side  ruNli.-s.     ihird  Couqt. 


'Diagonal  Lunges,"  First  Count. 


2.  Lower  piece  to  back  of  shoulders,  head  up,  elbows  well  back. 

3.  Up  again  to  vertical. 

4.  Down  to  Ready. 

621.  Fourth  exercise — Side  pushes. — Special  Action. — The 
rotary  muscles  of  the  body  and  thighs;  the  loin  muscles. 

(^ommands:  Side  Pushes— 1,  2,  3,  4;  1,  2,  3,  4.     (PI.  30.) 

1.  From.  Ready,  push  the  piece  horizontally  to  right  side,  twisting 
the  body,  keeping  the  eyes  on  the  piece,  but  keeping  the  heels 
firmly  on  deck. 

2.  Back  to  Ready,  chest  out,  elbows  back. 

3.  Push  the  piece  to  the  left  side. 

4.  VtdiCk  to  Ready. 

622.  Fifth  exercise — Diagonal  lunges. — Special  Action.— 
The  muscles  of  the  arms,  back,  and  legs. 

Commands:  Diagonal  Lunges — 1,  2,  3,  4;  1,  2,  3,  4.  (PI.  31.) 


PART    VII PHYSICAL   EXERCISES. 


13i 


1.  From  Ready,  lunge  diagonally  to  the  right,  about  36  inches, 
with  the  right  leg,  at  the  same  time  bringing  the  piece  up  horizontally 
to  45°.  The  left  foot  should  be  flat,  and  the  eyes  directed  to  the 
piece. 

2.  Back  to  Ready,  chest  out,  elbows  back. 

3.  Lunge  to  the  left  -v^dth  left  leg,  as  above. 

4.  Back  to  Ready. 

623.  Sixth  exercise — Forward  lunges. — Special  Action. — 
The  muscles  of  the  arms  and  legs  and  the  side  walls  of  the  chest. 


Plate 
'Forward  Lunges.' 


Third  Count. 


Plate  3.^. 
"Front    Sweeps." 


Commands:  Forward  Lunges— I,  2,  3,  4;  1,  2,  3  4.     (PI.  32.) 

1.  From  Ready,  lunge  directly  to  the  front,  about  36  inches,  with 
right  leg,  at  the  same  time  raising  piece  horizontally  to  vertical,  and 
directing  the  eves  to  the  piece.     Keep  left  foot  flat. 

2.  Back  to  Ready. 

3.  Lunge  to  the  front  ^\ith  left  leg,  as  above. 

4.  Back  to  i?m(/j/. 

624.  Seventh.  Exercise — Front  sweeps. — Special  Action. — 
All  the  principal  posterior  muscles  of  the  body. 


136 


SHIP    AND    GUN    DRILLS. 


Commands:  Front  Siveeps,  Slow — 1,  2,  3,  4;  1,  2,  3,  4.     (PI.  33.) 

1.  From  Ready,  raise  the  piece  horizontally  to  high  vertical,  keep- 
ing the  chest  well  out,  and  emphasizing  the  upstretch. 

2.  Lower  the  piece  slowly  in  front  semicircle  to  insteps,  keeping 
the  arms  straight  and  emphasizing  the  outreach. 

3.  Raise  the  piece  slowly  in  front  semicircle  to  vertical. 

4.  Down  to  Ready. 


F!.2.  1. 

•Overhead    Twists, 

Biut  Forward. 


Plate  34. 

Fi-.   2. 
'Overbead    Twists," / Muzzle    Forwaro. 
(Side    view.) 


625.  Eighth,  exercise — Overhead  twists. — Special  Action. — 
The  rotary  muscles  of  the  upper  part  of  the  body;  also  stimulates 
the  venous  circulation. 

Commands:  Overhead  Tidsts,  Butt  Forivard — 1,  2,  3,  4;  Muzzle 
Forward— 1,  2,  3,  4.     (PL  34.) 

1.  From  Ready,  raise  the  piece  overhead,  at  the  same  time  twisting 
it  till  the  butt  points  directly  forward.     Keep  the  piece  horizontal. 

2.  Twist  the  piece  to  the  right  until  the  muzzle  points  directly 
forward.  Hold  the  hips  firmly  forward,  confining  the  moA'ement  to 
the  upper  part  of  the  body. 


PART   \^I PHYSICAL   EXERCISES. 


ur 


3.  Twist  back  till  the  butt  points  directly  forward. 

4.  Lower  the  piece  to  Ready. 

1.  From  Ready,  raise  the  piece  overhead,  at  the  same  time  twisting 
it  till  the  muzzle  points  directly  forward. 

2.  Twist  the  piece  to  the  left  until  the  butt  points  directly  forward. 

3.  Twist  back  imtil  the  muzzle  points  forward. 

4.  Lower  the  piece  to  Readi/. 

626.  Ninth     exercise — Side   twists.— Special    Action. — The 
muscles  of  the  sides,  loins,  and  small  of  the  back. 


Plate  33. 
Fij:.    1.  Fig.    2. 

"Side  Twists,"  Second  Count.  "Side  Twists,"  Fourth  Count. 


(1)  Commands:  Side  Ticists—l,  2,  3,  4;  1,  2,  3,  4.     (PL  35.) 

1.  From  Ready,  drop  the  piece  horizontally  in  front  to  position 
Xo.  2  in  Coming  to  Ready. 

2.  Lifting  the  butt  up,  carry  the  piece  strongly  to  the  left  side 
and  out,  muzzle  pointing  directly  down.     Keep  the  hips  firm. 

3.  Return  the  piece  to  position  No.  2  in  Coming  to  Ready. 

4.  Lifting  the  muzzle,  carry  the  piece  strongly  to  the  right  side 
and  out,  muzzle  pointing  directly  up. 

(2)  Pvepeat  the  exercise. 

(3)  At  the  end  of  the  ninth  exercise,  come  to  Order  Arms. 


138  SHIP    AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

PHYSICAL  DRILL   WITHOUT   ARMS. 

(Setting-up  exercises;  Swedish  system.) 

Note. — Extracted  from  Manual  of  Athletic  Requirements,  U.  S.  Naval  Academy, 
by  Lieut.  Commander  W.  A.  Richardson,  U.  S.  Navy.  Standard  exercises  as  given 
throughout  the  United  States  naval  service,  and  as  adopted  by  many  European 
services. 

SETTING-UP    EXERCISES. 

627.  The  standing  position  is  taken  on  the  command: 
Attention! 

Heels  on  the  same  hne  and  as  near  each  other  as  the  conformation 
of  the  man  permits. 

Feet  turned  out  equally  and  forming  an  angle  of  about  45° . 

Knees  straight  \\'ithout  stiffness. 

Hips  level  and  drawn  back  slightly;  body  erect  and  resting 
equally  on  hips;  chest  lifted  and  arched;  shoulders  square  and  falling 
equally. 

Arms  and  hands  hanging  naturally ;  thumb  along  the  seam  of  the 
trousers. 

Head  erect  and  squarely  to  the  front,  chin  dravrn  in  so  that  the 
axis  of  the  head  and  neck  is  vertical;   eyes  straight  to  the  front. 

Weight  of  the  body  resting  equally  upon  the  heels  and  balls  of 
the  feet. 

Note. — The  position  of  Attention  is  a  very  important  one,  as  all  exercises  start 
from  this  position.  Instructors  should  criticize  the  position  of  Attention  with  such 
remarks  as,  heads  up,  chin  in,  chest  high,  knees  straight. 

SIMPLE    STARTING    POSITIONS    OF   THE    ARMS. 

628.  Wing  standing  position  is  taken  on  the  command: 
Hips — Firm! 

The  arms  are  bent  upward  and  placed  on  the  hips;  fingers  to 
the  front,  thumbs  to  the  rear;  palms  of  hands  turned  inward  and 
pressing  against  the  ridge  of  the  hip  bone;  elbows  pointing  out  to 
the  side  and  slightly  drawn  back. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Down- 
ward — Stretch  ! 

The  arms  are  stretched  do^ynward  ^vith  force  the  shortest  way. 

Common  faults: 

Elbows  not  pointed  to  the  side  and  drawn  back  too  much. 

Hands  not  firm  on  the  hips. 

629.  Yard  standing  position  is  taken  on  the  command:  Arms 
Sideways — Raise! 

The  arms,  fully  stretched,  are  slowly  raised  sideways  to  the  hori- 
zontal;  fingers  closed  and  the  palms  of  hands  turned  downward. 


PART    VII PHYSICAL   EXERCISES.  139 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Down- 
ward— Sink! 

The  arms  are  slowly  lowered  to  the  sides. 

Common  faults: 

Arms  not  held  in  the  horizontal  position. 

Chest  relaxed  during  the  movement  and  not  held  high. 

Note  . — If  standing  position  is  to  be  returned  to  quickly,  command : 
Attention! 

The  arms  are  then  lowered  to  the  sides  with  a  swing  without  slapping 
the  sides. 

630.  Reach,  standing  position  is  taken  on  command:  Arms 
Fonvird — Raise! 

The  arms  fully  stretched  are  slowly  raised  forward  to  the  hori- 
zontal; fingers  closed  and  palms  of  hands  turned  inward  toward 
each  other. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Doiun- 
ward — Sink! 

The  arms  are  slowly  lowered  forward  to  the  sides. 

If  the  command  Attention  is  given  the  arms  are  swung  down 
quickly  as  in  preceding  paragraph. 

Common  faults:  As  in  preceding  paragraphs  and  palms  not  turned 
inward . 

631.  Bend  standing  position  is  taken  on  the  command: 
Arms — Bend! 

The  arms  at  the  elbows  are  quickly  bent  upward  to  the  shoulders; 
fingers  touching  the  point  of  the  shoulders;  elbows  drawn  back  and 
down  to  the  sides. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Down- 
ward— Stretch ! 

The  arms  are  stretched  down  to  the  sides  with  force  the  shortest 
way. 

Common  faults: 

Shoulders  not  held  firm.     Elbows  not  drawn  in  to  the  sides. 

Fingers  not  resting  on  the  shoulders. 

Note.— The  object  of  the  bend  standing  position  is  to  raise  the  chest:  the  drawing 
of  the  arms  to  the  sides  has  a  tendency  to  do  this  and  the  result  is  a  good  brace. 

632.  Forward  bend  standing  position  is  taken  on  the  com- 
mand: Arms  Forward^-BENDl 

The  arms  are  bent  quickly  upward  in  front  of  the  chest;  elbows 
at  the  height  of  shoulders  and  drawn  well  back;  fingers  closed; 
wrist  and  forearm  in  a  straight  line. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Down- 
ward— Stretch ! 

The  arms  are  quickly  stretched  downward  %\dth  force  to  the  sides. 


140  SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

Common  faults: 

Elbows  not  at  the  height  of  shoulders  and  dra\m  back  enough. 

Wrist  and  forearm  not  in  straight  line.     Shoulders  carried  forward. 

633.  Stretch  standing-  position  is  taken  on  the  command: 
Arms  Forward  and  Upward — Raise! 

The  arms  fully  stretched  are  raised  forward  and  upward  in  front 
of  the  body  to  the  vertical  position  above  the  head,  and  are  carried 
well  back  so  they  are  in  a  straight  line  with  the  curve  of  the  spine; 
palms  of  hands  turned  inward  toward  each  other  and  arms  shoulder 
width  apart. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command :  Arms  Forward 
and  Downward — Sink  ! 

The  arms  are  slowly  lowered  in  the  reverse  manner  to  the  sides. 

Stretch  standing  position  can  also  be  taken  by  raising  the  arms 
sideways  and  upward  on  the  command : 

Arms  Sideways  and  Upivard — Eaise! 

The  arms  are  raised  sideways  to  the  yard  position,  the  hands  are 
quickly  turned  upward  and  the  movement  continued  upward. 

Arms  Sideways  and  Downward — Sink! 

The  arms  are  lowered  in  the  reverse  manner  to  the  sides. 

Common  faults : 

Arms  not  held  straight  and  in  line  with  the  trunk. 

Arms  not  held  shoulder  width  apart. 

634.  Rest  standing  position  is  taken  on  the  command: 
Neck — Rest  ! 

The  arms  are  bent  quickly  at  the  elbows,  carried  upward  the 
shortest  way  and  placed  on  the  back  of  head  with  the  finger  tips 
touching  each  other;  elbows  well  ])ack,  chest  high  and  head  erect. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Down- 
ward— Stretch  ! 

The  arms  are  stretched  downward  to  the  sides  mth  force  the 
shortest  way. 

Common  faults: 

The  head  carried  forward  during  the  arm  movement. 

The  elbows  not  carried  back  enough. 

Fingers  interlocked. 

635.  Palm  standing  position  is  taken  on  the  command: 
Hands  Outward — Turn  ! 

With  the  arms  fully  stretched  and  held  close  to  the  body,  the 
hands  are  turned  outward  away  from  the  body  as  far  as  possible. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command :  Hands  Inward — 
Turn  ! 

The  hands  are  turned  inward  toward  the  body. 

Common  faults:  Arms  not  held  close  to  the  body.  Shoulders 
carried  forward. 


PART    VII PHYSICAL    EXERCISES.  141 

SIMPLE    STARTING    POSITIONS    OF   THE    LEGS. 

636.  Close  standing  position  is  taken  on  the  command:  Feet — 
Close  ! 

By  slightly  raising  the  toes  from  the  deck  and  pivoting  on  the 
heels  the  feet  are  carried  inward  so  the  inner  side  of  the  feet  touch. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Feet — Open! 

By  pivoting  on  the  heels  the  feet  are  turned  out  to  the  standing 
position. 

Common  faults: 

Bending  the  body  forward  at  the  waist  line. 

Dragging  the  feet  on  the  deck  during  the  closing  and  opening. 

637.  Outward  walk  standing  position  is  taken  on  the  com- 
mand: Left  {Right)  Foot  Outward — Place  ! 

The  named  foot  is  placed  2  foot  lengtlis  outward  in  the  direction 
that  the  foot  is  pointed,  45°  angle  to  the  front;  weight  of  the  body 
equally  distributed  on  both  feet  and  shoulders  square  to  the  front. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command :  Feet  Together — 
Place  ! 

By  pushing  from  the  deck  with  the  forward  foot  it  is  carried  back 
to  the  standing  position. 

Common  faults: 

Not  keeping  the  shoulders  square  to  the  front. 

Sliding  the  feet  along  the  deck. 

Not  preserving  the  angle  of  the  feet.  Weight  not  equally  dis- 
tributed. 

638.  Forward  walk  standing  position  is  taken  on  the  com- 
mand: Left  (Right)  Foot  Forward — Place  ! 

The  named  foot  is  placed  2-foot  lengths  directly  forward  so  that 
the  heels  are  in  a  straight  line;  weight  of  the  body  equally  distributed 
and  preserving  the  angle  of  the  feet. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command :  Feet  Together — 
Place  ! 

The  feet  are  placed  together  as  in  preceding  paragraph. 

Common  faults:  Besides  those  in  preceding  paragraph,  the  foot 
not  placed  directly  forward. 

639.  Outward  lunge  standing  position  is  taken  on  the  com- 
mand: Left  (Right)  Foot  Outivard — Lunge  ! 

The  named  foot  is  carried  outward  3  foot  lengths  in  the  same 
direction,  the  forward  knee  is  bent  to  a  right  angle  and  directly  o^er 
the  foot,  both  feet  flat  on  the  deck;  rear  leg,  trunk,  and  head  in  a 
straight  line,  %\-ith  the  upper  body  inclined  forward  and  shoulders 
square  to  the  front  as  in  the  standing  position. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Feet  Together — 
Place  ! 

By  pushing  off  with  the  forward  foot  it  is  carried  back  to  the 
standing  position. 


142  SHIP   AND   GUN    DRILLS. 

Common  faults: 

Not  stepping  out  3  foot  lengths  and  feet  not  flat  on  the  deck. 

Rear  leg  and  body  not  in  a  straight  line. 

640.  Forward  lunge  standing  position  is  taken  on  the  com- 
mand :  Left  (Right)  Foot  Forward — Lunge  ! 

The  named  foot  is  carried  3-foot  lengths  forward,  the  knee  bent 
to  a  right  angle  as  in  preceding  paragraph,  shoulders  square  to  the 
front;  rear  leg  and  trunk  in  a  straight  line;  feet  flat  on  the  deck. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Feet  Together — 
Place ! 

The  foot  is  carried  back  to  the  standing  position  as  in  preceding 
paragraph. 

Common  faults:  Besides  those  in  preceding  paragraph,  the  foot 
not  carried  straight  forward  and  the  rear  heel  raised  from  the  deck. 

641.  Stride  standing  position  is  taken  on  the  commands 
(three  methods) : 

(a)  Left  (Right)  Foot  Sideways — Place  ! 

(6)  Feet  Sideways — Place  ! 

(c)  Feet  Sideways  iiith  a  Jump — Place  ! 

(a)  The  named  foot  is  carried  directly  sideways  2  foot  lengths  and 
placed  on  the  deck;  equal  weight  on  both  feet. 

(h)  The  left  foot  is  carried  1  foot  length  to  the  left,  and  the  right 
1  foot  length  to  the  right ;  the  distance  between  the  heels  should  be 
at  least  2  foot  lengths. 

(c)  By  pushing  off  from  the  deck  and  springing  upward  the  legs 
are  parted  sideways  and  the  feet  placed  on  the  deck;  the  distance 
between  the  heel  should  be  at  least  2  foot  lengths. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  commands : 

(a-h)  Feet  Together— Flac-eI 

(c)  Feet  Together  with  a  Jump — Place  ! 

(a)  The  foot  which  was  placed  sideways  is  carried  back  to  the 
standing  position. 

(b)  Two  motions. 

The  left  foot  is  canied  in  1  foot  length  and  the  right  foot  is  carried 
in  like^A-ise  to  the  standing  position. 

(c)  By  pushing  off  from  the  deck  both  feet  are  carried  inward  to 
the  standing  position. 

Common  faults : 

Not  making  the  stride  long  enough . 

Body  swa>dng  and  sliding  feet  on  deck. 

642.  Toe  standing  position  is  taken  on  the  command:  Heels — 
Raise! 

With  the  heels  together  and  the  arms  held  to  the  sides,  the  body 
is  raised  as  high  as  possible  on  the  toes,  maintaining  the  balance; 
ankle  joints  stretched ;  chest  held  Mgh  and  head  erect. 


PAKT    VII PHYSICAL    EXERCISES.  143 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Ileds — Sink! 

The  heels  are  lowered  to  the  deck. 

Common  faults:  Body  swaying  and  heels  not  held  together. 

643.  Spring  standing  position  is  taken  on  the  commands: 
Heels — Raise!  (see  preceding  paragraph).     Knees — Bend! 

Maintaining  the  balance  the  knees  are  bent  downward  until  the 
upper  leg  and  lower  leg  are  at  right  angles  to  each  other ;  the  position 
of  the  rest  of  the  body  unaltered. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  commands:  Knees — 
Stretch ! 

Keeping  the  heels  clear  of  the  deck  the  knees  are  stretched  upward. 

Heel — Sink! 

The  heels  are  lowered  to  the  deck. 

Common  faults: 

Heels  lowered  during  the  knee  bending  and  stretching. 

Body  swaying  forward  or  backward  and  not  maintaining  the 
balance. 

644.  Spring  sitting  position  is  taken  on  the  commands: 
Heels — Raise  !     Knees  to  Sitting — Bend  ! 

The  knees  are  bent  as  in  the  preceding  paragraph,  but  with  the 
difference  that  the  knees  are  bent  still  further  downward  until  the 
thighs  touch  the  heels. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  as  in  preceding  paragraph  on  the 
commands:    Knees — Stretch!     Heels — Sink! 

Common  faults :  Besides  those  in  preceding  paragraph,  knees  not 
bent  enough. 

starting  positions  of  the  trunk. 

645.  Stoop  standing  position  is  taken  on  the  command: 
Trunk  Forward — Bend  ! 

With  the  knees  straight  and  the  arms  held  to  the  sides,  the  trunk 
is  slowly  lowered  forward  to  the  horizontal  so  that  the  trunk  and  legs 
are  at  right  angles  to  each  other. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command :  Trunk  Upward 
— Stretch ! 

The  trunk  is  raised  slowly  upward  to  the  standing  position. 

Common  faults: 

The  back  rounded  and  head  allowed  to  fall  forward. 

The  knees  not  held  straight  and  chin  not  drawn  in. 

646.  Arch  standing  position  is  taken  on  the  command:  Trunk 
Backivard — Bend  ! 

With  the  knees  straight  and  the  arms  held  at  the  sides,  the  trunk 
is  bent  slowly  backward ;  the  bending  takes  place  in  the  upper  spine ; 
the  chest  should  be  held  high  and  the  chin  drawn  in. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Trunk  Up- 
ward— Stretch  ! 

The  trunk  is  raised  slowly  upward  to  the  standing  position. 


144  SHIP   AND   GUN    DRILLS. 

Common  faults : 

The  bending  taking  place  in  the  lower  spine  instead  of  the  upper 
spine. 

The  chin  not  drawn  in  and  the  head  allowed  to  fall  backward. 

647.  Tv/ist  standing-  position  is  taken  on  the  command:  Trunk 
to  the  Left  (Right)— Twist  ! 

With  the  arms  held  to  the  sides,  the  trunk  is  slowly  twisted  to 
the  named  side  as  far  as  possible,  keeping  the  hips  square  to  the 
front.  The  twisting  takes  place  above  the  hips  and  not  in  the 
thighs. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command :  TrunJ:  Forward — 
Twist! 

The  trunk  is  slowly  twisted  forward  to  the  standing  position. 

Common  faults: 

The  twisting  taking  place  in  the  thighs  instead  of  the  trunk. 

The  hips  not  held  square  to  the  front. 

648.  Sidebend  standing  position  is  taken  on  the  command: 
Trunk  to  the  Left  (Right) — Bend  ! 

With  the  arms  held  to  the  sides,  chin  drawn  in,  and  the  feet  firm 
on  the  deck,  the  trunk  is  slowly  bent  to  the  named  side  as  far  as 
possible.     The  position  of  the  head  is  unaltered  to  the  trunk. 

Standing  position  is  retm^ned  to  on  the  command :  Trunk  Upuard — 
Stretch ! 

The  trunk  is  slowly  raised  upward  to  the  standing  position. 

Common  faults: 

Raising  the  opposite  foot  to  the  side  of  the  bending  off  the  deck. 

Not  keeping  the  head  in  line  with  the  curve  of  the  spine. 

T^visting  the  trunk  during  the  side  bending. 

MISCELLANEOUS    STARTING    POSITIONS. 

649.  stoop  falling  position  is  taken  on  the  command:  Stoop 
Falling — Place  ! 

(Two  motions:) 

1.  The  knees  are  bent  to  sitting,  as  in  paragi*aph  ,  and  the 

hands  are  placed  on  the  deck  between  the  knees,  keeping  them 
shoulder  width  apart;  the  head  is  held  high,  and  the  back  straight. 
The  name  of  this^position  is  called  crouch  sitting  position. 

2.  The  weight  is  taken  on  the  arms  and  the  legs  are  stretched 
backward  with  force,  the  feet  placed  on  the  deck  so  that  the  body 
is  in  an  inclined  position,  the  arms  are  held  straight,  the  legs,  trunk, 
and  head  in  a  straight  line. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Attention! 
(Two  motions:) 

1.  By  pushing  off  with  the  feet  the  legs  are  brought  forward  to 
crouch  sitting  position. 

2.  By  pushing  off  with  the  hands  and  stretching  the  knees,  the 
body  is  straightened  up  to  the  standing  position. 


PART    VII PHYSICAL    EXERCISES.  145 

Common  faults: 

In  crouch  sitting:  The  back  rounded  and  the  head  carried  forward. 
In  stoop  falling:  Legs  and  trunk  not  in  a  straight  line,  allowing 
back  to  sway  or  raising  hips. 
Sliding  feet  along  the  deck. 

650.  Crouch,  sitting  position  is  taken  on  the  command:  Crouch 
Sitting — Place  ! 

The  knees  are  bent  and  the  hands  placed  on  the  deck  as  in  preced- 
ing paragraphs. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command :  Attention  ! 
Common  faults:  (See  preceding  paragraph.) 

651.  Back  stoop  falling  position  is  taken  on  the  commands: 
(Two  motions:) 

1.  Stoop  Falling — Place!    (See  preceding  paragraph.) 

2.  Change  to  Back  Stoop  Falling  on  Left  (Right)  Arm — Turn! 
By  keeping  the  arms  straight,  the  body  is  turned  on  the  named 

arm  and  the  free  hand  placed  on  the  deck  about  18  inches  from  the 
other  hand.  The  body  is  now  in  an  inclined  position,  \\ath  the 
trunk,  legs,  and  head  in  a  straight  line,  as  in  the  standing  position. 
The  back  of  the  body  is  towardlhe  deck. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  in  tAvo  motions  on  the  commands: 

1.  Change  to  Stoop  Falling  on  Left  (Right)  Arm — Turn! 

The  body  is  turned  on  the  named  arm  back  to  the  stoop  falling 
position. 

2.  Attention!    (See  preceding  paragraph.) 
Common  faults: 

Besides  those  in  paragraphs  645,  650,  the  arms  not  held  straight 
and  the  body  allowed  to  hinge  at  the  waistline. 

The  head  carried  forward  and  not  in  line  A^-ith  the  trunk. 

652.  Side  falling  position  is  taken  on  the  commands:  (Two 
motions:) 

1.  Stoop  Falling — Place! 

2.  Change  to  Side  Falling  on  Left  (Right)  ^rw— Turn  ! 

The  body  is  turned  on  the  named  arm  until  the  side  of  the  body  is 
turned  toward  the  deck,  the  free  arm  is  held  to  the  side  and  the 
supporting  arm  is  held  straight.  The  body  should  now  be  in  an 
inclined  position,  with  the  head,  trunk,  an'd  legs  in  a  straight  line 
as  in  the  standing  position. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  in  the  reversed  manner  in  two 
motions,  on  the  commands: 

1.  Change  to  Stoop  Falling  on  L^eft  (Right)  ^rw— Turn! 

2.  Attention! 
Common  faults: 

The  body  and  arm  not  held  straight. 

Chin  not  drawn  in  and  head  carried  to  the  side. 

Legs  not  held  together  as  in  standing  position. 


146  SHIP   AND   GLN    DRILLS. 

653.  Lying  position  Is  taken  on  the  commands:  (Two  motions:) 

1.  Stoop  Falling — Place!    (See  par.  649). 

2.  Change  to  Lying  on  Left  {Right)  Arm — Turn  ! 

The  body  is  turned  on  the  named  arm  to  the  back  stoop  falling 
position,  as  in  paragraph  651,  then  immediately  lowered  to  the  deck 
so  that  the  back  ot  the  body  is  flat  on  the  deck  with  the  arms  to  the 
sides  and  the  legs  together. 

vStanding  position  is  returned  to  in  the  reversed  manner,  in  two 
motions,  on  the  commands: 

1.  Change  to  Stoop  Falling  on  Left  (Right)  Arm — Turn  !  , 

2.  Attention. 

Common  faults:  Besides  those  in  paragraphs  649,  650,  the  legs 
apart  and  arms  not  at  the  sides. 

654.  Forward  lying  position  is  taken  on  the  commands: 
(Two  motions:) 

1.  Stoop  Falling— Flac-eI    (See  par.  649.) 

2.  Change  to  Forward  Lying — Place! 

The  body  is  quickly  lowered  to  the  deck  and  the  arms  lowered  to 
the  sides.  The  body  should  now  be  in  a  horizontal  position  on  the 
deck  with  the  chin  drawn  in  and  the  legs  together. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  in  the  reversed  manner  in  two 
motions  on  the  commands:  Change  to  Stoop  Falling — Place! 
Attention! 

Note. — The  above  position  can  also  be  taken  on  the  command: 

Foward  Lying — Place! 

Common  faults: 

The  front  of  the  body  not  flat  on  the  deck  and  arms  not  held  to 
sides. 

Legs  apart  and  chin  not  dra-vvn  in. 

665.  Stride  kneeling  position  is  taken   on  the   commands: 
Stride  Kneeling — Place  ! 
(Two  motions:) 

1.  The  right  knee  is  bent  and  the  left  knee  placed  on  the  deck 
about  6  inches  to  the  left  of  the  right  foot,  half  kneeling. 

2.  The  right  knee  is  placed  on  the  deck  about  6  inches  to  the  right, 
so  that  the  distance  between  the  knees  is  about  12  inches.  The  body 
from  the  knees  up  should  be  held  straight  and  heels  together. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:   Attention! 
(Two  motions:) 

1.  The  left  knee  is  raised  and  the  foot  placed  on  the  deck  opposite 
the  right  knee,  both  hands  are  placed  on  the  left  knee. 

2.  By  stretching  the  knees  the  body  is  raised  to  the  standing 
position  and  the  arms  lowered  to  the  sides. 

Common  faults: 

Hinging  of  the  body  at  the  waistline. 

Touching  the  deck  with  the  hands  in  taking  the  position. 

Heels  not  together  when  in  the  kneeling  position. 


PART    VII PHYSICAL    EXERCISES.  147 

COMBINED    STARTING   POSITIONS    OF   THE    ARMS   AND    LEGS. 

656.  Wing  stride  standing  position  is  taken  on  the  commands: 

Left  {Right)  Foot  Sideivays  and  Hips — Firm  ! 

The  named  foot  is  placed  sideways,  as  in  paragraph  641  (a),  and  at 
thesame  time  the  hands  are  placed  on  the  hips,  as  in  paragraph  628. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  commands:  Feet  Together 
and  Anns  Downward — Stretch  ! 

The  foot  is  carried  in  to  the  other  foot  and  at  the  same  time  the 
arms  are  stretched  down  to  the  sides. 

Common  faults:  (See  pars.  628  and  641.) 

667.  Bend  toe  standing  position  is  taken  on  the  commands: 
EeelRaising  and  Arms — Bend! 

The  heels  are  raised,  as  in  paragraph  642,  and  at  the  same  time 
thearms  are  bent  upward  to  the  bend  position,  as  in  paragraph  631. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Heel  Sinking 
and  Arms  Downward — Stretch  ! 

The  heels  are  lowered  to  the  deck  and  at  the  same  time  the  arms 
are  stretched  down  to  the  sides. 

Common  faults:  (See  pars.  631  and  642.) 

668.  Rest  Outward  walk  standing  position  is  taken  on  the 
command:  Left  (Right)  Foot  Outward  and  Neck — Rest! 

The  named  foot  is  placed  outward,  as  in  paragraph  637,  and  at  the 
same  time  the  arms  are  bent  upward  to  the  rest  positi«._,  as  in 
paragraph  634. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command :  Feet  Together 
and  Arms  Downward — Stretch  ! 

The  foot  is  carried  back  to  the  other  foot  and  at  the  same  time  the 
arms  are  stretched  down  to  the  sides. 

Common  faults:  (See  pars.  634  and  637.) 

659.  Stretch  outward  lunge  standing  position  is  taken  on 
the  command:  Left  {Right)  Foot  Outward  Lunging  and  Arms  For- 
wardand  Upward — Raise  ! 

The  named  foot  is  shifted  outward,  as  in  paragi'aph  639,  at  the 
same  time  the  arms  are  raised  forward  and  upward  in  front  of  the 
body  to  the  vertical  position  above  the  head,  as  in  paragraph  633. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command :  Feet  Together 
and  Arms  Forward  and  Downivard — Sink! 

The  advanced  foot  is  carried  back  to  the  other  foot  and  at  the  same 
time  the  arms  are  lowered  forward  and  downward  to  the  sides. 

Common  faults:  (See  pars.  633  and  639.) 

Note.— The  stretch  position  can  also  be  taken  by  raising  the  arms  sidewise  and 
upward.    (See  par.  633.) 

7431"— 23 11 


148  SHIP   AND    GUN   DRILLS. 

EXERCISES    OF    THE    LEGS    CARRIED    OUT    IN    THE    SIMPLE     STARTING 
POSITIONS. 

The  starting  position.  The  exercise. 

660.  Wing   standing Heel  raising. 

The  starting  position  is  taken,  as  in  paragraph  628,  on  the  com- 
mand: nijps — Firm! 
The  exercise  is  carried  out,  as  in  paragraph  642,  on  the  commands: 

Heels — Raise  !     Heels — Sink  ! 
Then  the  heel  raising  is  carried  out  by  numbers:  at  count  "One" 

the  heels  are  raised,  at  count  "Two"  they  are  lowered,  and  so  on. 
Common  faults:  (See  pars.  628  and  642.) 

661.  Yard   stride    standing Heel  raising. 

The  starting  position  is  taken  on  the  command :  Left  (Right)  Foot 

Sideways  and  Arms  Sideivays — Raise  ! 

The  named  foot  is  shifted  sideways,  as  in  paragraph  641  (a),  atthe 
same  time  the  arms  are  raised  sideways,  as  in  paragraph  629. 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  as  in  paragraph  642. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  in  the  reversed  manner  on  the 
command:  Feet  Together  and  Arms  Downward — Sink! 

Common  faults:  (See  pars.  629  and  641.) 

662.  Wing,  outward  walk  standing Heel  raising. 

The  starting  position  is  taken  on  the  command:  Left  (Right)  Foot 

Outward  and  Hips — Firm  ! 

The  named  foot  is  placed  outward,  as  in  paragraph  637,  and  atthe 
same  time  the  hands  are  placed  on  the  hips. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Feet  Together 
and  Arins  Downward — Stretch  ! 

The  named  foot  is  shifted  back  to  the  other  foot  and  at  thesame 
time  the  arms  are  stretched  down  to  the  sides. 

Common  faults:  (See  par.  642.) 

663.  Yard,  forward  walk  standing Heel  raising. 

The  starting  position  is  taken  on  the  command :  Left  (Right)  Foot 

Forward  and  Anns  Sideivays — Raise  ! 

The  named  foot  is  placed  forward  as  in  paragraph  638  and  atthe 
same  time  the  arms  are  raised  sideways  as  in  paragraph  629. 

The  heel  raising  is  carried  out  as  in  paragraph  642. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Feet  Together 
and  Arms  Downward — Sink! 

The  named  foot  is  shifted  back  and  the  arms  lowered  to  the  sides. 

Common  faults:  (See  pars.  638  and  642.) 

664.  Wing  standing Heel  raising  and  knee  bending. 

Starting  position  is  taken  on  the  command :  Hips—Fiuvi !    (Par. 

628.) 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  commands : 

figeZs— Raise !     (Par.  642.)    Znees— Bend!     (Par.  643.) 

Knees — Stretch!    Heels — Sink! 


PART   VII PHYSICAL   EXERCISES.  149 

Then  the  exercise  is  carried  out  by  numbers:  at  "One"  the  heels 
are  raised,  at  *'Two"  the  knees  are  bent,  at  "Three"  the  knees  are 
stretched,  at  "Four"  the  heels  are  lowered,  and  so  on. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Down- 
ward— Stretch! 

Common  faults:  (See  par.  643.) 

665.  Yard  standing:  Heel  raising  and  knee  bending  to 
sitting. 

Starting  position  is  taken  on  the  command:  Arms  Sideways — 
Raise!     (See  par.  629.) 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  as  in  the  preceding  paragraph,  but 
with  the  difference  that  the  knees  are  bent  to  sitting,  as  in  paragraph 
644,  on  the  commands: 

Ileels — Raise  !  Knees  to  Sitting — Bend  ! 

Knees — Stretch  !  Heels — Sink  ! 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Down- 
ward—Si-^kI     (See  par.  629.) 

Common  faults:  (See  pars.  629  and  644.) 

666.  Wing   standing Lunging    outward. 

Starting  position  is  taken  on  the  command:  Hips — Firm!     (See 

par.  628.) 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  commands : 

Left  (Right)  Foot  Outward — Lunge!     (See  par.  639.) 

Feet  Together — Place! 

Then  the  exercise  is  carried  out  by  numbers. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Down- 
ward— Stretch  ! 

Common  faults:  (See  pars.  628  and  639.) 

667.  Bend  standing Lunging  forward. 

Starting    position    is    taken    on    the    command:   Arms — Bend! 

(See  par.  631.) 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  commands: 

Left  (Right)  Foot  Forward— Lv^ge  !     (See  par.  640.) 

Feet  Together — Place! 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Down- 
ward— Stretch ! 

Common  faults:   (See  pars.  631  and  640.) 

668.  Wing  standing Advance  by  lunging  forward. 

Starting  position  is  taken  on  the  command:   Hips — Firm!     (See 

pars.  628.) 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  commands: 

Advancing  Forward  by  Numbers— One \   Two!    Three!    Four! 

At  count  "One,"  the  left  foot  is  shifted  forward,  as  in  paragraph 
640;  at  "Two,"  the  right  foot  is  shifted  forward  to  the  left  foot;  at 
"Three,"  the  right  foot  is  shifted  forward;  and  at  "Four,"  the  left 
foot  is  carried  forward  to  the  right,  and  so  on. 


150  SHIP    AND   GUN    DRILLS. 

Then  the  class  is  faced  about  and  the  exercise  repeated. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Down- 
ward— Stretch ! 

Common  faults :  The  class  not  working  in  unison  and  not  keeping 
the  proper  dress  in  ranks  while  advancing  forward. 

EXERCISES    OF    THE    ARMS    CARRIED    OUT    IN    THE    SIMPLE    STARTING 
POSITIONS. 
The  Starting  position.  The  exercise. 

669.  Standing Arm  stretching  sideways. 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  command:  Arms  Sideways — 

Stretch! 

(Two  Motions:) 

1.  The  arms  are  bent  upward  to  the  bend  position  as  in  paragraph 
621. 

2.  The  arms  are  stretched  sideways  to  the  horizontal  position, 
with  the  palms  of  the  hands  turned  downward. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Down- 
ward— Stretch ! 
(Two  motions:) 

1.  The  arms  are  carried  in  to  the  bend  position  with  a  snap. 

2.  The  arms  are  stretched  downward  with  force  to  the  sides. 

Note. — The  movement  of  all  arm  stretchings  is  continuous,  ^^•ith  very  little  pause 
at  the  bend  position. 

Common  faults: 

The  arms  not  fully  stretched  and  the  palms  not  turned  downward. 

Not  enough  snap  and  effort  in  the  bending  movement. 

670.  Standing Arm  stretching  upward. 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  command:  Arms    Upward — 

Stretch! 

(Two  motions:) 

1.  The  arms  are  bent  upward,  as  in  preceding  paragraph. 

2.  The  arms  are  stretched  upward  to  the  vertical  position  above 
the  head,  with  palms  turned  inward  and  arms  shoulder  width  apart. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Doivn^ 
ward — Stretch  ! 
(Two  motions:) 

1.  The  arms  are  carried  in  to  the  bend  position  with  a  snap. 

2.  The  arms  are  stretched  downward  ^yith  force  to  the  sides. 

Note. — After  arm  stretchings  are  carried  out  bj"  command,  they  are  executed  by 
numbers,  one  count  for  each  movement. 

Common  faults: 

Arms  not  stretched  upward  ^^ith  force  and  held  shoulder  width 
apart. 

Palms  of  hands  not  turned  inward. 


PART   VII PHYSICAL   EXERCISES.  151 

G71.    Standing Arm  stretching  forward. 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  command:  Arms  Fonrard— 
Stretch ! 

(Two  motions:) 

1.  The  arms  are  bent  upward,  as  in  paragi'aph  631. 

2.  The  arms  are  stretched  forward  to  the  horizontal  position,  in 
front  of  the  lx>dy;  palms  of  hands  turned  inward  and  arms  shoulder 
width  apart. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Down- 
ward— Stretch ! 

The  aims  are  stretched  downward  in  two  motions,  as  in  preceding- 
paragraph. 

Common  faults:  (See  preceding  paragraph.) 

672.  Standing Arm  stretching  backward. 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  command:  Arms  Backward — 

Stretch ! 

(Two  motions:) 

1.  The  arms  are  bent  upward,  as  in  paragraph  631. 

2.  The  arms  are  stretched  downward  and  backward  with  force; 
the  hands  are  held  shoulder  width  apart  and  the  palms  are  turned 
inward. 

The  position  arising  from  the  arm  stretching  backward  is  called 
drag  standing. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Doivn- 
ward — Stretch! 

The  arms  are  stretched  downward  in  two  motions,  as  in  preceding 
paragraph. 

Common  faults: 

The  head  carried  forward  as  the  arms  are  stretched  backward. 

The  arms  not  carried  back  far  enough. 

673.  Forwa.rd  bend  standing Arm  striking  sideways. 

Starting  iX)sition  is  taken  on  the  command :  Arms  Forward — Bend! 

(See  paragraph  632.) 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  commands:  Arms  Sideways — 
Strike  1 

The  arms  are  stretched  sideways  to  the  yard  position. 

The  upper  arms  are  held  in  a  firm  position . 

Arms  Forward — Bend! 

The  arms  are  carried  in  to  the  first  position. 

Then  the  arm  striking  is  carried  out  by  numbers. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Down- 
ward— Stretch ! 

Common  faults:  The  upper  arms  not  held  firm  during  the  arm 
striking. 

674.  Bend  standing:  Arm  stretching  in  various  directions. 
Starting  position  is  taken  on  the  command:  Arms — Bend ! 


152  SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  commands: 
Arms  Sideways — Stretch!     Arms — Bend!     (See  par.  669.) 
Arrns  Upward — Stretch!     Arms — Bend!    (See  par.  670.) 
Arrns  Forward — Stretch!    Arms — Bend!    (See  par.  671.) 
Arms  Backward — Stretch!    Arms — Bend!    (See  par.  672.) 
Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command :   Arms  Down- 
tiard — Stretch  ! 

Common  faults:  (See  pars.  669,  670,  671,  and  672.) 

675.  Reach  standing:  Arm  swinging-  up"ward  and  forward. 
Starting  position  is    taken   on   the   command:  Arms  Forward — 

Raise  ! 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  commands:  Arms  Upward — 
Swing! 

The  arms  are  swung  upward  to  the  stretch  position. 

Arms  Forward — Swing! 

The  arms  are  swung  forward  to  the  reach  position. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Down- 
ward— Sink! 

Note. — All  arm  s\viiigings  are  carried  out  by  numbers  after  being  executed  by 
command. 

676.  Stretch  standing:  Arm  swinging  forward  and  upward. 

Starting  position  is  taken  on  the  command :  Arms  Forward  arid 
Upward — Raise!     (See  par.  633. ) 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  commands:  Arms  Forward — 
Swing!     Arms  Upward — Swing! 

As  in  the  preceding  paragraph,  but  \\ith  the  difference  that  the 
arms  are  swung  first  to  the  reach  and  then  to  the  stretch  position. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Forward 
and  Doumward — Sink  ! 

677.  Reach  standing Arm  swinging   sideways. 

Starting  position  is  taken  on    the    command:  Arms  Forward — 

Raise  ! 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  commands:  Arms  Sideways — 
Swing  ! 

The  arms  are  swung  sideways  to  the  yard  position,  palms  turned 
downward. 

Arms  Forward — Swing  ! 

The  arms  are  swung  forward  to  the  reach  position,  palms  turned 
inward . 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Down- 
ward— Sink  ! 

Common  faults:  The  head  carried  forward  during  the  arm  swinging 
sideways. 

678.  Yard  standing Arm  swinging  forward. 

Starting  position  is  taken  on    the  command:  Arms   Sideways — 

Raise! 


PART   VII — PHYSICAL   EXERCISES.  153 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  commands:  Arms  Forward — 
Swing!    Arms  Sideways — Swing! 

As  in  the  preceding  paragraph,  but  with  the  difference  that  the 
arms  are  first  swung  to  the  reach  and  then  to  the  yard  position. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Down- 
ward— Sink! 

Common  faults:  (See  preceding  paragraph.) 

679.  Standing Arm  swinging  forward  and  upward. 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  commands :  Arms  Forward  and 

Upward — Swing  ! 

The  arms  are  swung  forward  and  upward  in  front  of  the  body  to 
the  stretch  position. 

Arms  Forward  and  Downward — Swing! 

The  arms  are  swung  forward  and  downward  in  the  reversed  manner 
to  the  standing  position. 

Common  faults: 

The  arms  not  held  straight  and  shoulder  width  apart. 

The  arms  allowed  to  swing  beyond  the  thighs  in  the  downward 
swing. 

680.  Standing Arm  swinging  sideways  and  upward. 

Tlie  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  commands:  Arms  Sideways  and 

Upward — Swing!     Arms  Sideways  and  Downward — Swing! 

As  in  preceding  paragraph,  but  with  the  difference  that  tfie  arms 
are  swung  sideways  and  upward  and  then  sideways  and  downward . 

Common  faults:  Besides  those  in  preceding  paragraph,  the  arms 
allowed  to  slap  the  thighs  in  the  downward  swing. 

68 1 .  Standing Arm  circling  with  a  swing. 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  commands :  Arms  Forward  and 

Upward — Swing  !    Arm^  Sideways  and  Downward — Swing  ! 
Common  faults:  (See  par.  633.) 

682.  Half  stretch  standing Arm  changing  with   a 

swing. 

Starting  position  is  taken  on  the  command:  Left  (Right)  Arm 
Forward  and  Upward— Raisf.\    (See  par.  633.) 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  by  numbers  on  the  command:  Arm 
Changing  with  a  Swing  by  Numbers — One!    Two! 

At ' '  One, ' '  the  arm  above  the  head  is  swung  forward  and  downward 
and  at  the  same  time  the  other  arm  is  swung  forward  and  upward. 

At  "Two,"  the  arms  are  changed  in  the  reversed  manner,  and 
so  on. 

Standing  position  is  "returned  to  on  the  command:  Left  (Right) 
Arm  Forward  and  Downward — Sink! 

Common  faults: 

The  arms  not  held  straight  during  the  swinging. 

The  head  carried  forward  and  the  shoulders  not  held  firm. 


154  SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

683.  Stretch    standing Arm    parting. 

The  starting  position  is  taken  on  the  command :  Arms  Forward  and 
Upivard— Raise  \     (Par.  633.) 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  command:  Arm  Parting  by 
Numbers — One!  The  arms  are  quickly  parted  and  lowered  to  the 
yard  (A)  position,  with  palms  turned  upward. 

Two!  They  are  quickly  swung  upward  to  the  first  position, 
and  so  on. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command :  Arms  Forvjard 
and  Downward — Sink! 

Common  faults:  The  arms  not  held  straight  and  the  head  carried 
forward. 

684.  Yard    (A)    standing Arm    parting. 

The  starting  position  is  taken  on  the  commands :  Arms  Sideways — 

Raise!     (Par.  629.) 

Hands  Upward— Tviii<i ! 

With  the  arms  held  straight  the  hands  are  quickly  turned  upward 
to  the  yard  (A)  position. 

The  arm  parting  is  then  carried  out  by  numbers  as  in  the  pre- 
ceding paragraph,  but  with  the  difference  that  the  arms  are  raised 
upward  and  then  sideways. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  commands :  Hands  Down- 
luard—^vuN  !    Arms  Downward — Sink  ! 

Common  faults:  (See  preceding  paragraph.) 

EXERCISES    OF    THE    NECK    CARRIED    OUT    IN    THE    SIMPLE    STARTING 
POSITIONS. 

The  starting  position.  The  exercise. 

685.  Wing  standing.  .Head  bending  backward  (forward). 

Starting  position  is  taken  on  the  command:  Hips — Firm! 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  commands:  Head  Backward  (For- 
ward)— Bend! 

The  head  is  bent  backward  (forward)  as  far  as  possible;  the  chin 
is  drawn  in  and  the  shoulders  held  firm. 

Head  Upward — Stretch  ! 

The  head  is  raised  upward  to  the  standing  position. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Down- 
ward— Stretch ! 

Common  faults:  Chin  not  drawn  in  and  the  shoulders  not  firm. 

Note. — Head  bending  can  also  be  carried  out  in  the  bend,  yard  or  forward  bend 
standing  positions. 


TART    VII PHYSICAL    EXERCISES.  155 

686.  Wing    standing Head    bending    sideways. 

Starting  position  is  taken  on  the  command :  Hips — Firm  ! 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  commands:  Head  to  the  Left 
(Right)— Be^bI 

The  head  is  slowly  bent  to  the  named  side  as  far  as  possible,  the 
shoulders  are  held  firm  and  the  cliin  is  drawn  in. 

Head  Upward — Stretch! 

The  head  is  slowly^  raised  to  the  starting  position. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Down- 
ward— Stretch . 

Note. — Head  bending  sideways  can  also  be  carried  out  in  the  bend,  yard  or  forward 
bend  standuig  positions. 

687.  Wing    standing .Head    twisting. 

Starting  position  is  taken  on  the  command :  Hips — Firm  ! 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  commands:  Head  to  the  Left 
(Right)— Twist  \ 

The  head  is  twisted  to  the  named  side  as  far  as  possible,  keeping 
the  head  erect  and  the  cliin  drawn  in. 

Head  Forward — Twist! 

The  head  is  slowly  twisted  forward  to  the  standing  position. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Down- 
ward— Stretch  ! 

Notes. — Head  twisting  can  also  be  carried  out  in  the  wing,  bend,  yard,  and  spring 
sitting  positions.  All  head  bendings  and  twistings  should  be  carried  out  by  numbers 
after  being  executed  by  command. 

EXERCISES     OF    THE    TRUNK    IN    THE     SIMPLE     STARTING    POSITIONS. 

The  starting  position.  The  exercise. 

688.  Rest  standing Trunk  bending  backward. 

Starting  position  is  taken  on  the  command:  Neck — Rest. 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  commands:  Trunk  Backward — 
Bend!     Trunk  Upward — Stretch!     (See  par.  646.) 

Standing  position  is  retui'ned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Down- 
ward— Stretch ! 

Notes. — Trunk  bending  backward  should  always  be  followed  by  trunk  bending 
forward. 

Trunk  bending  backward  can  also  be  carried  out  in  the  %ving,  bend, 
yard,  or  stretch  standing  positions. 

689.  Wing  standing Trunk  bending  forward. 

Starting  position  is  taken  on  the  command:   Hips — Firm! 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  commands:  Trunk  forward — 
Bend!     Trunk  Upward — Stretch!  (See  par.  645.) 


156  SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  command:  Arms  Downward — 
Stretch ! 

Trunk  bending  forward  can  also  be  carried  out  in  the  bend,  yard,  stretch,  or  for- 
ward bend  standing  positions. 

Common  faults:  (See  par.  645.) 

690.  Yard  standing Trunk  bending  sideways. 

Starting  position  is  taken  on  the  command:    Arms  Sideways — 

Raise!     (Par.  629.) 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  commands:  Trunk  to  the  Left 
(Right)— Be^dI     (See  par.  648.) 

Trunk  upward. — Stretch! 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Down- 
ivard — Sink! 

Note. — Trunk  bending  sideways  can  also  be  carried  out  in  the  wing,  rest,  bend, 
stretch,  or  forward  bend  standing  positions. 

Common  faults:  (See  par.  648.) 

691.  Rest  standing Trunk  twisting. 

Starting  position  is  taken  on  the  command:    Neck — Rest!     (Par. 

634.) 

The  exercise  is  carried  out  on  the  commands:  Trunk  to  the  Left 
(Right)— Twist]     (Par.  647.) 

Trunk  Foruard — Twist ! 

Standing  position  is  returned  to  on  the  command:  Arms  Down- 
ward— Stretch ! 

Note. — Trunk  twisting  can  also  be  carried  out  in  the  bend,  yard,  wing,  forward 
bend,  or  stretch  standing  positions. 

Common  faults:  (See  par.  647.) 

816.  Mass  cheering  and  singing. — (a)  On  vessels  of  all  types, 
the  ship  s  organization  and  routine  should  provide  for  cheering  and 
singing  by  the  entire  crew.  This  should  be  considered  as  much  a 
necessity  as  certain  foiTns  of  physical  drill,  athletics,  moving  pictures, 
or  other' duties  on  board  ship.  This  form  of  ship's  activity  must  be 
so  directed  that  it  becomes  voluntary.  Like  many  branches  of 
athletics,  success  is  not  necessarily  the  result  of  a  picked  or  specially 
excellent  crew,  but  is  the  result  of  the  type  of  officer  or  petty  officer 
who  leads.  Each  vessel  should  make  mass  singing  and  cheering  one 
of  the  interesting  and  important  branches  of  all  crew's  activities. 

(b)  The  commanding  officer  should  place  an  officer  in  charge  of 
singing  and  cheering  who  has  an  exceptional  personality,  and  who 
preferably  has  received  some  previous  training  in  singing  or  cheer 
leading.  This  officer  should  have  the  entire  crew  to  draw  upon  for 
assistance  in  forming  the  singing  and  cheering  sections.  Where 
possible,  competitions  between  divisions  should  be  developed. 


Part  VIII. 
BOATSWAIN'S  CALLS. 


Page. 
The  Call 159 

Piping  and  Passing  the  Word 163 

Setting  the  Watches 170 

157 


BOATSWAIN'S  CALLS. 


Note. — Originally  prepared   by  Chief  Boatswain  Stephen  McCarthy,   United 
States  Na\T,  and  adapted  from  Naval  Institute  Proceedings,  No.  147. 


THE   CALL. 


701.   Description. — The  instrument  and  its  nomenclature  are 
illustrated  in  Figures  1  and  2.  > 


702.  Tuning.  -,  1  )  ^Suiiie  calls  issued  are  iioi  chrili  enough  in 
sound,  and  each  user  of  a  call  has  his  own  method  of  tuning  his  call 
to  that  shrill  note  required  in  nearly  all  the  pipes  used. 

(2)  Most  calls  are  too  open  at  the  pee  and  have  to  be  flattened  or 
soldered  at  the  sides  of  the  pee,  so  as  to  fill  the  space  between  it 
and  the  bowl. 

159 


160  SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

(3)  Some  calls  are  improved  by  scraping  the  wind  edge  or  edge  of 
the  bowl  farthest  from  the  pee.  It  is  sometimes  necessary  to  enlarge 
this  hole  by  scraping  as  well  as  by  sharj)ening  the  edge  until  the 
reed  strikes  the  hole  fair.  A  test  of  this  is  often  made  by  pushing 
the  large  end  of  a  broom  straw  through  the  reed  to  find  how  the  straw 
hits  the  vrind  edge  of  the  hole.  That  edge  of  the  hole  should  split 
the  straw.  The  call  once  tuned  should  sound  if  held  with  its  mouth 
to  a  gentle  breeze;  and,  when  blown  with  open  hand,  should  sound 
from  the  most  repressed  pressure  to  the  full  strength  of  the  lungs 


1 

without  any  tlaw  in  the  sound  known  as  wind  leak  or  hoarseness;  j 
and  the  sound  with  closed  hand  should  be  as  clear  and  shrill  as  it  is/ 
possible  to  make  it. 

703.  Positions  of  the  hand. — (1)  There  are  four  positions  of 
the  hand — open,  curved,  closed,  and  clinched. 

(2)  These  positions  also  indicate  the  lung  force  or  pressure  of  blow- 
ing. As  a  rule  the  open  hand  calls  for  the  least  pressure  required 
to  make  a  soft,  clear  note,  while  the  clinched  calls  for  all  the  pressure 
that  can  be  used  in  making  the  note  shrill  and  clear. 


ART    VIII BOATSWAIN  S    CALLS. 


161 


162 


SHIP    AND    GUN    DRILLS. 


PART    VI IT boatswain's    CALLS.  163 

PIPING   AND   PASSING  THE   WORD. 

704.  The  score,  explanation. — (1)  The  four  positions  of  the 
hand — open,  curved,  closed,  and  clinched — are  indicated  on  the 
four  spaces  of  a  musical  staff,  thus: 


Clinched. 


Closed. 


Curved. 


Open. 


(a)  A  straight  line  indicates  a  smooth  note. 
(6)  A  dotted  line  indicates  a  rattled  note. 

(c)  A  broken  line  indicates  an  undulating  note. 

(d)  Full  arrow  heads  along  a  line  indicate/uZZ  breath  imjpulses. 

(e)  Half  arrow  heads  along  a  line  indicate  gentle  breath  impulses. 

(f)  Intervals,  or  rests,  are  marked  thus  |  ,  with  the  numeral  of 
the  seconds  above,  if  more  than  one  second  is  necessary;  other^\^se, 
notes  are  slurred  smoothly. 

(g)  The  number  of  seconds  each  pipe  should  be  given  under 
normal  conditions  is  marked  above  the  bar,  but  circumstances  often 
call  for  the  signal  to  be  shortened. 

(2)  (a)  Smooth  notes  are  made  as  any  ordinary  whistle  is  blown 
and  are  simply  raised  or  lowered  by  the  lung  force  used. 

(6)  Rattled  notes  are  made  by  the  ballarding  of  the  tip  of  the 
tongue  against  the  roof  of  the  mouth,  imitating  a  whistle  rattled  by 
a  pea. 

(c)  Undulating  notes  are  made  by  a  combination  of  the  tongue 
slightly  undulating  while  the  throat  checks  the  lung  pressure  or  flow 
of  breath,  causing  the  sound  to  undulate  smoothly  but  continuously 
at  equal  intervals. 

706.  The  use  of  the  voice  in  passing  the  word. — The  tone  of 
voice  in  passing  of  the  word  should  be  modulated  and  pitched  as  the 
occasion  calls  for.  The  rising  inflection  should  be  given  to  such 
calls  as  "All  hands,"  'Up  all  hammocks,"  etc.,  and  the  lowering 
inflection  should  be  given  to  such  calls  as  "Down  all  bags,"  "All 
the  watch,"  etc. 

706.   Pipes  and  their  uses. — 

(1)  Call  mates. — Piped  by  the  ship's  boatswain  to  assemble  liis 
mates. 

(a)  Call  in  clinched  position  and  sound  as  'peep  peep,"  "peep 
peep,"  short  and  shrill  ^^ith  a  ])ause  of  less  than  one  second  after  the 
first  two  peeps. 

7431°— 23 12 


164 


SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 
1  i  1 


Clinched 


Closed 


Curved 


Open 


(b)  This  is  answered  by  all  the  mates  as  they  close  on  the  point  of 
assembling  to  receive  the  order  to  be  passed  from  the  boatswain  or 
his  chief  mate,  who  blew  the  signal. 

(2)  Stand  6?/.— Piped  for  "Set  taut,"  -'Stand  by"  and  "Lay  in." 


^ 

Clinched 

/ 

Closed 

/ 

Curved 

/ 

Open 

Commence  with  the  call  in  the  curved  position  and  instantly 
change  to  the  clinch,  causing  a  rising  peep,  and  follow  it  with  a 
slurred  peep,  short  and  ending  sharp. 

(3)  Lay  up.— Piped  to  send  men  up  or  aloft  together.  *- 


h 


h 


i        1 


i       h'       h 


Clinched 


^ 


Closed 


Curved 


Open 


Commence  as  in  "Stand-by"  and  follow  the  long  peep  by  a  series 
of  three  sharp  peeps  with  an  interval  of  about  one  second  between 
each  series  of  peeps,  and  slow  down  the  last  three  peeps  to  about 
equal  intervals  between  them. 

(4)  Lay  out. — Piped  to  "Lay  out"  in  manning  yards  or  rail;  also 
for  "Trice  up"  and  "Out  booms." 


PART    VITI BOATSWAIN'S   CALLS. 

1         i  2 


165 


Cinched 

■ 

Closed 

/ 

Curved 

/ 

Open 

As  in  "Stand-by"  excepting  that  the  first  peep  is  but  about  half 
the  length  of  the  second  one  and  is  pitched  higher  on  the  start.  The 
interval  of  time  is  about  the  same  as  the  verbal  order,  and,  in  fact, 
should  ])e  so  timed. 

(5)  Word  to  be  passed. — Piped  to  command  silence  preliminary  to 
passing  an  order  or  the  word  about  information. 


10 


Cinched 


f 


Co§cd 


Curved 


Open 


(a)  Call  in  the  closed  position  and  clinch  within  a  second.  Im- 
pulse the  shrill  call  with  the  lung  force  about  three  times  and  end 
sharp. 

{b)  The  length  of  this  pipe  should  not  be  less  than  5  nor  more  than 
10  seconds.  Sing  out  the  words,  "D'ye  hear  there,"  then  wait  for 
all  hands  to  silence  and  pass  the  word  as  given  by  the  officer  of  the 
deck. 

(6)  Hoist  away. — Piped  in  hoisting  boats,  in  hoisting  generally, 
and  in  the  walk  away  with  the  cat  or  fish  falls;  and  is  always  pre- 
ceded by  the  pipe  "Set  taut." 


10 


Clinched 
Closed 
Curved 
Open 


/ 


166 


SHIP    AND    GUN    DRILLS. 


(a)  Same  as  No.  5,  excepting  that  the  shrill  is  not  impulsed  and 
the  shrill  is  softened  by  changing  the  position  from  clinched  to 
curved,  and  the  lung  pressure  is  lessened  so  as  to  finish  low  and  soft, 
instead  of  sharp. 

(6)  The  length  of  this  pipe  is  about  10  seconds  for  a  signal  to  make 
a  long  walk  away  in  hoisting. 

(7)  Haul. — Piped  to  keep  men  pulling  together. 


Clinched 


Ooscd 


Curved 


Open 


(a)  Call  in  the  closed  position  and  change  to  the  clinched,  and  so 
timed  as  to  sound  about  an  equal  length  of  time  in  each  position; 
finish  with  a  sharp  shrill.     Normal  time  about  three  seconds. 

(6)  This  signal  is  used  at  such  times  as  the  men  are  facing  their 
work  at  a  standstill  and  in  position  for  a  pull  together.  The  low 
note  of  the  signal  is  "Stand-by,"  and  the  shrill  note  '' Pull."  This 
is  repeated  as  often  as  the  signal  is  1  )lown  and  the  length  of  the  shrill 
note  signifies  the  strength  and  amount  of  rope  to  be  gained,  in  the 
pull,  so  that  as  the  signal  is  shortened  it  becomes  the  first  note  of 
the  "Short  belay." 

(8)  Belay. — Piped  to  avast  hauling  and  make  fast;  and  also  to 
annul  an  order  just  piped. 


U 


Clinched 


>    >   >  >  >  > 


i^ 


^ 


Closed 


Curved 


Open 


(a)  Call  open;  close  sharply  to  the  clinch  and  impulse  with  the 
tongue  to  the  roof  of  the  mouth  about  six  times  while  holding  the 
first  shrill  of  about  five  seconds;  then  change  to  the  cur^•ed  and 
impulse  softly  \^'ith  the  breath  and  tongue  to  cause  a  smooth,  undu- 
lating sound  for  about  the  same  interval  as  the  impulsed  shi'ill;  then 
clinch  sharply  and  finish  with  thi'ee  shrill  slurred  peeps  in  rapid 
succession. 


I'ART   VIII BOATSWAIN  S   CALLS. 


167 


(6)  This  is  the  most  difficult  pipe  to  l)low,  owing  to  the  contraction 
of  it.  The  "Short  belay"  is  more  uniform  in  sound,  as  it  really 
grows  out  of  the  "Short  haul."  The  "Short  belay"  means  "Hold 
fast. ' ' 

(9)  All  hands. — Piped  as  a  •  general"  for  all  events  calling  upon 
"all  hands";  also  for  calling  the  first,  mid  and  morning  watches. 

Close  to  the  clinched  and  impulse  softly  a])out  three  times,  holding 
the  shrill  for  10  seconds,  ending  sharp,  then  again  close  to  the  clinched 


in" 

1 »                                    10" 

Clinched 

^ 

/ 

/                                                              \ 

Closed 

/ 

/                               \ 

Curved 

/ 

/                                  ^ 

Open 

/ 

softly  and  hold  the  second  shrill  for  ]0  seconds  and  allow  it  to  fall 
softly  to  a  finish  for  three  seconds. 

(10)  Boat  call. — Piped  to  call  away  a  l)oat;  also  to  call  a  division 
or  divisions  to  quarters. 

(a)  Call  in  the  open,  close  to  the  clinched,  hold  the  shrill  for  five 
seconds,  then  open  and  close  again  to  the  clinch  and  hold  the  sec- 
ond shrill  for  another  five  seconds,  then  open  and  allow  the  signal  to 
end  softly,  allowing  al^out  three  seconds  for  the  fall  to  silence. 


10* 


Clinched 

/ 

/           \ 

Qosed 

/ 

/              \ 

Curved 

/ 

/                   \ 

Open 

/ 

V                         \ 

(h)  All  hands  should  listen  to  this  pipe,  as  the  l^oatswain's  mate 
is  to  sing  out  in  a  long-drawn  "Away  "  the  boat  that  is  to  be  manned ; 
and  he  should  use  the  word  "away"  a  second  time  in  the  call  of  the 
barge  or  the  gig;  such  as  "  .\way,  barge  (or  gig).  Away."  Etiquette 
requires  that  both  the  pipe  and  the  word,  when  calling  away  the 
barge  or  the  gig,  should  l;e  full  lengthened.  The  pipe  and  the  word 
for  other  l)oats  are  not  to  l)e  so  long. 

(c)  In  calling  a  division  or  divisions  to  quarters,  follow  ■\\dth  "All 
the division — to  quarters." 


168 


SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 


(d)  The  boatswain's  mate  looks  for  silence  as  in  after  the  "Word 
to  be  passed  "  pipe,  and  then  pitches  his  voice  in  a  roaring  song, 
raising  it  to  its  full  power  on  the  first  word  of  the  call,  and  lowering 
it  on  the  last  syllable  of  the  last  word. 

(e)  The  interval  of  the  song  is  about  equal  to  the  interval  of  the 
call. 

(11)  Heave  around. — Piped  for  "Mess  gear";  also  to  heave  around 
a  capstan. 


15^ 


Clinched 

/------ 

V 

Cosed 

/ 

\ 
\ 

Curved 

—  .  .._  _  ./ 

\ 

Ooen 

\ ^ 



(a)  Call  in  the  curved,  and  blow  very  softly  with  an  undulating 
sound  by  checking  the  breath  with  the  throat,  allomng  the  tongue 
to  slowly  undulate;  then  in  the  clinched  position,  increasing  the 
rapidity  of  the  undulations  from  about  the  same  interval  as  during 
the  rising;  then  allow  the  sound  to  fall  back  to  the  soft,  low^ tones  of 
the  start. 

(6)  Make  a  double  heave  around  for  the  capstan,  and  a  single  long 
heave  around  for  mess  gear;  but  the  interval  of  the  double  heave 
around  should  not  exceed  that  of  the  single  heave  around. 


Ci.nchcJ 


C!o»ed 
Curved 


Op«fl 


^^. 


Krf^taX 


(12)  Sweepers. — Pipes  all  sweepers  to  start  their  brooms  and  clean 
out  spit  kits. 

(a)  Commence  as  in  ''Heave  around"  and  close  sharply  to  a  short 
shrill.  Repeat  this  three  times  and  finish  with  four  or  five  sharp 
peeps  from  the  closed  to  the  clinched  in  rapid  succession.  Repeat 
this  from  its  commencement,  but  instead  of  finishing  with  the  sharp 
peeps,  make  the  sound  more  like  an  impulsed  shrill  as  though  slur- 
ring the  peeps. 


PART    VIII boatswain's   CALLS. 


169 


(b)  If  necessary,  the  boatswain's  mates  follow  with  the  word 
"Clear  up  the  decks  for  quarters." 

(13)  Veer.—Fiped  to  "Ease  away,"  "Walk  back,  "and  "Slack 
away."  A  slurred  veer  calls  side  boys  to  "tend  the  side " ;  one  veer, 
two  side  boys;  two  veers,  four  side  boys;  three  veers,  six  side  boys; 
four  veers,  eight  side  boys. 

(a)  Call  in  the  curved  and  blow  to  imitate  a  whistle  rattled  by  a 
pea.     This  rattling  sound  is  produced  by  ballarding  the  tip  of  the 

16* 


CKnched 

.•                                      • 

Oosed 

\ 

Gunred 

.....  .».--.«•                                               • 

Open 

tongue  against  the  roof  of  the  mouth;  and  the  rapidity  of  the  bal- 
larding is  in  proportion  to  the  pitch  of  the  sound,  rising  to  the 
maximum  in  the  shrill  rattle. 

(6)  For  walking  back  the  falls,  this  pipe  is  sounded  continuously 
during  the  walk  back  or  the  lowering  from  a  belay;  and  the  speed 
of  the  lowering  is  in  proportion  to  the  undulations  of  the  pipe,  or 
the  rapidity  of  its  rising  and  falling  in  sound  caused  by  changing 
from  curved  or  open  to  clinched ,  sometimes  accentuated  by  impuls- 
ing M-ith  the  throat;  short  peeps  of  it  indicate  to  "lower  handsomely" 
for  a  short  distance  as  in  the  case  of  fouling  w^hile  lowering. 


10 

10 

10 

Clinched 

r 

V 

Closed 

/                      \               / 

Curved 

/                         \             / 

Open 

(c)  At  the  finish  of  the  lower  or  at  the  "come  up, "  the  signal  is 
finished  with  a  short,  sharp  peep  as  in  the  finish  of  "Pipe  dow^n." 

(14)  Piping  the  side. — Accompanies  appropriate  side  honors. 

(a)  Fill  the  lungs,  commence  with  the  lowest  smooth  note  and 
rise  to  the  shrill,  then  fall  to  the  low  note  again  and  finish  with  a 
low,  soft  shrill. 

(6)  The  time  in  rising  to  the  shrill  should  be  about  equal  to  the 
time  of  holding  the  shrill,  and  the  time  of  falling  from  the  shrill 


170  SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

should  be  about  one-third  less  than  that  of  rising,  so  that  the  time 
of  rising,  holding,  and  falling  to  a  finish  are  about  equal. 

(c)  The  pipe  *•  Alongside''  is  started  in  time  to  finish  as  the  boat 
makes  the  gangway. 

{d)  The  pipe  "Over  the  side"  is  started  in  time  to  finish  it  when 
the  visitor  is  gi'eeted  by  the  officer  of  the  deck.  At  the  first  note 
of  this  pipe,  the  boatswain's  mate  takes  station  in  rear  of  the  proper 
inboard  side  boy  and  all  side  tenders  come  to  the  "  Salute,  "  remain- 
ing at  "Salute"  during  the  sound  of  the  pipe,  and  dropping  to 
"Attention"  at  its  last  note. 

(e)  Upon  the  visitor's  departure  the  ceremony  is  reversed  as  fol- 
lows: Boatswain's  mate  comences  the  first  note  of  "Over  the  side" 
as  the  visitor  passes  him  in  departing;  and  the  first  note  of  "  Away" 
as  the  visitor's  boat  gathers  headway  and  curves  away  from  the 
gangway  in  shoving  oS,  and  this  signal  should  be  very  long-drawn 
in  the  finish. 

(/)  In  the  piping  of  officials  alongside  and  OA^er,  the  side  pipe  is 
lengthened  to  full  breath  for  officials  receiving  eight  side  boys.  But 
short  side  pipes  in  any  event  are  considered  lubberly  and  contrary 
to  the  proper  "etiquette  of  the  side." 

(g)  For  officials  received  with  eight  or  six  side  boys,  the  side  will 
be  piped  by  the  ship's  l)oatswain.  For  officials  received^  with  four 
side  boys,  the  side  will  be  piped  by  the  chief  boatswain's  mate. 
For  officials  received  wdth  two  side  boys,  the  side  will  be  piped  by 
a  boatswain's  mate. 

(15)  Pipe  doim. — (a)  This  pipe  is  a  combination  of  the  pipe  "Word 
to  be  passed  "  and  a  long  veer  of  about  10  seconds;  ending  in  a  sharp, 
short  peep,  with  an  interval  of  1  second  between  the  two  pipes. 

(6)  This  signals  the  termination  of  all  evolutions  and  ceremonies  to 
which  all  hands  had  been  called,  and  is  blown  by  the  boatswain's 
mate  of  the  watch.  After  the  sounding  of  taps,  follow  the  "Pipe 
down"  with  "Silence  fore  and  aft." 

(16)  Pipe  to  {any)  meal— (a)  Pipe  "All  hands,"  long  "Heave 
around"  (mess  gear)  and  long  "Pipe  down.  " 

(6)  The  combined  calls  should  cover  an  interval  of  not  less  than 
one  minute. 

SETTING  THE   -WATCHES. 

707.  The  first  watch. — As  preparation  to  calling  and  setting  the 
fijst  watch,  the  boatswain  should  fii'st  inspect  the  ship  for  the  night, 
seeing  that  everything  is  secure.  This  inspection  should  be  corn- 
pleted  by  7.45  p.  m.  He  then  calls  his  mates,  who,  listening  for  his 
call,  assemble  at  a  designated  place  within  easy  call  of  the  bridge. 
The  boatswain  then  instructs  his  mates  with  special  reference  to 
the  night  routine,  and  the  carrying  out  of  the  morning  orders.  At 
7.50  the  officer  of  the  deck  commands  "Call  the  watch. " 


TART   VIII BOATSAVAIN's    CALLS.  171 

The  boatswain  leads  the  piping  and  the  long-drawn  chorus  of, 
"All  the  starboard  (or  port)  watch." 

The  chief  boatswain's  mate  then  pipes  the  word  to  be  passed  and 
calls,  "Relieve  the  wheel  and  lookouts." 

The  mates  attend  to  the  reliefs  of  their  own  divisions,  and  report 
to  the  boatswain  as  soon  as  the  reliefs  are  stationed. 

The  boatswain  reports  to  the  officer  of  the  deck,  "Sir,  the  wheel 
and  lookouts  are  relieved." 

The  officer  of  the  deck  acknowledges  with,  "Very  well,  sir," 

The  officer  of  the  deck  having  reported  eight  bells  to  the  command- 
ing officer,  orders,  "Strike  eight  bells,  relieve  the  watch." 

The  boatswain  and  his  mates  pipe  the  long  pipe  down,  and  chorus 
"all  the  watch, "  in  moderate  tones. 

This  ends  the  assembly  of  the  boatswain  and  his  mates.  The 
mates  not  on  watch  are  free  until  again  called  for  regular  watches  or 
emergency  duties.  The  boatswain  then  takes  his  place  on  the  right 
of  the  line  of  all  warrant  officers,  and  awaits  the  arrival  of  the 
executive  officer  to  receive  their  8  p.  m.  reports. 

708.  The  night  watches. — The  mid  and  the  morning  watches 
are  called  by  the  boatswain's  mate  of  the  watch  by  the  long  "All 
hands  "  call,  as  for  the  first  watch,  excepting  the  call  of  these  watches 
is  in  the  berthing  space  instead  of  on  deck;  and  the  "rouse  out, 
rouse  out"  that  follows,  is  the  mate's  own  method  of  turning  the 
sleepers  out  of  their  hammocks. 

The  watches  are  stationed,  reported,  and  relieved  by  the  boat- 
swain's mate  of  the  watch,  in  the  same  manner  as  the  first  watch  was 
set  by  the  boatswain. 

After  piping  down  the  watch  on  deck,  the  boatswain's  mate  of 
the  watch  and  his  relief  chorus  the  soft,  "all  the  watch,"  then  the 
relief  boatswain's  mate  takes  over  the  duties  of  the  mate  whose 
watch  had  been  relieved, 

709.  The  day  watches. — The  forenoon,  afternoon,  and  dog 
watches  are  called  by  the  word  to  be  passed  call,  followed  by  "On 
deck  all  the  port  (or  starboard)  watch,"  followed  by  "ReUeve  the 
wheel  and  lookout." 


--^ 


Part  IX. 
BUGLE   CALLS. 


Page. 
Bugle  Calls  in  General 175 

Bugle  Calls  Used  on  Board  Ship 183 

Infantry  and  Artillery  Calls 199 

Marches  and  Quicksteps 207 

173 


BUGLE   CALLS. 


BUGLE   CALLS   IN   GENERAL. 

801.  General  remarks. — (1)  The  music  in  the  following  pages 
gives  the  authorized  bugle  calls,  drill  signals,  and  the  most  common 
marches  used  in  the  United  States  Navy. 

(2)  Particular  attention  is  necessary  that  all  buglers  be  required 
to  maintain  the  pitch  of  all  bugles  in  the  key  of  G.  The  standard 
Navy  bugle  is  pitched  in  the  key  of  G.  There  is  nothing  so  dis- 
tressing as  a  number  of  the  bugles  of  the  fleet  sounding  off,  pitched 
variously, 

(3)  The  bugle  calls  and  drill  signals  will  conform  strictly  to  the 
music  as  herein  printed,  and  the  various  calls  Mill  be  used  only  for 
the  purpose  indicated  under  the  explanations  and  definitions. 
Particular  attention  must  be  given  to  time.  ^Yhile  the  employment 
of  the  bugle  for  any  particular  occasion  is  not  mandatory,  it  is  im- 
portant that  the  calls  always  have  the  same  signification. 

(4)  All  buglers  and  trumpeters  are  instructed  in  sounding  a  number 
of  marches,  both  quickstep  and  double,  but  it  is  considered  sufficient 
to  embody  only  a  few  of  these  in  the  music.  _  These  are  sufficient  for 
reference,  though  others  may  be  used  if  desirable.  In  regard  to  the 
double  time,  any  six-eight  quickstep  may  be  used  as  a  double  time 
by  plapng  it  more  rapidly.     (See  Quicksteps  Nos.  4  and  5.) 

(5)  Infantry  and  artillery  calls,  and  certain  routine  and  miscella- 
neous calls,  are  identical  in  the  Army  and  Navy. 

(6)  Certain  calls,  which  are  primary  infantry  or  artillery  calls,  have 
been  adapted  to  additional  uses  on  shipboard,  as  indicated  in  the 
table. 

(7)  ]\Iost  calls  are  sounded  by  one  bugler  or  trumpeter,  but  such 
general  calls  as  colors  (both  morning  and  evening),  reveille,  tattoo, 
taps,  general  quarters,  abandon  ship,  the  assembly ,  flourishes ,  and  ruffles 
are  sounded  by  all  the  field  music  simultaneously. 

(8)  The  table  below  gives  a  list  of  the  approved  bugle  calls  of  the 
United  States  Navy,  together  with  a  brief  description  of  the  use  of 
each,  and  the  name  of  the  call  when  used  in  the  United  States  xVrmy, 
Many  of  the  calls  given  herein  are  not  used  frequently  on  board  ship, 
being  supplanted  by  signals  given  by  the  pipe,  by  word  of  mouth, 
or  telephone. 

175 


176 


SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 


802.  Routine  Calls.— 

[Note.— The  number  in  second  column  is  the  nimiber  of  the  call  in  the  list  of  appended 

music] 


Navy  call. 


Num- 
ber of 
caU. 


Explanation  of  use. 


Army  call. 


Reveille. 


Tattoo. 


Taps. 


First  call. 


Morning  colors  — 

Evening  colors  — 
Officers , 


Assembly 
Drill 

Secure . . . 
Recall . . . . 


Dismiss     (retreat 
from  drll). 


Beaten  or  sounded  when  all  hands  are 
called  in  the  mornins:.  ''  iVll  hands" 
i  s  piped  immediately  after  the  call  is 
finished. 

Beaten  or  sounded  in  port  as  a  signal 
for  silence  to  be  maintained  about 
the  decks.  It  is  followed  imme- 
diately by  "pipe  dov/n/'  and  about 
three  miiiutes  later  by  taps. 

Sounded  about  three  minutes  after 
"pipe  down."  It  is  a  signal  for  all 
men  to  turn  in  for  the  night  and 
maintain  silence. 

Sounded  five  minutes  before  morning 
and  evening  colors,  and  tattoo.  It 
calls  buglers  to  assemble,  and  also  is 
a  warning  signal  to  others  who  par- 
ticipate in  the  evolution ,  such  as 
quartermaster  electricians,  lamp- 
lighters, etc.  It  may  also  be  used  as 
a  preliminary  call  at  other  times 
when  it  is  desired  to  assemble  the 
buglers. 

The  flag  leaves  the  deck  at  the  first 
note.  On  board  ship  only  the  first 
part  of  the  call  is  sounded  On 
shore  the  whole  call  is  sounded. 

The  flag  leaves  the  truck  or  peak  at  the 
first  note. 

Sounded  five  minutes  before  a  forma- 
tion at  which  officers  must  be  present. 
It  is  also  used  at  other  times,  when 
specially  provided  for,  such  as  to  call 
all  officers  to  assemble  at  a  certain 
designated  point. 

Signal  for  divisions  to  assemble  for 
muster. 

Signal  to  assemble  for  drill;  or  if 
already  assembled,  to  proceed  with 
the  drill  or  exercises. 

Signal  to  secure,  used  after  battle  driUs 
and  emergency  drills. 

Sounded  to  recall  men  who  are  out  of 
the  ship  for  drill  or  for  exercise,  such 
as  at  boat  drill, infantry  or  artillery 
on  the  dock,  in  swimniing,  etc. 

Signal  to  dismiss  from  drill.  Sounded 
after  secure  or  sounded  alone  after 
division  drills. 


ReveiUe. 


Tattoo. 


Taps. 


As  sem  bl  y  of 
trumpeters. 


To  the  color. 


Retreat. 
Officers'  call. 


Assembly. 
Drill  call. 


Recall. 


PART    IX BUGLE    CALLS. 


177 


Navy  call. 


Num- 
ber of 
call. 


Sick 

Band 

Full  guard 

Sergeant's  guard 

Mess  gear  - 

Provisions 


Attention   (or  si- 
lence). 


Carry  on. .. 
Hammocks. 


Clean,  bright  work 
Knock  off  bright 

work. 
Water-tight  doors. 


Inspection . 


Liberty  party.. 

Light  smoking 

lamp.  I 

Out  smoking  lamp 


13 


16 


67 


19 


20 


Explanation  of  use. 


Usually  soimded  between  S  and  9  a.  m. 
and  in  the  afternoon  as  a  signal  for 
men  requiring  medical  attention  to 
report  at  the  sick  bay. 

To  call  the  band  to  the  quarter  deck.. 

Calls  the  whole  guard  to  the  quarter 
deck. 

First  two  bars  of  full  guard  call.  Calls 
petty  officer's  guard  to  the  quarter 
deck. 

A  signal  to  spread  mess  gear 

Sounded  as  a  signal  that  provisions  are 
about  to  be  served  out.  Also  used 
as  a  signal  to  equip  and  provide  boats 
for  abandon  ship. 

When  sounded  for  a  passing  vessel  it  is 
a  positive  command  for  every  man  in 
sight  from  outboard  to  stand  at  at- 
tention in  his  tracks,  facing  the  pass- 
ing vessel.  If  used  at  drill  or  fleet 
maneuvers,  it  is  an  order  for  every 
one  to  stand  at  attention  and  main- 
tain silence. 

Sounded  after  silence,  is  a  signal  to  re- 
siune  conditions  existing  before 
silence  was  sounded. 

Is  a  signal  for  every  man  using  a  ham- 
mocK  t  ofallin  abreast  his  hammock, 
and  maintam  silence. 

Signal  to  clean  assigned  bright  work 

Signal  to  stow  away  all  cleaning  gear . . . 

Signal  to  secure  the  ship  below  the 
water  line  for  the  night,  during  ma- 
neuvers or  in  fog. 

Signal  for  captain's  (executive's) 
weekly  inspection  of  holds  and  store- 
rooms and  lower  decks.  To  be  sound- 
ed also  following  captain's  Saturday 
morninginspection  of  crew,  as  signal 
for  lower  deck  men  to  lay  below  pre- 
paratory to  captain's  inspection  of 
lower  decks. 

Calls  liberty  party  to  form  for  inspec- 
tion. 

Signals  permission  for  the  crew  to 
smoke. 

Signals  knock  off  smoking 


Army  call. 


Sick. 


First    sergeant'! 
caU. 


Mess. 
Issue. 


Attention. 


178 


SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 


803.  Miscellaneous  calls. — 


[Note. — The  number  in  second  column  is  the  number  of  the  call  in  thelist  of  appended 

music] 


Num- 

Navy call. 

ber  or 
call. 

Explanation  of  use. 

Army  caU. 

Torpedo-defense 

28 

This  caU,  on  board  ship  is  the  signal  for 

To  arms. 

quarters. 

Torpedo  defense  quarters;  on  shore  it 
is  the  signal  to  arms. 

General  quarters.. 

29 

Signal  for  every  man  to  go  to  his  sta- 
tion for  general  quarters,  and  to  Cast 
loose  and  provide. 

Abandon  ship 

30 

The  signal  t  o  get  out  and  man  boats  for 

General    (abbre- 

abandon  ship  and  to  shove  olT. 
Sounded  simultaneously  with  the  ring- 

\iated). 

Fire  quarters 

31 

Fire. 

ing  of  ship's  bell.    One  blast .  fire  for- 

ward; two  blasts,  aft.    Usually  fol- 
lowed by  asseinbJy  which  is  a  signal 
for  men  to  fall  in  at  quarters  for  mus- 

ter when  their  duties  are  completed. 

Swimming 

32 

Signal  to  prepare  for  s\\imming,  put 
on  trunks,  etc. 

Go  in  water 

33 

Signal  to  go  in  the  water  for  swimming. 
Sounded  after  boat  is  in  position  and 

boom  lowered.    Sometimes   called 

"overboard." 

Church 

34 

Sounded  as  a  signal  that  church  is 
rigged,  and  that  divine  service  is 

Church. 

about  to  be  held.    It  is  followed  by 

tolling  the  ship's  bell. 

Flourished 

35 

Are  sounded  on  the  bugle  as  a  mark  of 
respect  to  officials  of  high  rank,  etc., 

Flourished  for  re- 

\ie\v. 

the  number  in  this  case  never  in  ex- 

cess of  four,  depending  on  the  rank  of 

the  official. 

Ruffles 

33 

Are  beaten  on  a  drum,  accompanying 

Ruffles. 

flourishes,  and  in  the  same  number 

in  each  case. 

Extra  duty  men.. 

37 

Signal  for  extra  duty  men  to  fall  in  at 
designated  position. 

Fatigue. 

Division 

38 

Calls  designated  di\ision  to  quarters. 
It  is  half  of  assembly  followed  by  c 

notes  to  indicate  the  division . 

Man  overboard.... 

72 

A  signal  that  thereis  a  man  overboard . 

Charge. 

School 

39 

On  board  ship ,  and  at  training  stations. 

to  call  classes  to  their  studies. 

Saluting  gun  crews 

40 

Sounded  as  a  signal  to  all  concerned  to 

Stable  call. 

to  quarters. 

make  all  necessary  preparations  to 
lire  a  salute. 

Belay 

41 

To  countermand  or  revoke  a  call  just 

Bear  a  hand 

71 

preceding  it. 
Same  as  double  time.    Used  to  indicate 
haste  in  obeying  previous  call. 

Double  time. 

General  muster.  . . 

64 

All   divisions  assemble  at   "general 
muster." 

Dress  parade. 

PART    TX BUGLE   CALLS. 


179 


Navy  call. 


Explanation  of  use. 


Army  call. 


Torpedo    defense 
fire  control  exer- 


Main  battery  fire 

control  exercise. 

Man  searchlights. . 


Man  range  finders. 


Surgeon's  party ... 

All  signalmen 

Working  party 


Man  torpedo  de- 
fense battery. 


Torpedo    defense 
battery  in  reserve. 

Commence  fueUng. 
Knock  oil  fueUng. . 


43 


47 


Signal  for  fire  control  exercise,  torpedo 
defense  battery.  When  searchlights 
are  to  be  included  in  the  exercise,  to 
be  followed  by  call  man  searchlights. 

Signal  for  fire  control  exercise,  m.ain 
battery,  including  range  finders. 

Followed  by  the  number  of  c  notes;  it 
is  the  signal  to  man  the  searchlight  or 
searchlights  designated.  Sounded 
without  designating  notes,  it  is  the 
signal  to  man  all  searchlights. 

Followed  by  the  number  of  c  notes,  it 
is  the  signal  to  man  the  range  finders 
or  range  finders  designated.  Sounded 
without  designating  notes,  it  is  the 
signal  to  man  all  range  finders. 

Calls  dressing  station  crews  and  battle 
stretchermen  to  muster  at  the  sick 
bay  for  instruction  in  first  aid. 

Calls  all  the  signal  crew  to  muster  on 
the  signal  bridge. 

Assembles  a  working  detail.  If  neces- 
sary, to  be  followed  by  the  required 
niunber  of  c  notes  to  designate  the 
number  of  hands  to  be  furnished  by 
each  part  of  the  ship. 

The  same  as  On  right  into  line.  To  be 
used  at  general  quarters  to  call  the 
torpedo  defense  gun  crews  from  re- 
serve. 

The  same  as  On  left  into  line.  To  be 
used  at  general  quarters  to  send  the 
torpedo  defense  battery  into  reserve. 

Same  as  Commence  firing | 

Same  as  Cease  firing 


7431' 


-13 


180  SHIP   AND   GUN   DRILLS. 

804.  Boat  calls. — 

Note.— If  there  be  more  than  one  boat  of  a  kind  its  number  is  indicated  by  the 
proper  number  of  c  notes  following  the  call. 


Navy  caU. 

Num- 
ber of 
caU. 

Explanation  of  use. 

Steamers 

49 

59 
50 

51 
52 
53 
54 
55 

55 

56 

57 

58 
60 

Calls  away  or  designates  the  steamer  indicated  by  the 

Motor  boat 

Launches 

number"ofc  notes. 
Calls  away  or  designates  motor  boat  indicated. 
Calls  away  or  designates  the  saihng  launch  or  motor 

Cutters 

launch  indicated. 
Calls  away  or  designates  the  cutter  indicated. 

Whaleboats 

Barge 

Calls  away  or  designates  the  whaleboat  indicated. 
Calls  away  or  designates  the  barge  indicated. 

Gig 

Calls  away  or  designates  the  gig  indicated. 

Dinghy 

Calls  away  or  designates  the  dinghy  indicated.    Call 

"Wherry 

sounded  twice. 
Calls  away  or  designates  the  wherry  indicated.    Call 

Away  aU  boats 

Hook  on 

sounded  once. 

Calls  away  all  boats  either  for  exercise  or  when  all  boats 
are  to  be  used  for  landing,  or  for  an  armed  boat  expedi- 
tion. 

Signal  to  hook  on  and  prepare  for  hoisting  the  boat  or  boats 

Man  the  boat  faUs. 
Race  boat  crew 

whose  call  precedes  the  hoo).  on.  To  hook  on  all  boats, 
sound  "  Away  all  boats"  and  follow  it  by  "Hook  on". 

Signal  for  all  hands  to  man  the  boat  falls  which  may  be 
indicated  by  word  of  mouth  or  by  boat  call. 

CaUs  away  the  race  boat. 

PART   IX BUGLE    CALLS. 


181 


805.  Infantry  and  Artillery  calls. — (1)  These  calls  are  the 
same,  and  they  aj*e  used  for  the  same  purpose,  as  corresponding 
calls  in  the  United  States  Army.  Remarks  on  their  use  on  shore 
are  given  below. 

(2)  Aside  from  the  drill  signals,  whose  use  is  evident  from  their 
names,  the  following  calls,  not  ordinarily  used  on  board  ship,  are 
used  on  shore,  as,  for  example,  with  the  naval  brigade  or  a  battalion 
in  camp  or  in  barracks. 


Army  and 
Navy  call. 


Guard  moimt 

Company        com 

mander'scall. 
Call  to  quarters. . 

Dress  parade 

General 

Adjutant's  call... 


Num- 
ber 
of  call 


64 


66 


Explanation  of  use. 


The 


The  first  or  preparatory  signal  for  guard  mounting, 
second  call  is  the  assembly. 

Signal  for  company  commanders  to  convene  at  previously 
designated  position. 

Used  on  shore  in  barracks  or  in  camp  as  a  signal  for  men 
to  go  to  their  quarters  or  tents.  It  is  usually  soimded 
about  five  minutes  before  taps,  depending  on  regula- 
tions. In  such  cases  tattoo  will  usually  be  sounded 
one-half  hour  before  taps. 

Warning  signal  for  companies  to  form  for  dress  parade. 
The  signal  for  the  companies  to  fall  in  is  the  assembly. 
Used  on  board  ship,  it  is  the  call  for  all  divisions  to 
assemble  at  "general  muster." 

Signal  for  striking  tents  and  loading  wagons  preparatory 
to  marching. 

Signal  for  companies  to  form  battaUon.  Immediately 
after  this  caU  the  adjutant  posts  the  guides  of  color 
company  and  that  company  marches  on  line.  Used 
also  on  board  ship  to  form  battalion. 


806.  Remarks  on  the  use  of  bugle  calls  on  shore. — In  the 
following  remarks  the  Army  names  of  the  various  calls  are  used. 
The  call  is  indicated  by  the  number  abreast  each,  which  refers  to 
the  number  of  the  call  in  the  music  which  is  appended. 

(1)  Warning  Calls.— (a)  First  call  (4),  Guard  mount  (Gl).  Dress 
-parade  (64),  and  Drill  (9)  precede  the  Assembly  (8)  by  such  interval 
as  may  be  prescribed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

(6)  Mess  (17),  Church  (34),  and  Fatigue  (37),  classed  as  ser\ice 
calls,  may  also  be  used  as  warning  calls. 

(c)  First  call  (4)  is  the  first  signal  for  formation  for  roll  call  and  for 
all  ceremonies  except  guard  mounting. 

(d)  Guard  mount  (61)  is  the  first  signal  for  guard  mounting. 

(e)  The  field  music  assembles  at  First  call  and  Guard  mount. 

(2)  Formation  Calls. — (a)  Assembly  (8) :  The  signal  for  companies 
or  details  to  fall  in. 


182  SPIIP   AND    GUN   DRILLS. 

(6)  Adjutant s  call  (66):  The  signal  for  companies  to  form  battalion, 
also  for  the  guard  details  to  form  for  guard  mounting  on  the  camp  or 
garrison  parade  ground ;  it  follows  the  assembly  at  such  interval  as 
may  be  prescribed  by  the  commanding  officer. 

(c)  To  the  color  (5)  is  sounded  when  the  color  salutes;  it  is  also 
used  as  the  signal  for  the  battalion  to  form  brigade. 

(3)  Alarm  Calls. — (a)  Fire  call  (31):  The  signal  for  the  men  to 
fall  in,  without  arms,  to  extinsfuish  fire. 

(6)  To  arms  (28):  The  signal  for  the  men  to  fall  in,  under  arms, 
on  their  company  parade  grounds  as  quickly  as  possible. 

(4)  Service  Calls.— (a)  Tattoo  (2),  Taps  (3),  3Iess  (17), Sich  (IS), 
Church  (34),  Recall  (11),  Officers  (7),  Company  commanders  (62), 
1.  p.  o.'s  (15),  Fatigue  (37),  School  (39),  and  the  General  (65). 

(b)  Reveille  (1)  precedes  the  Assembly  (8)  for  roll  call;  Retreat  (6) 
follows  the  Assembly,  the  interval  between  being  only  that  required 
for  formation  and  roll  call,  except  when  there  is  parade. 

(c)  Taps  (3)  is  the  signal  for  extinguishing  lights;  it  is  usually 
preceded  by  Call  to  quarters  (63)  by  such  interval  as  prescribed  by 
regulations. 

(d)  Assembly,  Reveille,  Retreat,  Adjutant's  Call,  To  the  color,  The 
flourishes,  RuJJles,  and  the  Marches  are  sounded  by  all  the  field 
music  united ;  the  other  calls,  as  a  rule,  are  sounded  by  the  musician 
of  the  guard  or  orderly  musician,  he  may  also  sound  the  assembly 
when  the  musicians  are  not  united. 

(e)  The  morning  gun  is  fired  at  the  first  note  of  Reveille,  or  if  marches 
be  played  before  reveille,  it  is  fired  at  the  commencement  of  the 
first  march. 

(/)  The  evening  gun  is  fired  at  the  last  note  of  Retreat. 
807.  Drill  signals.— (See  calls  67  to  105.) 

(1)  The  drill  signals  include  both  the  preparatory  commands 
and  the  commands  of  execution;  the  last  note  is  the  command  of 
execution. 

(2)  When  a  command  is  given  by  the  bugle,  the  chiefs  of  sub- 
divisions give  the  proper  commands  orally. 

(3)  The  memorizing  of  these  signals  is  facilitated  by  observing 
that  all  signals  for  movements  to  the  right  are  on  the  ascending  scale, 
that  the  signals  for  the  same  movements  to  the  left  are  corresponding 
signals  on  the  descending  scale;  that  changes  of  gait  are  all  on  the 
same  note;  that  c.  c.'s  call  is  the  first  two  bars  of  Officers'  call  -s^ith 
the  Attention  added. 

(4)  The  various  calls  are  given  in  the  music.  The  meaning  of 
each  is  apparent  from  its  name;  76  and  77  are  preparatory  signals 
to  indicate  simultaneous  movements  by  companies  or  battalions. 


PART   IX BUGLE   CALLS. 

808.  Marches  and  quicksteps, — 


183 


Num- 

Na^T call. 

ber 

of 

caU. 

Explanation  of  use. 

President's  March. 

106 

Played  when  President  visits  a  ship  of  war. 

Commander  in 

107 

Played  when  a  flag  officer  comes  on  board  officially. 

Chief's  March. 

Same  as  the  Army  General's  March. 

Rogue's  March 

108 

Played  when  a  thief  or  other  man  is  expelled  from  camp 
in  disgrace. 

Funeral  March 

109 

Played  at  funerals. 

Quickstep  No.  1 . . . 

110 

Played  as  a  march. 

Quickstep  No.  2. .. 

111 

Do. 

Quickstep  No.  3 . . . 

112 

Do. 

Quickstep  No.  4... 

113 

Played  as  a  march;  also  as  a  double. 

Quickstep  No.  5 . . . 

114 

This  is  an  ordinary  6/s  quickstep  but  is  generally  used  as 
a  double  by  playing  it  more  rapidly. 

Quickstep  No.  6 . . . 

115 

March.    Also  a  double. 

Quickstep  No.  1 ... 

116 

March  (Army). 

Quickstep  No.  8... 

117 

Do. 

Quickstep  No.  9... 

118 

March  (Sousa). 

BUGLE   CALLS  USED   ON   BOARD    SHIP. 

809.  Routine  calls.— 


184 


SHIP   AND    GUX   DRILLS. 


1.  Reveille. 


Quick- 


■^zzt 


^^^ 


-^ — i    y-     I — \~ft- 


-:^m^^^^^^^^ 


:?*-=3: 


Fine. 


^^^P^asi^^ 


D.C. 


Quiclc. 


e.  Tattoo. 


E 


^ 


3^3 


f  •  r    .  H-H^ 


3=it 


#— J       J  - 


^^^^ 


?^^?^ 


r «  '  m    0 ♦— 


T^w^iJi^^m 


$ 


*=*: 


^ 


iO: 


* »- 


T=^=i^^ 


iS: 


i=t 


I      ^Ip-    J"" 


^ 


^ aL 


^g=r-^^^33j^PE^ 


PART    IX BUGLE   CALLS. 

Tattoo. — Continued. 


185 


$=^^  jirivrlg^^^^ 


$ 


^ 


13-- 


s 


-ft — (ff-i-«-#- 


I    La  I 


:«: 


S^5=l- 


% 


Z^ji^^ft.^  \f^  f-^/- 


-^-^-^ 


i^q- 


WM 


-^-«- 


5=j=p:?zr-f-y 


S 

^^3 


S 


e^ 


-#-—#-•- 


i 


w 


-jr:=?i 


■x=t 


1^ 


-r-^-^-i 


-^-*- 


^^ 


==^^3 


S 


^.^ 


-z^z 


q — rT-n:=^ 


p^ 


-=4-^,- 


^35^^S5 


tf:=f£SS?z:^«i^: 


:^cp: 


t=i 


W^^- 


w 


^^? 


j^sgg 


^^agj^g^f^Bi^j^^gssi^ 


186 


SHIP   AND   GUN   DRILLS. 


Tattoo. — Continued. 


:pqs=p: 


?=p: 


^-H-H- 


t=t 


-^ ft. 


Ill' 


t=^t 


t^ 


IILIW^ 


-ff-^t-P- 


t= 


:i--^: 


T^ 


^=:i:rr. 


r^wZ 


-^-^- 


-«*^ 


-« •— 


t^:^^-- 


I 


^ 


^—^=3— 


-\-       ^  J  f   ' 


^ 


^^ 


^_^_^L_^_^_ 


d — tzt- 


i^S 


I 


i 


^zz:^± 


-:iL- 


^I^^^^I 


^ 


t-^ 


!S=E^ 


JB^g^^Eg^ll 


Blow. 


PART   IX BUGLE    CALLS. 

3.. Taps. 


187 


h-V-hS 


^_S 1 0. 


:X=3L-\ 


-^i- 


:q=.ci 


^ — ,_^i  r     » ^ 


^^^i 


>-' 1^ 


<.  First-Call, 


Quick. 


^^^^^1 


5.  Morning  Colors. 


^m 


Quick  time. 


-0^^^- 


?^^ 


FlNB. 


F — ^si — t"^"' 


<2 !9_je_^^_^. 


^l^-^-f-E^f-fe^^^^^ 


i).C. 


188 


SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

0.  Evening   Colors. 


#=^ 

iloderato. 

ftz: 

-T-i«= 

-4>i^. 

-1^1. 

_l_ 

— A- 

__!_ 

--U- 
-ha- 

-^-iMr- 

— ^--5— 

— A- 

w^ 

^ 

TT 

^^=^ 

— N- 

_^_^_ 

__4S_ 

S^* 

^r^ 

— J— 

--J- 

=^-.- 

-    g:.- 

=^ 

PART   IX BUGLE    CALLS. 

7.  Officers. 


189 


QuicTc. 


g|^^|t=^-^=t=p^^g= 


/^ — *- — ^— J — 1 1 ^ — f-— h — 


I 


8.  Assembly. 


Tuoderato. 


FX-^ 


5.  j^r///. 


A -J. 


E^ 


'-'-'^^--^^^il 


it 


■^    ,'       I*    !  — T> 


t^^;:^ 


10.  Secure. 


i^ 


S^ 


«-!-*- 


^^^^^^^^^-^^ 


190 


SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

n.  Recall 


ModenUo. 


^^^=H 


12.  Dismiss   (Retreat  from  Drill), 


^^^^^S-JX^^a^ 


13.  Sick. 


Qukk. 


2^;=?==! 


S'.^SISI^CSilliZi? 


-\ iBHtM- 


^^. 


-3 H i ! 


M 


U.  Band. 


X: 


;ll 


^ 


15.  Full  Guard. 


m^^ 


16.  Sergeant's  Guard. 


Quick 


PART   IX BUGLE    CAI^LS. 

17.  Mess  Gear, 

1EL  ,    m 


191 


j  r  r  f  r  I  f  r  ^-M^U 


i 


^ — ^ 


g^^^^^ 


Allegro. 


18.  Provisions. 


^^^^^s^^^^s^ 

^ 


i9.  Carry   On. 


ilJiitxP^^^^"^^^ 


^ 


QiUel. 


^C.  Hammocks. 


<i        H- 


*-Lji-*  ' '  — *- 


fe^H^ 


S3=+S:i 


^uieit. 


r^njE 


21.  Clean  Bright   Work. 

0  ^  f 


T-^F     — ft. 


u 


»  0  0 


192  SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

^2..  Knock- Off  Bright  Work. 
Moderato, 


^^ 


23.  Water  Tight  Doors. 


^^^^^^^ 


m 


m 


Z2 


E 


24.  Inspection. 


>k.rj|f  r^ir^.rir'^r. 


V\  ri'i^ jirnr-ii-- 


25.  Liberty  Party. 


26.  Light  Smoking  Lamp. 
3 


tfiiij^f  rifi.^ 


':S 


PART    IX P.UGLE    CALLS. 

27,  Out  Smoking  Lamp. 


193 


^ 


810.  Miscellaneous  calls. — 


i.- Torpedo  Defense  Quarters. 
(To  Arms.) 


<S'^g. 


Quick. 


5 


0  <*  r 


S9.  General  Quarters. 
J-t-m. 


f       0      *- 


I         fl       i  ■» 


^^ 


^■^^^^ 


$m 


»       ^       0. 


so.  Abandon  Ship. 


^ii 


Jj^ja 


irrirw 


:nt=: 


^ 


#  •  #  ^  ^ 


194 


Quiek.   ^ 


SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

31.  Fire  Quarters. 


\p^ 


tv^ir   rTt^ 


^^--^ 


T"     ^■'^' 


m 


SS: 


If^-^1d7j^ 


I  ■    ^-'  i- H !*■•  t      I         I      ff         T 


$ 


Eepeat  at  wUL 


i 


-^Si- 


:^^t 


^^.  Swimming. 


^m 


:5c:=M»— ^t 


3S= 


-^-n-J» 


^5.  Go  m  //z^  Mooter  (Overboard). 


ti=5— =t- C— J-^^ 


H—I^Z—^ 


ist=zt- 


1 


a=;3;ia=jL3g3=&3=h=D 


^5.  Flourishes. 


Quiik. 

-4=^ — »— 7^— 


1^1 


PART   IX — nUGLE   CALLS. 

S6.  Ruffles  (fur  the  Drum). 


195 


2z=zc 


37.  Extra  Duty  Men. 


-/• f   »   p  f: 


m 


g 


^        1  h» 


^^^^^^^^^^^ 


38.  Division. 

Note.— Sounded   once,   followed  by  one  or  more  c   notes  to  Indicate 
division. 

Modernio. 


;^-s^; 


irrrr. 


Z^fZ^ZfZI 


-M.'      ,      ff-- 


zt3^-=t=;,'iz: 


59.  School. 


Quick. 


^^4=^ 


.#_>._ 


'-X- 


:b^ 


rtz::: 


1*3: 


^^i^iiE^^f^j 


7431°— 23 14 


196  SHIP   AND   GUN    DRILLS. 

40,  Saluting  Gun  Crcvs  to  Quarters. 


$ 


nth 


-ti^^ 


_« ^fiL^   fi.fB    _^ 


m 


^End. 


^^^^^^^^^^^^^-fl^ 


^SX^TL^S^J^s^--^! 


41.  Belay   (to  Revoke  a  Call). 
Note. — Repeat  the  call,  if  necessary,  and  then  sound  te^ay. 


[{:in.u  un^ 


m 


Torpedo  Defense  Fire  Control  Exercise. 


fc^riiilcfyLl^^ 


A  A 


M  t'\^'^  if^q^^^ 


43.  Main  Battery  Jure  Control  Exercise. 


1^,  iii^^irrrji  ujojUji 


PART    IX BUGLE    CALLS. 

44;  Man   Searchlights. 

^    \         3     ^      f 


197 


m-A- 


^ 


e^ 


m 


^m 


45,  Man  Range  Finders. 


% 


46,  Surgeon's  Party. 


^igy^pff^fpsjj^,;^)^ 


47.  All  Signalmen. 


^^^^^^m 


4S,  Working  Party. 
3 


^^^^^^m 


811.  Boat  calls. — 

Note. — If  there  be  more  than  one  boat  of  a  kind  its  number  is  indi- 
cated by  the  proper  number  of  c  notes  following  the  call. 

49.  Steamers. 


i 


Ffc!4#=ft=P^ 


50.  Launches. 


^^P 


i 


198 


SHIP   AND    GUN   DRILLS. 
51.' Cutters. 


^^^^^ 


^cz?: 


ttP 


eE^S 


SS.  Whalehoats. 


l^^Wfer 


£ 


P=^ 


^ 


<?>?.  Barge. 


1 

54. 

Gig. 

'   ^  p  ^  1* 

\i 

5  4-t:       ^ 

--^f-r- 

=^-^r= 

L^.J'        '^— [-^---ItfrH--^^^-*— ^1  U-=^ 


55.   Dinghy   ('or    Wherry). 

Nofe. — To   call   away   dinqrhy  sound   this   call   twice.      To   call   away 
wherry,  sound  this  call  once. 


m^^ 


:i=r 


^=M^7g| 


5G.  Aivay  All  Boats. 


>323; 


H — ^— 1 #- 


:5t3;it 


^1 


PART   IX BUGLE    CALLS. 

57.  Hook   On. 


199 


pg 


58.  Man  the  Boat  Falls. 


■50.    Motor  Boat. 


i 


T=t^ 


ill 


GO.  Race  Boat  Crew. 


i 


e^EtttsE 


S 


i^:^ 


INFANTRY  AND  ARTILLERY  CALLS, 

812.  Calls  used  mainly  on  shore. — 

Gl.  Guard-inoujit. 
Quick. 


200 


SHIP    AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

62.  Compayiy  Commander s  Call. 


Q^__     g  ^ 


63.  Call  to  Quarters. 


Slow.  "'^^  ^""  *^  sjuariers.  /^n 


A                          3 

p 

/?»       O       -Co 

CiT'                 ^          1 

«     .^^     «    ;          «  __      .      . 

E-^r  fi 

Pnr — "   c  :  ^-^ — 

i'-r-'-r-u.'H^-f- 

Lj.       1 " 

Quit' A', 


64.  Dress-Parade. 
(Ship  call— General  Muster) 


.^— ^-i ' 


^4=;!: 


0 


lick. 


PAirr    IX BUGLE    CALLS. 

66.    Adjutant's  Call. 


201 


^m 


ISO: 


^ 


4-fL-4- 


a 


$m 


t=t?: 


^#E^ 


813.  Drill  signals.— 

67.  Attention   for  Silence), 


tSlow. 


=t:: 


i 


65.  Forward;  or,  F«//  ^/^/j.    March. 
fOr  Man  the  Drags.) 
Blow. 


:^^^ 


±:t 


-r—-^- 


^ 


69.  Halt. 


^^ 


70.  Quick   Time.    March 
,     Sloto. 


§3--=*^ 


*z±^ 


II 


4^ 


71.  Double  Time.    March. 
(Ship  call— Bear  a  Hand) 
Quick. 


^—a—.n^iM. 


-I — f- 


-#— ^ 


^1 


202 


SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

72.  Charge. 
(Ship  call — Man  Overboard) 


Quick 


m 


Repeat  at  vUL 


73.  Guide  Right. 
.      Slow.         ^ 


Si^^l 


74.  Guide  Left. 
Slow. 


p^m 


75.  Guide  Center 
Slow.       ^ 


m 


m 


76.  Companies. 


Quick. 


P^gl 


77.  Battalions. 


Moderato, 


-A-^- 


:U 


-.^-^^X-^ 


i 


78.  Squads  Right;  or,  By  the  Right  Flank 
(In  Artillery,  Sections  Right  Turn.)     March. 
dioderato,  o 


$ 


EE3 


]\ 


PART    IX BUGLE    CALLS. 


203 


79.  Squads  Left;  or,  By  the  Left  Flank. 
(In  Artillery,  Sections  Left  Turn.)    March. 

Moderato.  _ 


m 


B: 


S— 


I 


80.    Squads  (In  Artillery,  Sections)  Right  About.  March. 
-^ — I • • * ^  n 


81.    Squads  (In  Artillery,  Sections)   Left  About.  March. 


Slota. 


63 


-*— 


— 5- 


82.  Column  Right.    March. 


Blovg. 


bfiT^tziLzii 


^m 


8S.  Column  Left.    March. 


8J^.  Right  Oblique.    March. 
Slow. 


mm^^mmlm 


85.  Left  Oblique.    March. 


i 


Sloir. 


:2: 


I 


204  SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

86.  Right  Front  into  Line.    March. 
3Ioderalo. 


m 


87.  Left  Front  into  Line.    March. 
Moderaio.  — *^      ^ 


E^^-*^^^i,i^^.  J I  _  J-|j 


s-t^ 


88.  On  Right  into  Line.    March. 
(Ship  call — Man  Torpedo  Defense  Battery.) 
Moderaio.  ^  /?» 


d^J^u-t^ 


ICTfT. 


W^ 


m 


-/*-H*-#- 


89.  On  Left  into  Line.    March. 
(Ship  call — Torpedo  Defense  Battery  in  Reserve.)^ 
if-leraio.        ^  .      /^  rs  '^ 


90.  Company  ('or  Companies)  Right.   March, 
(In  Artillery,  Platoons  Right  Turn.) 
Moderate. 


i^^n 


91.  Company  (or  Companies)  Left.    March. 
(In  Artillery,  Platoons  Left  Turn.) 


Moderaio. 


ip 


1^^=^^=-- 


8  ^ 


I 


Quick. 

53E 


93.  Commence  Firing. 
(Also  Commence  .Coaling.; 


•^Bat- 


II 


PAKT    TX HUGLE    CALLS. 


205 


03.  Cease  Firing. 
(Also  Knock  off  Coaling.) 


Quid- 


/Is  Skirtnishcrs.    March. 


QnUL 


•g g a- 


fi=t 


:t===P=^E£3E 


95.  To  the  Rear.     March. 


Slow. 


-I — .»   I   *      I 


^m 


Slow. 


06.  Rally  by  Company. 

1^ — ; u — I— j >^ — # > — I 


■^  »     0      0  '     0      ft'     0. 


97,  Rally  by  Sections. 


m^^^^:L^ 


Bloxp. 


98.  Rally    by   Squads. 


^^ 


Tzs: 


:ti=^ 


SI 


206 


SHIP    AND    GUN    DRILLS. 


99.  Face  to  the  Rear. 
Slav. 


m=^ 


s 


It 


w 


100.  In   Battery. 


Moierato. 


101.  From  the  Right,  Front  into  Echelon, 
^loderato.  ^ 


102.  From  the  Left,  Front  into  Echelon. 
MQtg — Prom  the  rlRht  (or  left)  rear  into  echelon  are'tbe  same  calld 
as  101  and  102,  respectively,  followed  by  Face  to  the  Reae  (99). 

Moderato. 


n         — -!'-'~g~!^rzignni£z:giizzfzi:         ~~'i —  I 


103.  Lie  Down. 
iSlovi. . 


E^^^^^ 


104.  Rise. 


Sl<yio. 


m^^^ 


^^ 


35S 


105.  Route  Step.   March. 


PART  IX BUGLE  CALLS. 

MARCHES  AND  QUICKSTEPS. 

814.  Marches. 


207 


lOG.  President's   March. 


Q^ick  time. 


.A-^-^4.:^-fi^=T- 


rnspE 


m 


^-   0  ~~7^ 


■^     0em  ft    ft 


I     I    _L_4=:r4=a 


M     .    0   \      fT 


_*     ^jtA  fut: 


§ 


-/^7.  Commander-in-Chief's  March. 
Quick  time 


i^^m 


t-  j-jd- 


f=t..ir^    ^;^ 


1^ 


1 


=1. 


intz: 


1 


5— ^- 


4       -. 


-^^ 


::t-. 


a~^ff: 


It^ 


1 


308 


Quuk  iiice. 


SHIP   AND    GUN    DRILLS. 

108.  Rogue's  March. 


^^^™q^ 


-0-0-M. 


-I_|_ 


^        Lo^RtUsJ      Ubray  Repeat  cUiciU. 


i;_if 1 1 ! r — wnr'TBg-aaB—  [        ■ ;    i 

^'W — -j««-^ -£^r*^ 


PART  IX BUGLE  CALLS. 


209 


815.  Quicksteps. 


Qukk, 


110.  Quickstep  No.  1. 


dim 

*a^ 

r-f— ^-^-f-^-1 

fesi?^ 

End. 


:a:^ 


r^r 


?c=s:i3l 


^S 


^^ 


fi^fi-r^ 


?Ch3 


i 


7-n^f^: 


£ 


^t:^ 


lil.  Quickstep  No.  ^. 


i^ 


< — L»/ 


ac  #   ,*     ^i^  ^  {  r 


i=?f?i 


j — ^H 


:5^::=^=:a::t 


i^^^^^^^P 


tjH"TlT7TQiJ^gll|!£B=;3ga3|i 


210 


SHIP   AND    GUN   DRILLS. 
11^.  Quickstep  No.  3, 


113.  Quickstep  No.  4, 
Note. — This  may  also  be  used  as  a  double 


li 


f=a=f=1=5t 


i— UJ»it: 


zrf-.T7=^a 


=£^ 


t=r^ 


i 


zurT-t 


-q-i- 


5532 


,  I— i r-2 


«: 


^^El^Egg^ 


■'--Tcitraizrr^f^zfr: 


m 


^ 


-I — h 


yrqlr-fct: 


5^ 


^^^T^^ 


PART  IX — BUGLE  CALLS. 


211 


114.  Quickstep  No.  5\  ^ 

Note. — Used  chiefly  as  a  double^  but  may  also  6e~  used  as  fl  quickstep. 


4 


&=i 


it^S 


S3 


:=S=ir- 


si^ 


m 


m^s 


»=?=? 


-x^ 


iJi^i'iiT'iiiliii     iTi   II 


115,  Quickstep  No.  6. 


i 


f)liffr^lrTt-lcJJ^ 


f^^^jf^y^^Mlihi^ 


i — \;^ b- 


ft   a    ^a     ^ 


^ 


^g 


t^zd=4z: 


tj± 


, — 1^ f*    g ,     *     0 - 


1^ 


mm 


&?=PFf± 


tt 


k^S 


^M8- 


ir— h 


ar 


V-^ 


<^~wl 


^ 


7431  °— 23 15 


212 


SHIP   AND   GUN   DRILLS. 

116.  Quickstep  No.  7. 


^-xi  ^  Jst^jfg^ 


4fa't''iLBJ'L;p^lft^^i%H 


i^^fe^^%%rfe# 


117.  Quickstep  No.  S. 


AfiA^>[Vm^^^i*AlrA 


^P^IJTKIT^JFP^ 


TllfFFSrH-^H^^g 


==f^ 


:1 


PART  IX — BUGLE  CALLS. 

lis.  Quickstep  No.  ^. 


213 


^Ki^'irjnrc^^m-t^irri 


i 


1/1!  n"\ntm 


')  ol  ■''^g 


o 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  THE  LAST  DATE 
STAMPED  BELOW 


AN     INITIAL     FINE     OF     25     CENTS 

WILL  BE  ASSESSED  FOR  FAILURE  TO  RETURN 
THIS  BOOK  ON  THE  DATE  DUE.  THE  PENALTY 
WILL  INCREASE  TO  SO  CENTS  ON  THE  FOURTH 
DAY  AND  TO  $1.00  ON  THE  SEVENTH  DAY 
OVERDUE. 


MAR  29    1933 


MAS  17  1931 


otC     3  1937 
'^OL  2d   iS4j 

FEB  25  1984 


YA 


^,U 


,{ 


